Merge remote-tracking branch 'upstream/master'

50 files changed, 0 insertions, 17675 deletions

diff --git a/lib/lufa b/lib/lufa
new file mode 160000
+Subproject ce10f7642b0459e409839b23cc91498945119b4
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Config/AppConfig.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Config/AppConfig.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 30a265767..000000000
--- a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Config/AppConfig.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,73 +0,0 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
-
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-           www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief Application Configuration Header File
- *
- *  This is a header file which is be used to configure some of
- *  the application's compile time options, as an alternative to
- *  specifying the compile time constants supplied through a
- *  makefile or build system.
- *
- *  For information on what each token does, refer to the
- *  \ref Sec_Options section of the application documentation.
- */
-
-#ifndef _APP_CONFIG_H_
-#define _APP_CONFIG_H_
-
-	#define ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT
-	#define ENABLE_DHCP_SERVER
-	#define ENABLE_TELNET_SERVER
-	#define MAX_URI_LENGTH                50
-
-	#define DEVICE_IP_ADDRESS             (uint8_t[]){ 10,   0,   0,   2}
-	#define DEVICE_NETMASK                (uint8_t[]){255, 255, 255,   0}
-	#define DEVICE_GATEWAY                (uint8_t[]){ 10,   0,   0,   1}
-	#define SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS            (uint8_t[]){  1,   0,   1,   0,   1,   0}
-
-	#define UIP_CONF_UDP                  (defined(ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT) || defined(ENABLE_DHCP_SERVER))
-	#define UIP_CONF_BROADCAST            1
-	#define UIP_CONF_TCP                  1
-	#define UIP_CONF_UDP_CONNS            1
-	#define UIP_CONF_MAX_CONNECTIONS      3
-	#define UIP_CONF_MAX_LISTENPORTS      5
-	#define UIP_CONF_BUFFER_SIZE          1514
-	#define UIP_CONF_LL_802154            0
-	#define UIP_CONF_LL_80211             0
-	#define UIP_CONF_ROUTER               0
-	#define UIP_CONF_ICMP6                0
-	#define UIP_CONF_ICMP_DEST_UNREACH    1
-	#define UIP_URGDATA                   0
-	#define UIP_ARCH_CHKSUM               0
-	#define UIP_ARCH_ADD32                0
-	#define UIP_NEIGHBOR_CONF_ADDRTYPE    0
-
-#endif
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Config/LUFAConfig.h
deleted file mode 100644
index ba602dbad..000000000
--- a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Config/LUFAConfig.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,93 +0,0 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
-
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-           www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
- *
- *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
- *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
- *  a makefile.
- *
- *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
- *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
- */
-
-#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
-#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
-
-	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
-
-		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
-//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
-
-		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
-//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
-//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
-//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
-//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
-//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
-//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
-//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
-
-		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
-//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
-		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
-//		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
-//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
-//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
-//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
-//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
-
-		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
-//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
-		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
-//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
-//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
-		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
-		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            0
-		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
-//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
-		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
-//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
-//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
-
-		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
-		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              0
-//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
-//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
-//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
-//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
-
-	#else
-
-		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
-
-	#endif
-#endif
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Descriptors.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Descriptors.c
deleted file mode 100644
index 72dda9f12..000000000
--- a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Descriptors.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,295 +0,0 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
-
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-           www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
- *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
- *  the device's capabilities and functions.
- */
-
-#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-
-/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
- *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
- *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
- *  process begins.
- */
-const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
-{
-	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
-
-	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
-	.Class                  = USB_CSCP_IADDeviceClass,
-	.SubClass               = USB_CSCP_IADDeviceSubclass,
-	.Protocol               = USB_CSCP_IADDeviceProtocol,
-
-	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
-
-	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
-	.ProductID              = 0x2069,
-	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1),
-
-	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
-	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
-	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
-
-	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
-};
-
-/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
- *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
- *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
- *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
- */
-const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
-{
-	.Config =
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
-
-			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
-			.TotalInterfaces        = 3,
-
-			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
-			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-
-			.ConfigAttributes       = USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED,
-
-			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
-		},
-
-	.CDC_IAD =
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t), .Type = DTYPE_InterfaceAssociation},
-
-			.FirstInterfaceIndex    = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
-			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
-
-			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,
-			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass,
-			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_VendorSpecificProtocol,
-
-			.IADStrIndex            = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.CDC_CCI_Interface =
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
-
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
-
-			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,
-			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass,
-			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_VendorSpecificProtocol,
-
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.CDC_Functional_Header =
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
-			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Header,
-
-			.CDCSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
-		},
-
-	.CDC_Functional_ACM =
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
-			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_ACM,
-
-			.Capabilities           = 0x00,
-		},
-
-	.CDC_Functional_Union =
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
-			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Union,
-
-			.MasterInterfaceNumber  = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
-			.SlaveInterfaceNumber   = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI,
-		},
-
-	.CDC_NotificationEndpoint =
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-
-			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR,
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0xFF
-		},
-
-	.CDC_DCI_Interface =
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
-
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
-
-			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCDataClass,
-			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_NoDataSubclass,
-			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_NoDataProtocol,
-
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.RNDIS_DataOutEndpoint =
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-
-			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_RX_EPADDR,
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
-		},
-
-	.RNDIS_DataInEndpoint =
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-
-			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_TX_EPADDR,
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
-		},
-
-	.MS_Interface =
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
-			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_MassStorage,
-			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
-
-			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
-
-			.Class                  = MS_CSCP_MassStorageClass,
-			.SubClass               = MS_CSCP_SCSITransparentSubclass,
-			.Protocol               = MS_CSCP_BulkOnlyTransportProtocol,
-
-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
-		},
-
-	.MS_DataInEndpoint =
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-
-			.EndpointAddress        = MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPADDR,
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
-		},
-
-	.MS_DataOutEndpoint =
-		{
-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-
-			.EndpointAddress        = MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPADDR,
-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
-			.EndpointSize           = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
-		}
-};
-
-/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
- *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
- *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
- */
-const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
-
-/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
- *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera");
-
-/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
- *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- *  Descriptor.
- */
-const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LUFA Webserver");
-
-/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
- *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
- *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
- *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
- *  USB host.
- */
-uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
-                                    const uint16_t wIndex,
-                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
-{
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
-	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
-
-	const void* Address = NULL;
-	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
-
-	switch (DescriptorType)
-	{
-		case DTYPE_Device:
-			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_Configuration:
-			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
-			break;
-		case DTYPE_String:
-			switch (DescriptorNumber)
-			{
-				case STRING_ID_Language:
-					Address = &LanguageString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
-					Address = &ManufacturerString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-				case STRING_ID_Product:
-					Address = &ProductString;
-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
-					break;
-			}
-
-			break;
-	}
-
-	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
-	return Size;
-}
-
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Descriptors.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Descriptors.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 66da1b654..000000000
--- a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Descriptors.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,128 +0,0 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
-
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-           www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-
-		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Endpoint address of the Mass Storage device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
-		#define MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPADDR         (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 3)
-
-		/** Endpoint address of the Mass Storage host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
-		#define MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPADDR        (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 4)
-
-		/** Size in bytes of the Mass Storage data endpoints. */
-		#define MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE         64
-
-		/** Endpoint address of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
-		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR        (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 5)
-
-		/** Endpoint address of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
-		#define CDC_TX_EPADDR                  (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 1)
-
-		/** Endpoint address of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
-		#define CDC_RX_EPADDR                  (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 2)
-
-		/** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
-		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE        8
-
-		/** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */
-		#define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE                64
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
-		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
-		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
-		 */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t  Config;
-
-			// RNDIS CDC Command Interface
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t CDC_IAD;
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t             CDC_CCI_Interface;
-			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t  CDC_Functional_Header;
-			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t     CDC_Functional_ACM;
-			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t   CDC_Functional_Union;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t              CDC_NotificationEndpoint;
-
-			// RNDIS CDC Data Interface
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t             CDC_DCI_Interface;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t              RNDIS_DataOutEndpoint;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t              RNDIS_DataInEndpoint;
-
-			// Mass Storage Interface
-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t             MS_Interface;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t              MS_DataInEndpoint;
-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t              MS_DataOutEndpoint;
-		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
-
-		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
-		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
-		 *  interface from other descriptors.
-		 */
-		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
-		{
-			INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI     = 0, /**< CDC CCI interface descriptor ID */
-			INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI     = 1, /**< CDC DCI interface descriptor ID */
-			INTERFACE_ID_MassStorage = 2, /**< Mass storage interface descriptor ID */
-		};
-
-		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
-		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
-		 *  other descriptors.
-		 */
-		enum StringDescriptors_t
-		{
-			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
-			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
-			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
-		};
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
-		                                    const uint16_t wIndex,
-		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
-		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-#endif
-
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/LUFA Webserver RNDIS.inf b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/LUFA Webserver RNDIS.inf
deleted file mode 100644
index c77de8f6b..000000000
--- a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/LUFA Webserver RNDIS.inf
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,59 +0,0 @@
-;     Windows LUFA RNDIS Setup File
-; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
-
-[DefaultInstall]
-CopyINF="LUFA Webserver RNDIS.inf"
-
-[Version]
-Signature="$Windows NT$"
-Class=Net
-ClassGuid={4d36e972-e325-11ce-bfc1-08002be10318}
-Provider=%MFGNAME%
-DriverVer=7/1/2012,10.0.0.0
-
-[Manufacturer]
-%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTx86, NTamd64, NTia64
-
-[ControlFlags]
-ExcludeFromSelect=*
-
-[DriverInstall]
-Characteristics=0x84 ; NCF_PHYSICAL + NCF_HAS_UI
-BusType=15
-include=netrndis.inf
-needs=Usb_Rndis.ndi
-AddReg=Rndis_AddReg_Vista
-
-[DriverInstall.Services]
-include=netrndis.inf
-needs=Usb_Rndis.ndi.Services
-
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;  Vendor and Product ID Definitions
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side
-; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match.
-; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID.  Use the format as shown below.
-; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs.
-; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line.
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-[DeviceList]
-%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2069
-
-[DeviceList.NTx86]
-%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2069
-
-[DeviceList.NTamd64]
-%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2069
-
-[DeviceList.NTia64]
-%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2069
-
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;  String Definitions
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;Modify these strings to customize your device
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-[Strings]
-MFGNAME="http://www.lufa-lib.org"
-DESCRIPTION="LUFA USB RNDIS Demo"
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPClientApp.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPClientApp.c
deleted file mode 100644
index 760718127..000000000
--- a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPClientApp.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,208 +0,0 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
-
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-           www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  DHCP Client Application. When connected to the uIP stack, this will retrieve IP configuration settings from the
- *  DHCP server on the network.
- */
-
-#define  INCLUDE_FROM_DHCPCLIENTAPP_C
-#include "DHCPClientApp.h"
-
-#if defined(ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-
-/** Initialization function for the DHCP client. */
-void DHCPClientApp_Init(void)
-{
-	/* Create a new UDP connection to the DHCP server port for the DHCP solicitation */
-	struct uip_udp_conn* Connection = uip_udp_new(&uip_broadcast_addr, HTONS(DHCP_SERVER_PORT));
-
-	/* If the connection was successfully created, bind it to the local DHCP client port */
-	if (Connection != NULL)
-	{
-		uip_udp_appstate_t* const AppState = &Connection->appstate;
-		uip_udp_bind(Connection, HTONS(DHCP_CLIENT_PORT));
-
-		/* Set the initial client state */
-		AppState->DHCPClient.CurrentState = DHCP_STATE_SendDiscover;
-
-		/* Set timeout period to half a second for a DHCP server to respond */
-		timer_set(&AppState->DHCPClient.Timeout, CLOCK_SECOND / 2);
-	}
-}
-
-/** uIP stack application callback for the DHCP client. This function must be called each time the TCP/IP stack
- *  needs a UDP packet to be processed.
- */
-void DHCPClientApp_Callback(void)
-{
-	uip_udp_appstate_t* const AppState    = &uip_udp_conn->appstate;
-	DHCP_Header_t*      const AppData     = (DHCP_Header_t*)uip_appdata;
-	uint16_t                  AppDataSize = 0;
-
-	switch (AppState->DHCPClient.CurrentState)
-	{
-		case DHCP_STATE_SendDiscover:
-			/* Clear all DHCP settings, reset client IP address */
-			memset(&AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data, 0x00, sizeof(AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data));
-			uip_sethostaddr((uip_ipaddr_t*)&AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.AllocatedIP);
-
-			/* Fill out the DHCP response header */
-			AppDataSize += DHCPClientApp_FillDHCPHeader(AppData, DHCP_DISCOVER, AppState);
-
-			/* Add the required DHCP options list to the packet */
-			uint8_t RequiredOptionList[] = {DHCP_OPTION_SUBNET_MASK, DHCP_OPTION_ROUTER, DHCP_OPTION_DNS_SERVER};
-			AppDataSize += DHCPCommon_SetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_REQ_LIST, sizeof(RequiredOptionList),
-			                                    RequiredOptionList);
-
-			/* Send the DHCP DISCOVER packet */
-			uip_udp_send(AppDataSize);
-
-			/* Reset the timeout timer, progress to next state */
-			timer_reset(&AppState->DHCPClient.Timeout);
-			AppState->DHCPClient.CurrentState = DHCP_STATE_WaitForOffer;
-
-			break;
-		case DHCP_STATE_WaitForOffer:
-			if (!(uip_newdata()))
-			{
-				/* Check if the DHCP timeout period has expired while waiting for a response */
-				if (timer_expired(&AppState->DHCPClient.Timeout))
-				  AppState->DHCPClient.CurrentState = DHCP_STATE_SendDiscover;
-
-				break;
-			}
-
-			uint8_t OfferResponse_MessageType;
-			if ((AppData->TransactionID == DHCP_TRANSACTION_ID) &&
-			    DHCPCommon_GetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_MSG_TYPE, &OfferResponse_MessageType) &&
-			    (OfferResponse_MessageType == DHCP_OFFER))
-			{
-				/* Received a DHCP offer for an IP address, copy over values for later request */
-				memcpy(&AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.AllocatedIP, &AppData->YourIP, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t));
-				DHCPCommon_GetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_SUBNET_MASK, &AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.Netmask);
-				DHCPCommon_GetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_ROUTER,      &AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.GatewayIP);
-				DHCPCommon_GetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_SERVER_ID,   &AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.ServerIP);
-
-				timer_reset(&AppState->DHCPClient.Timeout);
-				AppState->DHCPClient.CurrentState = DHCP_STATE_SendRequest;
-			}
-
-			break;
-		case DHCP_STATE_SendRequest:
-			/* Fill out the DHCP response header */
-			AppDataSize += DHCPClientApp_FillDHCPHeader(AppData, DHCP_REQUEST, AppState);
-
-			/* Add the DHCP REQUESTED IP ADDRESS option to the packet */
-			AppDataSize += DHCPCommon_SetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_REQ_IPADDR, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t),
-			                                    &AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.AllocatedIP);
-
-			/* Add the DHCP SERVER IP ADDRESS option to the packet */
-			AppDataSize += DHCPCommon_SetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_SERVER_ID, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t),
-			                                    &AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.ServerIP);
-
-			/* Send the DHCP REQUEST packet */
-			uip_udp_send(AppDataSize);
-
-			/* Reset the timeout timer, progress to next state */
-			timer_reset(&AppState->DHCPClient.Timeout);
-			AppState->DHCPClient.CurrentState = DHCP_STATE_WaitForACK;
-
-			break;
-		case DHCP_STATE_WaitForACK:
-			if (!(uip_newdata()))
-			{
-				/* Check if the DHCP timeout period has expired while waiting for a response */
-				if (timer_expired(&AppState->DHCPClient.Timeout))
-				  AppState->DHCPClient.CurrentState = DHCP_STATE_SendDiscover;
-
-				break;
-			}
-
-			uint8_t RequestResponse_MessageType;
-			if ((AppData->TransactionID == DHCP_TRANSACTION_ID) &&
-			    DHCPCommon_GetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_MSG_TYPE, &RequestResponse_MessageType) &&
-			    (RequestResponse_MessageType == DHCP_ACK))
-			{
-				/* Set the new network parameters from the DHCP server */
-				uip_sethostaddr((uip_ipaddr_t*)&AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.AllocatedIP);
-				uip_setnetmask((uip_ipaddr_t*)&AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.Netmask);
-				uip_setdraddr((uip_ipaddr_t*)&AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.GatewayIP);
-
-				AppState->DHCPClient.CurrentState = DHCP_STATE_AddressLeased;
-			}
-
-			break;
-	}
-}
-
-/** Fills the DHCP packet response with the appropriate BOOTP header for DHCP. This fills out all the required
- *  fields, leaving only the additional DHCP options to be added to the packet before it is sent to the DHCP server.
- *
- *  \param[out] DHCPHeader       Location in the packet buffer where the BOOTP header should be written to
- *  \param[in]  DHCPMessageType  DHCP Message type, such as DHCP_DISCOVER
- *  \param[in]  AppState         Application state of the current UDP connection
- *
- *  \return Size in bytes of the created DHCP packet
- */
-static uint16_t DHCPClientApp_FillDHCPHeader(DHCP_Header_t* const DHCPHeader,
-                                             const uint8_t DHCPMessageType,
-                                             uip_udp_appstate_t* const AppState)
-{
-	/* Erase existing packet data so that we start will all 0x00 DHCP header data */
- 	memset(DHCPHeader, 0, sizeof(DHCP_Header_t));
-
-	/* Fill out the DHCP packet header */
-	DHCPHeader->Operation             = DHCP_OP_BOOTREQUEST;
-	DHCPHeader->HardwareType          = DHCP_HTYPE_ETHERNET;
-	DHCPHeader->HardwareAddressLength = sizeof(MACAddress);
-	DHCPHeader->Hops                  = 0;
-	DHCPHeader->TransactionID         = DHCP_TRANSACTION_ID;
-	DHCPHeader->ElapsedSeconds        = 0;
-	DHCPHeader->Flags                 = HTONS(BOOTP_BROADCAST);
-	memcpy(&DHCPHeader->ClientIP,     &uip_hostaddr,        sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t));
-	memcpy(&DHCPHeader->YourIP,       &AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.AllocatedIP, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t));
-	memcpy(&DHCPHeader->NextServerIP, &AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.ServerIP,    sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t));
-	memcpy(&DHCPHeader->ClientHardwareAddress, &MACAddress, sizeof(struct uip_eth_addr));
-	DHCPHeader->Cookie                = DHCP_MAGIC_COOKIE;
-
-	/* Add a DHCP message type and terminator options to the start of the DHCP options field */
-	DHCPHeader->Options[0]            = DHCP_OPTION_MSG_TYPE;
-	DHCPHeader->Options[1]            = 1;
-	DHCPHeader->Options[2]            = DHCPMessageType;
-	DHCPHeader->Options[3]            = DHCP_OPTION_END;
-
-	/* Calculate the total number of bytes added to the outgoing packet */
-	return (sizeof(DHCP_Header_t) + 4);
-}
-
-#endif
-
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPClientApp.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPClientApp.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 0aec00331..000000000
--- a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPClientApp.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,69 +0,0 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
-
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-           www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for DHCPClientApp.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _DHCPCLIENT_APP_H_
-#define _DHCPCLIENT_APP_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <stdio.h>
-
-		#include <uip.h>
-
-		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
-		#include "../Webserver.h"
-		#include "DHCPCommon.h"
-
-	/* Enums: */
-		/** States for each DHCP connection to a DHCP client. */
-		enum DHCP_Client_States_t
-		{
-			DHCP_STATE_SendDiscover,  /**< Send DISCOVER packet to retrieve DHCP lease offers */
-			DHCP_STATE_WaitForOffer,  /**< Waiting for OFFER packet giving available DHCP leases */
-			DHCP_STATE_SendRequest,   /**< Send REQUEST packet to request a DHCP lease */
-			DHCP_STATE_WaitForACK,    /**< Wait for ACK packet to complete the DHCP lease */
-			DHCP_STATE_AddressLeased, /**< DHCP address has been leased from a DHCP server */
-		};
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void DHCPClientApp_Init(void);
-		void DHCPClientApp_Callback(void);
-
-		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_DHCPCLIENTAPP_C)
-			static uint16_t DHCPClientApp_FillDHCPHeader(DHCP_Header_t* const DHCPHeader,
-			                                             const uint8_t DHCPMessageType,
-			                                             uip_udp_appstate_t* const AppState);
-		#endif
-#endif
-
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPCommon.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPCommon.c
deleted file mode 100644
index 6d80f65ca..000000000
--- a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPCommon.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,103 +0,0 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
-
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-           www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Common DHCP routines to manage DHCP packet data.
- */
-
-#include "DHCPCommon.h"
-
-#if defined(ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT) || defined(ENABLE_DHCP_SERVER) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-
-/** Sets the given DHCP option in the DHCP packet's option list. This automatically moves the
- *  end of options terminator past the new option in the options list.
- *
- *  \param[in,out] DHCPOptionList  Pointer to the start of the DHCP packet's options list
- *  \param[in]     Option          DHCP option to add to the list
- *  \param[in]     DataLen         Size in bytes of the option data to add
- *  \param[in]     OptionData      Buffer where the option's data is to be sourced from
- *
- *  \return Number of bytes added to the DHCP packet
- */
-uint8_t DHCPCommon_SetOption(uint8_t* DHCPOptionList,
-                             const uint8_t Option,
-                             const uint8_t DataLen,
-                             void* const OptionData)
-{
-	/* Skip through the DHCP options list until the terminator option is found */
-	while (*DHCPOptionList != DHCP_OPTION_END)
-	  DHCPOptionList += (DHCPOptionList[1] + 2);
-
-	/* Overwrite the existing terminator with the new option, add a new terminator at the end of the list */
-	DHCPOptionList[0] = Option;
-	DHCPOptionList[1] = DataLen;
-	memcpy(&DHCPOptionList[2], OptionData, DataLen);
-	DHCPOptionList[2 + DataLen] = DHCP_OPTION_END;
-
-	/* Calculate the total number of bytes added to the outgoing packet */
-	return (2 + DataLen);
-}
-
-/** Retrieves the given option's data (if present) from the DHCP packet's options list.
- *
- *  \param[in,out] DHCPOptionList  Pointer to the start of the DHCP packet's options list
- *  \param[in]     Option          DHCP option to retrieve to the list
- *  \param[out]    Destination     Buffer where the option's data is to be written to if found
- *
- *  \return Boolean \c true if the option was found in the DHCP packet's options list, \c false otherwise
- */
-bool DHCPCommon_GetOption(const uint8_t* DHCPOptionList,
-                          const uint8_t Option,
-                          void* const Destination)
-{
-	/* Look through the incoming DHCP packet's options list for the requested option */
-	while (*DHCPOptionList != DHCP_OPTION_END)
-	{
-		/* Check if the current DHCP option in the packet is the one requested */
-		if (DHCPOptionList[0] == Option)
-		{
-			/* Copy request option's data to the destination buffer */
-			memcpy(Destination, &DHCPOptionList[2], DHCPOptionList[1]);
-
-			/* Indicate that the requested option data was successfully retrieved */
-			return true;
-		}
-
-		/* Skip to next DHCP option in the options list */
-		DHCPOptionList += (DHCPOptionList[1] + 2);
-	}
-
-	/* Requested option not found in the incoming packet's DHCP options list */
-	return false;
-}
-
-#endif
-
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPCommon.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPCommon.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 8f54c1671..000000000
--- a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPCommon.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,159 +0,0 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
-
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-           www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for common DHCP defines.
- */
-
-#ifndef _DHCP_COMMON_H_
-#define _DHCP_COMMON_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <stdint.h>
-		#include <stdbool.h>
-		#include <string.h>
-
-		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
-
-		#include <uip.h>
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** UDP listen port for a BOOTP server. */
-		#define DHCP_SERVER_PORT          67
-
-		/** UDP listen port for a BOOTP client. */
-		#define DHCP_CLIENT_PORT          68
-
-		/** BOOTP message type for a BOOTP REQUEST message. */
-		#define DHCP_OP_BOOTREQUEST       0x01
-
-		/** BOOTP message type for a BOOTP REPLY message. */
-		#define DHCP_OP_BOOTREPLY         0x02
-
-		/** BOOTP flag for a BOOTP broadcast message. */
-		#define BOOTP_BROADCAST           0x8000
-
-		/** Magic DHCP cookie for a BOOTP message to identify it as a DHCP message. */
-		#define DHCP_MAGIC_COOKIE         0x63538263
-
-		/** Unique transaction ID used to identify DHCP responses to the client. */
-		#define DHCP_TRANSACTION_ID       0x13245466
-
-		/** DHCP message type for a DISCOVER message. */
-		#define DHCP_DISCOVER             1
-
-		/** DHCP message type for an OFFER message. */
-		#define DHCP_OFFER                2
-
-		/** DHCP message type for a REQUEST message. */
-		#define DHCP_REQUEST              3
-
-		/** DHCP message type for a DECLINE message. */
-		#define DHCP_DECLINE              4
-
-		/** DHCP message type for an ACK message. */
-		#define DHCP_ACK                  5
-
-		/** DHCP message type for a NAK message. */
-		#define DHCP_NAK                  6
-
-		/** DHCP message type for a RELEASE message. */
-		#define DHCP_RELEASE              7
-
-		/** DHCP medium type for standard Ethernet. */
-		#define DHCP_HTYPE_ETHERNET       1
-
-		/** DHCP message option for the network subnet mask. */
-		#define DHCP_OPTION_SUBNET_MASK   1
-
-		/** DHCP message option for the network gateway IP. */
-		#define DHCP_OPTION_ROUTER        3
-
-		/** DHCP message option for the network DNS server. */
-		#define DHCP_OPTION_DNS_SERVER    6
-
-		/** DHCP message option for the requested client IP address. */
-		#define DHCP_OPTION_REQ_IPADDR    50
-
-		/** DHCP message option for the IP address lease time. */
-		#define DHCP_OPTION_LEASE_TIME    51
-
-		/** DHCP message option for the DHCP message type. */
-		#define DHCP_OPTION_MSG_TYPE      53
-
-		/** DHCP message option for the DHCP server IP. */
-		#define DHCP_OPTION_SERVER_ID     54
-
-		/** DHCP message option for the list of required options from the server. */
-		#define DHCP_OPTION_REQ_LIST      55
-
-		/** DHCP message option for the options list terminator. */
-		#define DHCP_OPTION_END           255
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for a DHCP packet inside an Ethernet frame. */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			uint8_t      Operation; /**< DHCP operation, either DHCP_OP_BOOTREQUEST or DHCP_OP_BOOTREPLY */
-			uint8_t      HardwareType; /**< Hardware carrier type constant */
-			uint8_t      HardwareAddressLength;  /**< Length in bytes of a hardware (MAC) address on the network */
-			uint8_t      Hops; /**< Number of hops required to reach the server, unused */
-
-			uint32_t     TransactionID; /**< Unique ID of the DHCP packet, for positive matching between sent and received packets */
-
-			uint16_t     ElapsedSeconds; /**< Elapsed seconds since the request was made */
-			uint16_t     Flags; /**< BOOTP packet flags */
-
-			uip_ipaddr_t ClientIP; /**< Client IP address, if already leased an IP */
-			uip_ipaddr_t YourIP; /**< Client IP address */
-			uip_ipaddr_t NextServerIP; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */
-			uip_ipaddr_t RelayAgentIP; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */
-
-			uint8_t      ClientHardwareAddress[16]; /**< Hardware (MAC) address of the client making a request to the DHCP server */
-			uint8_t      ServerHostnameString[64]; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */
-			uint8_t      BootFileName[128]; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */
-
-			uint32_t     Cookie; /**< Magic BOOTP protocol cookie to indicate a valid packet */
-
-			uint8_t      Options[]; /**< DHCP message options */
-		} DHCP_Header_t;
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		uint8_t  DHCPCommon_SetOption(uint8_t* DHCPOptionList,
-			                          const uint8_t Option,
-			                          const uint8_t DataLen,
-			                          void* const OptionData);
-		bool     DHCPCommon_GetOption(const uint8_t* DHCPOptionList,
-			                          const uint8_t Option,
-			                          void* const Destination);
-
-#endif
-
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPServerApp.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPServerApp.c
deleted file mode 100644
index fea54ddb0..000000000
--- a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPServerApp.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,265 +0,0 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
-
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-           www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  DHCP Server Application. When connected to the uIP stack, this will send IP configuration settings to a
- *  DHCP client on the network.
- */
-
-#define  INCLUDE_FROM_DHCPSERVERAPP_C
-#include "DHCPServerApp.h"
-
-#if defined(ENABLE_DHCP_SERVER) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-
-struct uip_conn* BroadcastConnection;
-
-uint8_t LeasedIPs[255 / 8];
-
-/** Initialization function for the DHCP server. */
-void DHCPServerApp_Init(void)
-{
-	/* Listen on port 67 for DHCP server connections from hosts */
-	uip_listen(HTONS(DHCP_SERVER_PORT));
-
-	/* Create a new UDP connection to the DHCP server port for the DHCP solicitation */
-	struct uip_udp_conn* BroadcastConnection = uip_udp_new(&uip_broadcast_addr, HTONS(DHCP_CLIENT_PORT));
-
-	/* If the connection was successfully created, bind it to the local DHCP client port */
-	if (BroadcastConnection != NULL)
-	  uip_udp_bind(BroadcastConnection, HTONS(DHCP_SERVER_PORT));
-
-	/* Set all IP addresses as unleased */
-	memset(LeasedIPs, 0x00, sizeof(LeasedIPs));
-}
-
-/** uIP stack application callback for the DHCP server. This function must be called each time the TCP/IP stack
- *  needs a UDP packet to be processed.
- */
-void DHCPServerApp_Callback(void)
-{
-	DHCP_Header_t* const AppData     = (DHCP_Header_t*)uip_appdata;
-	uint16_t             AppDataSize = 0;
-
-	/* Only process when new data arrives - don't retransmit lost packets */
-	if (uip_newdata())
-	{
-		/* Get the DHCP message type (if present), otherwise early-abort */
-		uint8_t DHCPMessageType;
-		if (!(DHCPCommon_GetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_MSG_TYPE, &DHCPMessageType)))
-			return;
-
-		uip_ipaddr_t        Netmask, GatewayIPAddress, PreferredClientIP;
-		struct uip_eth_addr RemoteMACAddress;
-		uint32_t            TransactionID;
-
-		/* Get configured network mask, gateway IP and extract out DHCP transaction ID and remote IP */
-		uip_getnetmask(&Netmask);
-		uip_getdraddr(&GatewayIPAddress);
-		memcpy(&RemoteMACAddress, &AppData->ClientHardwareAddress, sizeof(struct uip_eth_addr));
-		TransactionID = AppData->TransactionID;
-
-		/* Try to extract out the client's preferred IP address if it is indicated in the packet */
-		if (!(DHCPCommon_GetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_REQ_IPADDR, &PreferredClientIP)))
-		  memcpy(&PreferredClientIP, &uip_all_zeroes_addr, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t));
-
-		switch (DHCPMessageType)
-		{
-			case DHCP_DISCOVER:
-				/* If no preference was made or the preferred IP is already taken, find a new address */
-				if (DHCPServerApp_CheckIfIPLeased(&PreferredClientIP))
-				  DHCPServerApp_GetUnleasedIP(&PreferredClientIP);
-
-				/* Create a new DHCP OFFER packet with the offered IP address */
-				AppDataSize += DHCPServerApp_FillDHCPHeader(AppData, DHCP_OFFER, &RemoteMACAddress, &PreferredClientIP, TransactionID);
-
-				/* Add network mask and router information to the list of DHCP OFFER packet options */
-				AppDataSize += DHCPCommon_SetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_SUBNET_MASK,
-													sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t), &Netmask);
-				AppDataSize += DHCPCommon_SetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_ROUTER,
-					                                sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t), &GatewayIPAddress);
-
-				/* Send the DHCP OFFER packet */
-				uip_poll_conn(BroadcastConnection);
-				memcpy(&uip_udp_conn->ripaddr, &uip_broadcast_addr, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t));
-				uip_udp_send(AppDataSize);
-
-				break;
-			case DHCP_REQUEST:
-				/* Check to see if the requested IP address has already been leased to a client */
-				if (!(DHCPServerApp_CheckIfIPLeased(&PreferredClientIP)))
-				{
-					/* Create a new DHCP ACK packet to accept the IP address lease */
-					AppDataSize += DHCPServerApp_FillDHCPHeader(AppData, DHCP_ACK, &RemoteMACAddress, &PreferredClientIP, TransactionID);
-
-					/* Add network mask and router information to the list of DHCP ACK packet options */
-					AppDataSize += DHCPCommon_SetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_SUBNET_MASK,
-														sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t), &Netmask);
-					AppDataSize += DHCPCommon_SetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_ROUTER,
-					                                    sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t), &GatewayIPAddress);
-
-					/* Mark the requested IP as leased to a client */
-					DHCPServerApp_LeaseIP(&PreferredClientIP);
-				}
-				else
-				{
-					/* Create a new DHCP NAK packet to reject the requested allocation */
-					AppDataSize += DHCPServerApp_FillDHCPHeader(AppData, DHCP_NAK, &RemoteMACAddress, &uip_all_zeroes_addr, TransactionID);
-				}
-
-				/* Send the DHCP ACK or NAK packet */
-				uip_poll_conn(BroadcastConnection);
-				memcpy(&uip_udp_conn->ripaddr, &uip_broadcast_addr, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t));
-				uip_udp_send(AppDataSize);
-
-				break;
-			case DHCP_RELEASE:
-				/* Mark the IP address as released in the allocation table */
-				DHCPServerApp_UnleaseIP(&uip_udp_conn->ripaddr);
-				break;
-		}
-	}
-}
-
-/** Fills the DHCP packet response with the appropriate BOOTP header for DHCP. This fills out all the required
- *  fields, leaving only the additional DHCP options to be added to the packet before it is sent to the DHCP client.
- *
- *  \param[out] DHCPHeader             Location in the packet buffer where the BOOTP header should be written to
- *  \param[in]  DHCPMessageType        DHCP Message type, such as DHCP_DISCOVER
- *  \param[in]  ClientHardwareAddress  Client MAC address the created transaction should be directed to
- *  \param[in]  PreferredClientIP      Preferred IP that should be given to the client if it is unallocated
- *  \param[in]  TransactionID          Transaction ID the created transaction should be associated with
- *
- *  \return Size in bytes of the created DHCP packet
- */
-static uint16_t DHCPServerApp_FillDHCPHeader(DHCP_Header_t* const DHCPHeader,
-                                             const uint8_t DHCPMessageType,
-                                             const struct uip_eth_addr* const ClientHardwareAddress,
-											 const uip_ipaddr_t* const PreferredClientIP,
-                                             const uint32_t TransactionID)
-{
-	/* Erase existing packet data so that we start will all 0x00 DHCP header data */
- 	memset(DHCPHeader, 0, sizeof(DHCP_Header_t));
-
-	DHCPHeader->Operation             = DHCPMessageType;
-	DHCPHeader->HardwareType          = DHCP_HTYPE_ETHERNET;
-	DHCPHeader->HardwareAddressLength = sizeof(MACAddress);
-	DHCPHeader->Hops                  = 0;
-	DHCPHeader->TransactionID         = TransactionID;
-	DHCPHeader->ElapsedSeconds        = 0;
-	DHCPHeader->Flags                 = 0;
-	memcpy(&DHCPHeader->NextServerIP, &uip_hostaddr, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t));
-	memcpy(&DHCPHeader->YourIP, PreferredClientIP, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t));
-	memcpy(&DHCPHeader->ClientHardwareAddress, ClientHardwareAddress, sizeof(struct uip_eth_addr));
-	DHCPHeader->Cookie                = DHCP_MAGIC_COOKIE;
-
-	/* Add a DHCP message type and terminator options to the start of the DHCP options field */
-	DHCPHeader->Options[0]            = DHCP_OPTION_MSG_TYPE;
-	DHCPHeader->Options[1]            = 1;
-	DHCPHeader->Options[2]            = DHCPMessageType;
-	DHCPHeader->Options[3]            = DHCP_OPTION_END;
-
-	/* Calculate the total number of bytes added to the outgoing packet */
-	return (sizeof(DHCP_Header_t) + 4);
-}
-
-/** Checks to see if the nominated IP address has already been allocated to a client.
- *
- *  \param[in] IPAddress  IP Address whose lease status should be checked
- *
- *  \pre The IP address must be within the same /24 subnet as the virtual webserver.
- *
- *  \return Boolean \c true if the IP has already been leased to a client, \c false otherwise.
- */
-static bool DHCPServerApp_CheckIfIPLeased(const uip_ipaddr_t* const IPAddress)
-{
-	uint8_t Byte = (IPAddress->u8[3] / 8);
-	uint8_t Mask = (1 << (IPAddress->u8[3] % 8));
-
-	/* Make sure that the requested IP address isn't already leased to the virtual server or another client */
-	if (IPAddress->u8[3] && !(IPAddress->u8[3] == uip_hostaddr.u8[3]) && !(LeasedIPs[Byte] & Mask))
-	  return false;
-	else
-	  return true;
-}
-
-/** Retrieves the next unleased IP in the IP address pool.
- *
- *  \param[out] NewIPAddress  Location where the generated IP Address should be stored
- */
-static void DHCPServerApp_GetUnleasedIP(uip_ipaddr_t* const NewIPAddress)
-{
-	uip_ipaddr_copy(NewIPAddress, &uip_hostaddr);
-
-	/** Look through the current subnet, skipping the broadcast and zero IP addresses */
-	for (uint8_t IP = 1; IP < 254; IP++)
-	{
-		/* Update new IP address to lease with the current IP address to test */
-		NewIPAddress->u8[3] = IP;
-
-		/* If we've found an unleased IP, abort with the updated IP stored for the called */
-		if (!(DHCPServerApp_CheckIfIPLeased(NewIPAddress)))
-		  return;
-	}
-}
-
-/** Marks the given IP Address as leased in the address pool, so that it will not be
- *  allocated to another client unless it is first released.
- *
- *  \param[in] IPAddress  IP Address to mark as leased
- *
- *  \pre The IP address must be within the same /24 subnet as the virtual webserver.
- */
-static void DHCPServerApp_LeaseIP(const uip_ipaddr_t* const IPAddress)
-{
-	uint8_t Byte = (IPAddress->u8[3] / 8);
-	uint8_t Mask = (1 << (IPAddress->u8[3] % 8));
-
-	/* Mark the IP address as leased in the allocation table */
-	LeasedIPs[Byte] |= Mask;
-}
-
-/** Marks the given IP Address as not leased in the address pool, so that it can be
- *  allocated to another client upon request.
- *
- *  \param[in] IPAddress  IP Address to mark as not leased
- *
- *  \pre The IP address must be within the same /24 subnet as the virtual webserver.
- */
-static void DHCPServerApp_UnleaseIP(const uip_ipaddr_t* const IPAddress)
-{
-	uint8_t Byte = (IPAddress->u8[3] / 8);
-	uint8_t Mask = (1 << (IPAddress->u8[3] % 8));
-
-	/* Mark the IP address as unleased in the allocation table */
-	LeasedIPs[Byte] &= ~Mask;
-}
-#endif
-
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPServerApp.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPServerApp.h
deleted file mode 100644
index a9dae7bf3..000000000
--- a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPServerApp.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,64 +0,0 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
-
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-           www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for DHCPServerApp.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _DHCPSERVER_APP_H_
-#define _DHCPSERVER_APP_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <stdio.h>
-
-		#include <uip.h>
-
-		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
-		#include "../Webserver.h"
-		#include "DHCPCommon.h"
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void DHCPServerApp_Init(void);
-		void DHCPServerApp_Callback(void);
-
-		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_DHCPSERVERAPP_C)
-		static uint16_t DHCPServerApp_FillDHCPHeader(DHCP_Header_t* const DHCPHeader,
-		                                             const uint8_t DHCPMessageType,
-		                                             const struct uip_eth_addr* const ClientHardwareAddress,
-		                                             const uip_ipaddr_t* const PreferredClientIP,
-		                                             const uint32_t TransactionID);
-		static bool DHCPServerApp_CheckIfIPLeased(const uip_ipaddr_t* const IPAddress);
-		static void DHCPServerApp_GetUnleasedIP(uip_ipaddr_t* const NewIPAddress);
-		static void DHCPServerApp_LeaseIP(const uip_ipaddr_t* const IPAddress);
-		static void DHCPServerApp_UnleaseIP(const uip_ipaddr_t* const IPAddress);
-		#endif
-#endif
-
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DataflashManager.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DataflashManager.c
deleted file mode 100644
index b1111ce39..000000000
--- a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DataflashManager.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,534 +0,0 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
-
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-           www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Functions to manage the physical Dataflash media, including reading and writing of
- *  blocks of data. These functions are called by the SCSI layer when data must be stored
- *  or retrieved to/from the physical storage media. If a different media is used (such
- *  as a SD card or EEPROM), functions similar to these will need to be generated.
- */
-
-#define  INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASHMANAGER_C
-#include "DataflashManager.h"
-
-/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), from
- *  the pre-selected data OUT endpoint. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the endpoint and writes
- *  them to the Dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks.
- *
- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state
- *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the write sequence
- *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to write
- */
-void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
-                                  const uint32_t BlockAddress,
-                                  uint16_t TotalBlocks)
-{
-	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
-	bool     UsingSecondBuffer   = false;
-
-	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
-	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-
-#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
-	/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-#endif
-
-	/* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte);
-
-	/* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */
-	if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
-	  return;
-
-	while (TotalBlocks)
-	{
-		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
-
-		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the Dataflash */
-		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
-		{
-			/* Check if the endpoint is currently empty */
-			if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
-			{
-				/* Clear the current endpoint bank */
-				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-
-				/* Wait until the host has sent another packet */
-				if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
-				  return;
-			}
-
-			/* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */
-			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
-			{
-				/* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */
-				Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
-				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-
-				/* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
-				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
-				CurrDFPage++;
-
-				/* Once all the Dataflash ICs have had their first buffers filled, switch buffers to maintain throughput */
-				if (Dataflash_GetSelectedChip() == DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))
-				  UsingSecondBuffer = !(UsingSecondBuffer);
-
-				/* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */
-				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-
-#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
-				/* If less than one Dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */
-				if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
-				{
-					/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */
-					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-					Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 : DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
-					Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-				}
-#endif
-
-				/* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */
-				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE : DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
-				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0);
-			}
-
-			/* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the Dataflash */
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
-
-			/* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
-			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
-
-			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
-			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
-
-			/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
-			if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)
-			  return;
-		}
-
-		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
-		TotalBlocks--;
-	}
-
-	/* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */
-	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-	Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00);
-	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-
-	/* If the endpoint is empty, clear it ready for the next packet from the host */
-	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
-	  Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-
-	/* Deselect all Dataflash chips */
-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-}
-
-/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), into
- *  the pre-selected data IN endpoint. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash
- *  and writes them in OS sized blocks to the endpoint.
- *
- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state
- *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the read sequence
- *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to read
- */
-void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
-                                 const uint32_t BlockAddress,
-                                 uint16_t TotalBlocks)
-{
-	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
-
-	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
-	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-
-	/* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-
-	/* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */
-	if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
-	  return;
-
-	while (TotalBlocks)
-	{
-		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
-
-		/* Read an endpoint packet sized data block from the Dataflash */
-		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
-		{
-			/* Check if the endpoint is currently full */
-			if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
-			{
-				/* Clear the endpoint bank to send its contents to the host */
-				Endpoint_ClearIN();
-
-				/* Wait until the endpoint is ready for more data */
-				if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
-				  return;
-			}
-
-			/* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */
-			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
-			{
-				/* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
-				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
-				CurrDFPage++;
-
-				/* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */
-				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-
-				/* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */
-				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
-				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-			}
-
-			/* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the Dataflash */
-			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-
-			/* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
-			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
-
-			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
-			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
-
-			/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
-			if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)
-			  return;
-		}
-
-		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
-		TotalBlocks--;
-	}
-
-	/* If the endpoint is full, send its contents to the host */
-	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
-	  Endpoint_ClearIN();
-
-	/* Deselect all Dataflash chips */
-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-}
-
-/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), from
- *  the given RAM buffer. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the buffer and writes them to the
- *  Dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks. This can be linked to FAT libraries to write files to the
- *  Dataflash.
- *
- *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the write sequence
- *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to write
- *  \param[in] BufferPtr     Pointer to the data source RAM buffer
- */
-void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress,
-                                      uint16_t TotalBlocks,
-                                      const uint8_t* BufferPtr)
-{
-	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
-	bool     UsingSecondBuffer   = false;
-
-	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
-	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-
-#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
-	/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-#endif
-
-	/* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte);
-
-	while (TotalBlocks)
-	{
-		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
-
-		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the Dataflash */
-		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
-		{
-			/* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */
-			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
-			{
-				/* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */
-				Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
-				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-
-				/* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
-				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
-				CurrDFPage++;
-
-				/* Once all the Dataflash ICs have had their first buffers filled, switch buffers to maintain throughput */
-				if (Dataflash_GetSelectedChip() == DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))
-				  UsingSecondBuffer = !(UsingSecondBuffer);
-
-				/* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */
-				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-
-#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
-				/* If less than one Dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */
-				if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
-				{
-					/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */
-					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-					Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 : DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
-					Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-				}
-#endif
-
-				/* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */
-				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
-				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE : DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
-				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0);
-			}
-
-			/* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the Dataflash */
-			for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++)
-			  Dataflash_SendByte(*(BufferPtr++));
-
-			/* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
-			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
-
-			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
-			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
-		}
-
-		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
-		TotalBlocks--;
-	}
-
-	/* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */
-	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-	Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00);
-	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-
-	/* Deselect all Dataflash chips */
-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-}
-
-/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), into
- *  the preallocated RAM buffer. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash
- *  and writes them in OS sized blocks to the given buffer. This can be linked to FAT libraries to read
- *  the files stored on the Dataflash.
- *
- *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the read sequence
- *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to read
- *  \param[out] BufferPtr    Pointer to the data destination RAM buffer
- */
-void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress,
-                                     uint16_t TotalBlocks,
-                                     uint8_t* BufferPtr)
-{
-	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
-	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
-
-	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
-	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-
-	/* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-
-	while (TotalBlocks)
-	{
-		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
-
-		/* Read an endpoint packet sized data block from the Dataflash */
-		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
-		{
-			/* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */
-			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
-			{
-				/* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
-				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
-				CurrDFPage++;
-
-				/* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */
-				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-
-				/* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */
-				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
-				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-			}
-
-			/* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the Dataflash */
-			for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++)
-			  *(BufferPtr++) = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
-
-			/* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
-			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
-
-			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
-			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
-		}
-
-		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
-		TotalBlocks--;
-	}
-
-	/* Deselect all Dataflash chips */
-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-}
-
-/** Disables the Dataflash memory write protection bits on the board Dataflash ICs, if enabled. */
-void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void)
-{
-	/* Select first Dataflash chip, send the read status register command */
-	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
-
-	/* Check if sector protection is enabled */
-	if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON)
-	{
-		Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
-
-		/* Send the commands to disable sector protection */
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]);
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]);
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]);
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]);
-	}
-
-	/* Select second Dataflash chip (if present on selected board), send read status register command */
-	#if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)
-	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
-
-	/* Check if sector protection is enabled */
-	if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON)
-	{
-		Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
-
-		/* Send the commands to disable sector protection */
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]);
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]);
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]);
-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]);
-	}
-	#endif
-
-	/* Deselect current Dataflash chip */
-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-}
-
-/** Performs a simple test on the attached Dataflash IC(s) to ensure that they are working.
- *
- *  \return Boolean \c true if all media chips are working, \c false otherwise
- */
-bool DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation(void)
-{
-	uint8_t ReturnByte;
-
-	/* Test first Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */
-	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO);
-	ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-
-	/* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */
-	if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL)
-	  return false;
-
-	#if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)
-	/* Test second Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */
-	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);
-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO);
-	ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-
-	/* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */
-	if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL)
-	  return false;
-	#endif
-
-	return true;
-}
-
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DataflashManager.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DataflashManager.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 367fbac8c..000000000
--- a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DataflashManager.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,87 +0,0 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
-
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-           www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for DataflashManager.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H_
-#define _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-
-		#include "../Descriptors.h"
-
-		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h>
-
-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
-		#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE % 16)
-			#error Dataflash page size must be a multiple of 16 bytes.
-		#endif
-
-	/* Defines: */
-		/** Total number of bytes of the storage medium, comprised of one or more Dataflash ICs. */
-		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES                ((uint32_t)DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS)
-
-		/** Block size of the device. This is kept at 512 to remain compatible with the OS despite the underlying
-		 *  storage media (Dataflash) using a different native block size. Do not change this value.
-		 */
-		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE           512
-
-		/** Total number of blocks of the virtual memory for reporting to the host as the device's total capacity. Do not
-		 *  change this value; change VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES instead to alter the media size.
-		 */
-		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS               (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES / VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
-
-		/** Indicates if the disk is write protected or not. */
-		#define DISK_READ_ONLY                      false
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
-		                                  const uint32_t BlockAddress,
-		                                  uint16_t TotalBlocks);
-		void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
-		                                 const uint32_t BlockAddress,
-		                                 uint16_t TotalBlocks);
-		void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress,
-		                                      uint16_t TotalBlocks,
-		                                      const uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-		void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress,
-		                                     uint16_t TotalBlocks,
-		                                     uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-		void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void);
-		bool DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation(void);
-
-#endif
-
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/00readme.txt b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/00readme.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 80d8843d1..000000000
--- a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/00readme.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,135 +0,0 @@
-FatFs Module Source Files R0.09a                       (C)ChaN, 2012
-
-
-FILES
-
-  ffconf.h   Configuration file for FatFs module.
-  ff.h       Common include file for FatFs and application module.
-  ff.c       FatFs module.
-  diskio.h   Common include file for FatFs and disk I/O module.
-  diskio.c   An example of glue function to attach existing disk I/O module to FatFs.
-  integer.h  Integer type definitions for FatFs.
-  option     Optional external functions.
-
-  Low level disk I/O module is not included in this archive because the FatFs
-  module is only a generic file system layer and not depend on any specific
-  storage device. You have to provide a low level disk I/O module that written
-  to control your storage device.
-
-
-
-AGREEMENTS
-
- FatFs module is an open source software to implement FAT file system to
- small embedded systems. This is a free software and is opened for education,
- research and commercial developments under license policy of following trems.
-
-  Copyright (C) 2012, ChaN, all right reserved.
-
- * The FatFs module is a free software and there is NO WARRANTY.
- * No restriction on use. You can use, modify and redistribute it for
-   personal, non-profit or commercial product UNDER YOUR RESPONSIBILITY.
- * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice.
-
-
-
-REVISION HISTORY
-
-  Feb 26, 2006  R0.00  Prototype
-
-  Apr 29, 2006  R0.01  First release.
-
-  Jun 01, 2006  R0.02  Added FAT12.
-                       Removed unbuffered mode.
-                       Fixed a problem on small (<32M) patition.
-
-  Jun 10, 2006  R0.02a Added a configuration option _FS_MINIMUM.
-
-  Sep 22, 2006  R0.03  Added f_rename.
-                       Changed option _FS_MINIMUM to _FS_MINIMIZE.
-
-  Dec 11, 2006  R0.03a Improved cluster scan algolithm to write files fast.
-                       Fixed f_mkdir creates incorrect directory on FAT32.
-
-  Feb 04, 2007  R0.04  Supported multiple drive system. (FatFs)
-                       Changed some APIs for multiple drive system.
-                       Added f_mkfs. (FatFs)
-                       Added _USE_FAT32 option. (Tiny-FatFs)
-
-  Apr 01, 2007  R0.04a Supported multiple partitions on a plysical drive. (FatFs)
-                       Fixed an endian sensitive code in f_mkfs. (FatFs)
-                       Added a capability of extending the file size to f_lseek.
-                       Added minimization level 3.
-                       Fixed a problem that can collapse a sector when recreate an
-                       existing file in any sub-directory at non FAT32 cfg. (Tiny-FatFs)
-
-  May 05, 2007  R0.04b Added _USE_NTFLAG option.
-                       Added FSInfo support.
-                       Fixed some problems corresponds to FAT32. (Tiny-FatFs)
-                       Fixed DBCS name can result FR_INVALID_NAME.
-                       Fixed short seek (0 < ofs <= csize) collapses the file object.
-
-  Aug 25, 2007  R0.05  Changed arguments of f_read, f_write.
-                       Changed arguments of f_mkfs. (FatFs)
-                       Fixed f_mkfs on FAT32 creates incorrect FSInfo. (FatFs)
-                       Fixed f_mkdir on FAT32 creates incorrect directory. (FatFs)
-
-  Feb 03, 2008  R0.05a Added f_truncate().
-                       Added f_utime().
-                       Fixed off by one error at FAT sub-type determination.
-                       Fixed btr in f_read() can be mistruncated.
-                       Fixed cached sector is not flushed when create and close without write.
-
-  Apr 01, 2008  R0.06  Added f_forward(). (Tiny-FatFs)
-                       Added string functions: fputc(), fputs(), fprintf() and fgets().
-                       Improved performance of f_lseek() on move to the same or following cluster.
-
-  Apr 01, 2009, R0.07  Merged Tiny-FatFs as a buffer configuration option.
-                       Added long file name support.
-                       Added multiple code page support.
-                       Added re-entrancy for multitask operation.
-                       Added auto cluster size selection to f_mkfs().
-                       Added rewind option to f_readdir().
-                       Changed result code of critical errors.
-                       Renamed string functions to avoid name collision.
-
-  Apr 14, 2009, R0.07a Separated out OS dependent code on reentrant cfg.
-                       Added multiple sector size support.
-
-  Jun 21, 2009, R0.07c Fixed f_unlink() may return FR_OK on error.
-                       Fixed wrong cache control in f_lseek().
-                       Added relative path feature.
-                       Added f_chdir().
-                       Added f_chdrive().
-                       Added proper case conversion for extended characters.
-
-  Nov 03, 2009 R0.07e  Separated out configuration options from ff.h to ffconf.h.
-                       Added a configuration option, _LFN_UNICODE.
-                       Fixed f_unlink() fails to remove a sub-dir on _FS_RPATH.
-                       Fixed name matching error on the 13 char boundary.
-                       Changed f_readdir() to return the SFN with always upper case on non-LFN cfg.
-
-  May 15, 2010, R0.08  Added a memory configuration option. (_USE_LFN)
-                       Added file lock feature. (_FS_SHARE)
-                       Added fast seek feature. (_USE_FASTSEEK)
-                       Changed some types on the API, XCHAR->TCHAR.
-                       Changed fname member in the FILINFO structure on Unicode cfg.
-                       String functions support UTF-8 encoding files on Unicode cfg.
-
-  Aug 16,'10 R0.08a    Added f_getcwd(). (_FS_RPATH = 2)
-                       Added sector erase feature. (_USE_ERASE)
-                       Moved file lock semaphore table from fs object to the bss.
-                       Fixed a wrong directory entry is created on non-LFN cfg when the given name contains ';'.
-                       Fixed f_mkfs() creates wrong FAT32 volume.
-
-  Jan 15,'11 R0.08b    Fast seek feature is also applied to f_read() and f_write().
-                       f_lseek() reports required table size on creating CLMP.
-                       Extended format syntax of f_printf function.
-                       Ignores duplicated directory separators in given path names.
-
-  Sep 06,'11 R0.09     f_mkfs() supports multiple partition to finish the multiple partition feature.
-                       Added f_fdisk(). (_MULTI_PARTITION = 2)
-
-  Aug 27,'12 R0.09a    Fixed assertion failure due to OS/2 EA on FAT12/16.
-                       Changed API rejects null object pointer to avoid crash.
-                       Changed option name _FS_SHARE to _FS_LOCK.
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/diskio.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/diskio.c
deleted file mode 100644
index b119b1a40..000000000
--- a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/diskio.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,65 +0,0 @@
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Low level disk I/O module skeleton for FatFs     (C)ChaN, 2007        */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* This is a stub disk I/O module that acts as front end of the existing */
-/* disk I/O modules and attach it to FatFs module with common interface. */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-#include "diskio.h"
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Initialize a Drive                                                    */
-
-DSTATUS disk_initialize (
-	BYTE drv				/* Physical drive number (0..) */
-)
-{
-	return FR_OK;
-}
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Return Disk Status                                                    */
-
-DSTATUS disk_status (
-	BYTE drv		/* Physical drive number (0..) */
-)
-{
-	return FR_OK;
-}
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Read Sector(s)                                                        */
-
-DRESULT disk_read (
-	BYTE drv,		/* Physical drive number (0..) */
-	BYTE *buff,		/* Data buffer to store read data */
-	DWORD sector,	/* Sector address (LBA) */
-	BYTE count		/* Number of sectors to read (1..128) */
-)
-{
-	DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(sector, count, buff);
-	return RES_OK;
-}
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Write Sector(s)                                                       */
-
-#if _READONLY == 0
-DRESULT disk_write (
-	BYTE drv,			/* Physical drive number (0..) */
-	const BYTE *buff,	/* Data to be written */
-	DWORD sector,		/* Sector address (LBA) */
-	BYTE count			/* Number of sectors to write (1..128) */
-)
-{
-	DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(sector, count, buff);
-	return RES_OK;
-}
-#endif /* _READONLY */
-
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/diskio.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/diskio.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 65e3048a0..000000000
--- a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/diskio.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,52 +0,0 @@
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------
-/  Low level disk interface module include file
-/-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-#ifndef _DISKIO_DEFINED
-#define _DISKIO_DEFINED
-
-#ifdef __cplusplus
-extern "C" {
-#endif
-
-#include "integer.h"
-#include "ff.h"
-
-#include "../DataflashManager.h"
-
-
-/* Status of Disk Functions */
-typedef BYTE	DSTATUS;
-
-/* Results of Disk Functions */
-typedef enum {
-	RES_OK = 0,		/* 0: Successful */
-	RES_ERROR,		/* 1: R/W Error */
-	RES_WRPRT,		/* 2: Write Protected */
-	RES_NOTRDY,		/* 3: Not Ready */
-	RES_PARERR		/* 4: Invalid Parameter */
-} DRESULT;
-
-
-/*---------------------------------------*/
-/* Prototypes for disk control functions */
-
-DSTATUS disk_initialize (BYTE);
-DSTATUS disk_status (BYTE);
-DRESULT disk_read (BYTE, BYTE*, DWORD, BYTE);
-DRESULT disk_write (BYTE, const BYTE*, DWORD, BYTE);
-DRESULT disk_ioctl (BYTE, BYTE, void*);
-
-
-/* Disk Status Bits (DSTATUS) */
-
-#define STA_NOINIT		0x01	/* Drive not initialized */
-#define STA_NODISK		0x02	/* No medium in the drive */
-#define STA_PROTECT		0x04	/* Write protected */
-
-
-#ifdef __cplusplus
-}
-#endif
-
-#endif
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/ff.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/ff.c
deleted file mode 100644
index 2f58adf83..000000000
--- a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/ff.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,4139 +0,0 @@
-/*----------------------------------------------------------------------------/
-/  FatFs - FAT file system module  R0.09a                 (C)ChaN, 2012
-/-----------------------------------------------------------------------------/
-/ FatFs module is a generic FAT file system module for small embedded systems.
-/ This is a free software that opened for education, research and commercial
-/ developments under license policy of following terms.
-/
-/  Copyright (C) 2012, ChaN, all right reserved.
-/
-/ * The FatFs module is a free software and there is NO WARRANTY.
-/ * No restriction on use. You can use, modify and redistribute it for
-/   personal, non-profit or commercial products UNDER YOUR RESPONSIBILITY.
-/ * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice.
-/
-/-----------------------------------------------------------------------------/
-/ Feb 26,'06 R0.00  Prototype.
-/
-/ Apr 29,'06 R0.01  First stable version.
-/
-/ Jun 01,'06 R0.02  Added FAT12 support.
-/                   Removed unbuffered mode.
-/                   Fixed a problem on small (<32M) partition.
-/ Jun 10,'06 R0.02a Added a configuration option (_FS_MINIMUM).
-/
-/ Sep 22,'06 R0.03  Added f_rename().
-/                   Changed option _FS_MINIMUM to _FS_MINIMIZE.
-/ Dec 11,'06 R0.03a Improved cluster scan algorithm to write files fast.
-/                   Fixed f_mkdir() creates incorrect directory on FAT32.
-/
-/ Feb 04,'07 R0.04  Supported multiple drive system.
-/                   Changed some interfaces for multiple drive system.
-/                   Changed f_mountdrv() to f_mount().
-/                   Added f_mkfs().
-/ Apr 01,'07 R0.04a Supported multiple partitions on a physical drive.
-/                   Added a capability of extending file size to f_lseek().
-/                   Added minimization level 3.
-/                   Fixed an endian sensitive code in f_mkfs().
-/ May 05,'07 R0.04b Added a configuration option _USE_NTFLAG.
-/                   Added FSInfo support.
-/                   Fixed DBCS name can result FR_INVALID_NAME.
-/                   Fixed short seek (<= csize) collapses the file object.
-/
-/ Aug 25,'07 R0.05  Changed arguments of f_read(), f_write() and f_mkfs().
-/                   Fixed f_mkfs() on FAT32 creates incorrect FSInfo.
-/                   Fixed f_mkdir() on FAT32 creates incorrect directory.
-/ Feb 03,'08 R0.05a Added f_truncate() and f_utime().
-/                   Fixed off by one error at FAT sub-type determination.
-/                   Fixed btr in f_read() can be mistruncated.
-/                   Fixed cached sector is not flushed when create and close without write.
-/
-/ Apr 01,'08 R0.06  Added fputc(), fputs(), fprintf() and fgets().
-/                   Improved performance of f_lseek() on moving to the same or following cluster.
-/
-/ Apr 01,'09 R0.07  Merged Tiny-FatFs as a configuration option. (_FS_TINY)
-/                   Added long file name feature.
-/                   Added multiple code page feature.
-/                   Added re-entrancy for multitask operation.
-/                   Added auto cluster size selection to f_mkfs().
-/                   Added rewind option to f_readdir().
-/                   Changed result code of critical errors.
-/                   Renamed string functions to avoid name collision.
-/ Apr 14,'09 R0.07a Separated out OS dependent code on reentrant cfg.
-/                   Added multiple sector size feature.
-/ Jun 21,'09 R0.07c Fixed f_unlink() can return FR_OK on error.
-/                   Fixed wrong cache control in f_lseek().
-/                   Added relative path feature.
-/                   Added f_chdir() and f_chdrive().
-/                   Added proper case conversion to extended char.
-/ Nov 03,'09 R0.07e Separated out configuration options from ff.h to ffconf.h.
-/                   Fixed f_unlink() fails to remove a sub-dir on _FS_RPATH.
-/                   Fixed name matching error on the 13 char boundary.
-/                   Added a configuration option, _LFN_UNICODE.
-/                   Changed f_readdir() to return the SFN with always upper case on non-LFN cfg.
-/
-/ May 15,'10 R0.08  Added a memory configuration option. (_USE_LFN = 3)
-/                   Added file lock feature. (_FS_SHARE)
-/                   Added fast seek feature. (_USE_FASTSEEK)
-/                   Changed some types on the API, XCHAR->TCHAR.
-/                   Changed fname member in the FILINFO structure on Unicode cfg.
-/                   String functions support UTF-8 encoding files on Unicode cfg.
-/ Aug 16,'10 R0.08a Added f_getcwd(). (_FS_RPATH = 2)
-/                   Added sector erase feature. (_USE_ERASE)
-/                   Moved file lock semaphore table from fs object to the bss.
-/                   Fixed a wrong directory entry is created on non-LFN cfg when the given name contains ';'.
-/                   Fixed f_mkfs() creates wrong FAT32 volume.
-/ Jan 15,'11 R0.08b Fast seek feature is also applied to f_read() and f_write().
-/                   f_lseek() reports required table size on creating CLMP.
-/                   Extended format syntax of f_printf function.
-/                   Ignores duplicated directory separators in given path name.
-/
-/ Sep 06,'11 R0.09  f_mkfs() supports multiple partition to finish the multiple partition feature.
-/                   Added f_fdisk(). (_MULTI_PARTITION = 2)
-/ Aug 27,'12 R0.09a Fixed assertion failure due to OS/2 EA on FAT12/16 volume.
-/                   Changed f_open() and f_opendir reject null object pointer to avoid crash.
-/                   Changed option name _FS_SHARE to _FS_LOCK.
-/---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-#include "ff.h"			/* FatFs configurations and declarations */
-#include "diskio.h"		/* Declarations of low level disk I/O functions */
-
-
-/*--------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-   Module Private Definitions
-
----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-#if _FATFS != 4004	/* Revision ID */
-#error Wrong include file (ff.h).
-#endif
-
-
-/* Definitions on sector size */
-#if _MAX_SS != 512 && _MAX_SS != 1024 && _MAX_SS != 2048 && _MAX_SS != 4096
-#error Wrong sector size.
-#endif
-#if _MAX_SS != 512
-#define	SS(fs)	((fs)->ssize)	/* Variable sector size */
-#else
-#define	SS(fs)	512U			/* Fixed sector size */
-#endif
-
-
-/* Reentrancy related */
-#if _FS_REENTRANT
-#if _USE_LFN == 1
-#error Static LFN work area must not be used in re-entrant configuration.
-#endif
-#define	ENTER_FF(fs)		{ if (!lock_fs(fs)) return FR_TIMEOUT; }
-#define	LEAVE_FF(fs, res)	{ unlock_fs(fs, res); return res; }
-#else
-#define	ENTER_FF(fs)
-#define LEAVE_FF(fs, res)	return res
-#endif
-
-#define	ABORT(fs, res)		{ fp->flag |= FA__ERROR; LEAVE_FF(fs, res); }
-
-
-/* File access control feature */
-#if _FS_LOCK
-#if _FS_READONLY
-#error _FS_LOCK must be 0 on read-only cfg.
-#endif
-typedef struct {
-	FATFS *fs;				/* File ID 1, volume (NULL:blank entry) */
-	DWORD clu;				/* File ID 2, directory */
-	WORD idx;				/* File ID 3, directory index */
-	WORD ctr;				/* File open counter, 0:none, 0x01..0xFF:read open count, 0x100:write mode */
-} FILESEM;
-#endif
-
-
-
-/* DBCS code ranges and SBCS extend char conversion table */
-
-#if _CODE_PAGE == 932	/* Japanese Shift-JIS */
-#define _DF1S	0x81	/* DBC 1st byte range 1 start */
-#define _DF1E	0x9F	/* DBC 1st byte range 1 end */
-#define _DF2S	0xE0	/* DBC 1st byte range 2 start */
-#define _DF2E	0xFC	/* DBC 1st byte range 2 end */
-#define _DS1S	0x40	/* DBC 2nd byte range 1 start */
-#define _DS1E	0x7E	/* DBC 2nd byte range 1 end */
-#define _DS2S	0x80	/* DBC 2nd byte range 2 start */
-#define _DS2E	0xFC	/* DBC 2nd byte range 2 end */
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 936	/* Simplified Chinese GBK */
-#define _DF1S	0x81
-#define _DF1E	0xFE
-#define _DS1S	0x40
-#define _DS1E	0x7E
-#define _DS2S	0x80
-#define _DS2E	0xFE
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 949	/* Korean */
-#define _DF1S	0x81
-#define _DF1E	0xFE
-#define _DS1S	0x41
-#define _DS1E	0x5A
-#define _DS2S	0x61
-#define _DS2E	0x7A
-#define _DS3S	0x81
-#define _DS3E	0xFE
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 950	/* Traditional Chinese Big5 */
-#define _DF1S	0x81
-#define _DF1E	0xFE
-#define _DS1S	0x40
-#define _DS1E	0x7E
-#define _DS2S	0xA1
-#define _DS2E	0xFE
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 437	/* U.S. (OEM) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x90,0x41,0x8E,0x41,0x8F,0x80,0x45,0x45,0x45,0x49,0x49,0x49,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0x4F,0x99,0x4F,0x55,0x55,0x59,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
-				0x41,0x49,0x4F,0x55,0xA5,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0x21,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 720	/* Arabic (OEM) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x45,0x41,0x84,0x41,0x86,0x43,0x45,0x45,0x45,0x49,0x49,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x49,0x49,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
-				0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 737	/* Greek (OEM) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87, \
-				0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0xAA,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0x97,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xE4,0xED,0xEE,0xE7,0xE8,0xF1,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 775	/* Baltic (OEM) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x91,0xA0,0x8E,0x95,0x8F,0x80,0xAD,0xED,0x8A,0x8A,0xA1,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0xE2,0x99,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x97,0x99,0x9A,0x9D,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
-				0xA0,0xA1,0xE0,0xA3,0xA3,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xBD,0xBE,0xC6,0xC7,0xA5,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE5,0xE5,0xE6,0xE3,0xE8,0xE8,0xEA,0xEA,0xEE,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 850	/* Multilingual Latin 1 (OEM) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x90,0xB6,0x8E,0xB7,0x8F,0x80,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD8,0xD7,0xDE,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0xE2,0x99,0xE3,0xEA,0xEB,0x59,0x99,0x9A,0x9D,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
-				0xB5,0xD6,0xE0,0xE9,0xA5,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0x21,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC7,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE5,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE7,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xED,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 852	/* Latin 2 (OEM) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x90,0xB6,0x8E,0xDE,0x8F,0x80,0x9D,0xD3,0x8A,0x8A,0xD7,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x91,0xE2,0x99,0x95,0x95,0x97,0x97,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9B,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
-				0xB5,0xD6,0xE0,0xE9,0xA4,0xA4,0xA6,0xA6,0xA8,0xA8,0xAA,0x8D,0xAC,0xB8,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBD,0xBF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC6,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD1,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD2,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xB7,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE3,0xD5,0xE6,0xE6,0xE8,0xE9,0xE8,0xEB,0xED,0xED,0xDD,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xEB,0xFC,0xFC,0xFE,0xFF}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 855	/* Cyrillic (OEM) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x81,0x81,0x83,0x83,0x85,0x85,0x87,0x87,0x89,0x89,0x8B,0x8B,0x8D,0x8D,0x8F,0x8F,0x91,0x91,0x93,0x93,0x95,0x95,0x97,0x97,0x99,0x99,0x9B,0x9B,0x9D,0x9D,0x9F,0x9F, \
-				0xA1,0xA1,0xA3,0xA3,0xA5,0xA5,0xA7,0xA7,0xA9,0xA9,0xAB,0xAB,0xAD,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB6,0xB6,0xB8,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBE,0xBE,0xBF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC7,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD1,0xD1,0xD3,0xD3,0xD5,0xD5,0xD7,0xD7,0xDD,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xE0,0xDF, \
-				0xE0,0xE2,0xE2,0xE4,0xE4,0xE6,0xE6,0xE8,0xE8,0xEA,0xEA,0xEC,0xEC,0xEE,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF2,0xF2,0xF4,0xF4,0xF6,0xF6,0xF8,0xF8,0xFA,0xFA,0xFC,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 857	/* Turkish (OEM) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x90,0xB6,0x8E,0xB7,0x8F,0x80,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD8,0xD7,0x98,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0xE2,0x99,0xE3,0xEA,0xEB,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9D,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9E, \
-				0xB5,0xD6,0xE0,0xE9,0xA5,0xA5,0xA6,0xA6,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0x21,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC7,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE5,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xDE,0x59,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 858	/* Multilingual Latin 1 + Euro (OEM) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x90,0xB6,0x8E,0xB7,0x8F,0x80,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD8,0xD7,0xDE,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0xE2,0x99,0xE3,0xEA,0xEB,0x59,0x99,0x9A,0x9D,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
-				0xB5,0xD6,0xE0,0xE9,0xA5,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0x21,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC7,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD1,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE5,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE7,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xED,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 862	/* Hebrew (OEM) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
-				0x41,0x49,0x4F,0x55,0xA5,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0x21,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 866	/* Russian (OEM) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
-				0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x9d,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F,0xF0,0xF0,0xF2,0xF2,0xF4,0xF4,0xF6,0xF6,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 874	/* Thai (OEM, Windows) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
-				0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1250 /* Central Europe (Windows) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x8A,0x9B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F, \
-				0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xA3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xA5,0xAA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBC,0xAF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xF7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xFF}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1251 /* Cyrillic (Windows) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x82,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x80,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x8A,0x9B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F, \
-				0xA0,0xA2,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB2,0xA5,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xA8,0xB9,0xAA,0xBB,0xA3,0xBD,0xBD,0xAF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1252 /* Latin 1 (Windows) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0xAd,0x9B,0x8C,0x9D,0xAE,0x9F, \
-				0xA0,0x21,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xF7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0x9F}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1253 /* Greek (Windows) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
-				0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xA2,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA, \
-				0xE0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xF2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xFB,0xBC,0xFD,0xBF,0xFF}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1254 /* Turkish (Windows) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x8A,0x9B,0x8C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
-				0xA0,0x21,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xF7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0x9F}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1255 /* Hebrew (Windows) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
-				0xA0,0x21,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1256 /* Arabic (Windows) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x8C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
-				0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0x41,0xE1,0x41,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0x43,0x45,0x45,0x45,0x45,0xEC,0xED,0x49,0x49,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0x4F,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0x55,0xFA,0x55,0x55,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1257 /* Baltic (Windows) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
-				0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xA8,0xB9,0xAA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xAF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xF7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xFF}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1258 /* Vietnam (OEM, Windows) */
-#define _DF1S	0
-#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0xAC,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
-				0xA0,0x21,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
-				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xEC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xF2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xF7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xFE,0x9F}
-
-#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1	/* ASCII (for only non-LFN cfg) */
-#if _USE_LFN
-#error Cannot use LFN feature without valid code page.
-#endif
-#define _DF1S	0
-
-#else
-#error Unknown code page
-
-#endif
-
-
-/* Character code support macros */
-#define IsUpper(c)	(((c)>='A')&&((c)<='Z'))
-#define IsLower(c)	(((c)>='a')&&((c)<='z'))
-#define IsDigit(c)	(((c)>='0')&&((c)<='9'))
-
-#if _DF1S		/* Code page is DBCS */
-
-#ifdef _DF2S	/* Two 1st byte areas */
-#define IsDBCS1(c)	(((BYTE)(c) >= _DF1S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DF1E) || ((BYTE)(c) >= _DF2S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DF2E))
-#else			/* One 1st byte area */
-#define IsDBCS1(c)	((BYTE)(c) >= _DF1S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DF1E)
-#endif
-
-#ifdef _DS3S	/* Three 2nd byte areas */
-#define IsDBCS2(c)	(((BYTE)(c) >= _DS1S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DS1E) || ((BYTE)(c) >= _DS2S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DS2E) || ((BYTE)(c) >= _DS3S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DS3E))
-#else			/* Two 2nd byte areas */
-#define IsDBCS2(c)	(((BYTE)(c) >= _DS1S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DS1E) || ((BYTE)(c) >= _DS2S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DS2E))
-#endif
-
-#else			/* Code page is SBCS */
-
-#define IsDBCS1(c)	0
-#define IsDBCS2(c)	0
-
-#endif /* _DF1S */
-
-
-/* Name status flags */
-#define NS			11		/* Index of name status byte in fn[] */
-#define NS_LOSS		0x01	/* Out of 8.3 format */
-#define NS_LFN		0x02	/* Force to create LFN entry */
-#define NS_LAST		0x04	/* Last segment */
-#define NS_BODY		0x08	/* Lower case flag (body) */
-#define NS_EXT		0x10	/* Lower case flag (ext) */
-#define NS_DOT		0x20	/* Dot entry */
-
-
-/* FAT sub-type boundaries */
-/* Note that the FAT spec by Microsoft says 4085 but Windows works with 4087! */
-#define MIN_FAT16	4086	/* Minimum number of clusters for FAT16 */
-#define	MIN_FAT32	65526	/* Minimum number of clusters for FAT32 */
-
-
-/* FatFs refers the members in the FAT structures as byte array instead of
-/ structure member because the structure is not binary compatible between
-/ different platforms */
-
-#define BS_jmpBoot			0	/* Jump instruction (3) */
-#define BS_OEMName			3	/* OEM name (8) */
-#define BPB_BytsPerSec		11	/* Sector size [byte] (2) */
-#define BPB_SecPerClus		13	/* Cluster size [sector] (1) */
-#define BPB_RsvdSecCnt		14	/* Size of reserved area [sector] (2) */
-#define BPB_NumFATs			16	/* Number of FAT copies (1) */
-#define BPB_RootEntCnt		17	/* Number of root dir entries for FAT12/16 (2) */
-#define BPB_TotSec16		19	/* Volume size [sector] (2) */
-#define BPB_Media			21	/* Media descriptor (1) */
-#define BPB_FATSz16			22	/* FAT size [sector] (2) */
-#define BPB_SecPerTrk		24	/* Track size [sector] (2) */
-#define BPB_NumHeads		26	/* Number of heads (2) */
-#define BPB_HiddSec			28	/* Number of special hidden sectors (4) */
-#define BPB_TotSec32		32	/* Volume size [sector] (4) */
-#define BS_DrvNum			36	/* Physical drive number (2) */
-#define BS_BootSig			38	/* Extended boot signature (1) */
-#define BS_VolID			39	/* Volume serial number (4) */
-#define BS_VolLab			43	/* Volume label (8) */
-#define BS_FilSysType		54	/* File system type (1) */
-#define BPB_FATSz32			36	/* FAT size [sector] (4) */
-#define BPB_ExtFlags		40	/* Extended flags (2) */
-#define BPB_FSVer			42	/* File system version (2) */
-#define BPB_RootClus		44	/* Root dir first cluster (4) */
-#define BPB_FSInfo			48	/* Offset of FSInfo sector (2) */
-#define BPB_BkBootSec		50	/* Offset of backup boot sector (2) */
-#define BS_DrvNum32			64	/* Physical drive number (2) */
-#define BS_BootSig32		66	/* Extended boot signature (1) */
-#define BS_VolID32			67	/* Volume serial number (4) */
-#define BS_VolLab32			71	/* Volume label (8) */
-#define BS_FilSysType32		82	/* File system type (1) */
-#define	FSI_LeadSig			0	/* FSI: Leading signature (4) */
-#define	FSI_StrucSig		484	/* FSI: Structure signature (4) */
-#define	FSI_Free_Count		488	/* FSI: Number of free clusters (4) */
-#define	FSI_Nxt_Free		492	/* FSI: Last allocated cluster (4) */
-#define MBR_Table			446	/* MBR: Partition table offset (2) */
-#define	SZ_PTE				16	/* MBR: Size of a partition table entry */
-#define BS_55AA				510	/* Boot sector signature (2) */
-
-#define	DIR_Name			0	/* Short file name (11) */
-#define	DIR_Attr			11	/* Attribute (1) */
-#define	DIR_NTres			12	/* NT flag (1) */
-#define DIR_CrtTimeTenth	13	/* Created time sub-second (1) */
-#define	DIR_CrtTime			14	/* Created time (2) */
-#define	DIR_CrtDate			16	/* Created date (2) */
-#define DIR_LstAccDate		18	/* Last accessed date (2) */
-#define	DIR_FstClusHI		20	/* Higher 16-bit of first cluster (2) */
-#define	DIR_WrtTime			22	/* Modified time (2) */
-#define	DIR_WrtDate			24	/* Modified date (2) */
-#define	DIR_FstClusLO		26	/* Lower 16-bit of first cluster (2) */
-#define	DIR_FileSize		28	/* File size (4) */
-#define	LDIR_Ord			0	/* LFN entry order and LLE flag (1) */
-#define	LDIR_Attr			11	/* LFN attribute (1) */
-#define	LDIR_Type			12	/* LFN type (1) */
-#define	LDIR_Chksum			13	/* Sum of corresponding SFN entry */
-#define	LDIR_FstClusLO		26	/* Filled by zero (0) */
-#define	SZ_DIR				32		/* Size of a directory entry */
-#define	LLE					0x40	/* Last long entry flag in LDIR_Ord */
-#define	DDE					0xE5	/* Deleted directory entry mark in DIR_Name[0] */
-#define	NDDE				0x05	/* Replacement of the character collides with DDE */
-
-
-/*------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Module private work area                                   */
-/*------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Note that uninitialized variables with static duration are
-/  zeroed/nulled at start-up. If not, the compiler or start-up
-/  routine is out of ANSI-C standard.
-*/
-
-#if _VOLUMES
-static
-FATFS *FatFs[_VOLUMES];	/* Pointer to the file system objects (logical drives) */
-#else
-#error Number of volumes must not be 0.
-#endif
-
-static
-WORD Fsid;				/* File system mount ID */
-
-#if _FS_RPATH
-static
-BYTE CurrVol;			/* Current drive */
-#endif
-
-#if _FS_LOCK
-static
-FILESEM	Files[_FS_LOCK];	/* File lock semaphores */
-#endif
-
-#if _USE_LFN == 0			/* No LFN feature */
-#define	DEF_NAMEBUF			BYTE sfn[12]
-#define INIT_BUF(dobj)		(dobj).fn = sfn
-#define	FREE_BUF()
-
-#elif _USE_LFN == 1			/* LFN feature with static working buffer */
-static WCHAR LfnBuf[_MAX_LFN+1];
-#define	DEF_NAMEBUF			BYTE sfn[12]
-#define INIT_BUF(dobj)		{ (dobj).fn = sfn; (dobj).lfn = LfnBuf; }
-#define	FREE_BUF()
-
-#elif _USE_LFN == 2 		/* LFN feature with dynamic working buffer on the stack */
-#define	DEF_NAMEBUF			BYTE sfn[12]; WCHAR lbuf[_MAX_LFN+1]
-#define INIT_BUF(dobj)		{ (dobj).fn = sfn; (dobj).lfn = lbuf; }
-#define	FREE_BUF()
-
-#elif _USE_LFN == 3 		/* LFN feature with dynamic working buffer on the heap */
-#define	DEF_NAMEBUF			BYTE sfn[12]; WCHAR *lfn
-#define INIT_BUF(dobj)		{ lfn = ff_memalloc((_MAX_LFN + 1) * 2); \
-							  if (!lfn) LEAVE_FF((dobj).fs, FR_NOT_ENOUGH_CORE); \
-							  (dobj).lfn = lfn;	(dobj).fn = sfn; }
-#define	FREE_BUF()			ff_memfree(lfn)
-
-#else
-#error Wrong LFN configuration.
-#endif
-
-
-
-
-/*--------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-   Module Private Functions
-
----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* String functions                                                      */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-/* Copy memory to memory */
-static
-void mem_cpy (void* dst, const void* src, UINT cnt) {
-	BYTE *d = (BYTE*)dst;
-	const BYTE *s = (const BYTE*)src;
-
-#if _WORD_ACCESS == 1
-	while (cnt >= sizeof (int)) {
-		*(int*)d = *(int*)s;
-		d += sizeof (int); s += sizeof (int);
-		cnt -= sizeof (int);
-	}
-#endif
-	while (cnt--)
-		*d++ = *s++;
-}
-
-/* Fill memory */
-static
-void mem_set (void* dst, int val, UINT cnt) {
-	BYTE *d = (BYTE*)dst;
-
-	while (cnt--)
-		*d++ = (BYTE)val;
-}
-
-/* Compare memory to memory */
-static
-int mem_cmp (const void* dst, const void* src, UINT cnt) {
-	const BYTE *d = (const BYTE *)dst, *s = (const BYTE *)src;
-	int r = 0;
-
-	while (cnt-- && (r = *d++ - *s++) == 0) ;
-	return r;
-}
-
-/* Check if chr is contained in the string */
-static
-int chk_chr (const char* str, int chr) {
-	while (*str && *str != chr) str++;
-	return *str;
-}
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Request/Release grant to access the volume                            */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#if _FS_REENTRANT
-
-static
-int lock_fs (
-	FATFS *fs		/* File system object */
-)
-{
-	return ff_req_grant(fs->sobj);
-}
-
-
-static
-void unlock_fs (
-	FATFS *fs,		/* File system object */
-	FRESULT res		/* Result code to be returned */
-)
-{
-	if (fs &&
-		res != FR_NOT_ENABLED &&
-		res != FR_INVALID_DRIVE &&
-		res != FR_INVALID_OBJECT &&
-		res != FR_TIMEOUT) {
-		ff_rel_grant(fs->sobj);
-	}
-}
-#endif
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* File lock control functions                                           */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#if _FS_LOCK
-
-static
-FRESULT chk_lock (	/* Check if the file can be accessed */
-	DIR* dj,		/* Directory object pointing the file to be checked */
-	int acc			/* Desired access (0:Read, 1:Write, 2:Delete/Rename) */
-)
-{
-	UINT i, be;
-
-	/* Search file semaphore table */
-	for (i = be = 0; i < _FS_LOCK; i++) {
-		if (Files[i].fs) {	/* Existing entry */
-			if (Files[i].fs == dj->fs &&	 	/* Check if the file matched with an open file */
-				Files[i].clu == dj->sclust &&
-				Files[i].idx == dj->index) break;
-		} else {			/* Blank entry */
-			be++;
-		}
-	}
-	if (i == _FS_LOCK)	/* The file is not opened */
-		return (be || acc == 2) ? FR_OK : FR_TOO_MANY_OPEN_FILES;	/* Is there a blank entry for new file? */
-
-	/* The file has been opened. Reject any open against writing file and all write mode open */
-	return (acc || Files[i].ctr == 0x100) ? FR_LOCKED : FR_OK;
-}
-
-
-static
-int enq_lock (void)	/* Check if an entry is available for a new file */
-{
-	UINT i;
-
-	for (i = 0; i < _FS_LOCK && Files[i].fs; i++) ;
-	return (i == _FS_LOCK) ? 0 : 1;
-}
-
-
-static
-UINT inc_lock (	/* Increment file open counter and returns its index (0:int error) */
-	DIR* dj,	/* Directory object pointing the file to register or increment */
-	int acc		/* Desired access mode (0:Read, !0:Write) */
-)
-{
-	UINT i;
-
-
-	for (i = 0; i < _FS_LOCK; i++) {	/* Find the file */
-		if (Files[i].fs == dj->fs &&
-			Files[i].clu == dj->sclust &&
-			Files[i].idx == dj->index) break;
-	}
-
-	if (i == _FS_LOCK) {				/* Not opened. Register it as new. */
-		for (i = 0; i < _FS_LOCK && Files[i].fs; i++) ;
-		if (i == _FS_LOCK) return 0;	/* No space to register (int err) */
-		Files[i].fs = dj->fs;
-		Files[i].clu = dj->sclust;
-		Files[i].idx = dj->index;
-		Files[i].ctr = 0;
-	}
-
-	if (acc && Files[i].ctr) return 0;	/* Access violation (int err) */
-
-	Files[i].ctr = acc ? 0x100 : Files[i].ctr + 1;	/* Set semaphore value */
-
-	return i + 1;
-}
-
-
-static
-FRESULT dec_lock (	/* Decrement file open counter */
-	UINT i			/* Semaphore index */
-)
-{
-	WORD n;
-	FRESULT res;
-
-
-	if (--i < _FS_LOCK) {
-		n = Files[i].ctr;
-		if (n == 0x100) n = 0;
-		if (n) n--;
-		Files[i].ctr = n;
-		if (!n) Files[i].fs = 0;
-		res = FR_OK;
-	} else {
-		res = FR_INT_ERR;
-	}
-	return res;
-}
-
-
-static
-void clear_lock (	/* Clear lock entries of the volume */
-	FATFS *fs
-)
-{
-	UINT i;
-
-	for (i = 0; i < _FS_LOCK; i++) {
-		if (Files[i].fs == fs) Files[i].fs = 0;
-	}
-}
-#endif
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Change window offset                                                  */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-static
-FRESULT move_window (
-	FATFS *fs,		/* File system object */
-	DWORD sector	/* Sector number to make appearance in the fs->win[] */
-)					/* Move to zero only writes back dirty window */
-{
-	DWORD wsect;
-
-
-	wsect = fs->winsect;
-	if (wsect != sector) {	/* Changed current window */
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-		if (fs->wflag) {	/* Write back dirty window if needed */
-			if (disk_write(fs->drv, fs->win, wsect, 1) != RES_OK)
-				return FR_DISK_ERR;
-			fs->wflag = 0;
-			if (wsect < (fs->fatbase + fs->fsize)) {	/* In FAT area */
-				BYTE nf;
-				for (nf = fs->n_fats; nf > 1; nf--) {	/* Reflect the change to all FAT copies */
-					wsect += fs->fsize;
-					disk_write(fs->drv, fs->win, wsect, 1);
-				}
-			}
-		}
-#endif
-		if (sector) {
-			if (disk_read(fs->drv, fs->win, sector, 1) != RES_OK)
-				return FR_DISK_ERR;
-			fs->winsect = sector;
-		}
-	}
-
-	return FR_OK;
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Clean-up cached data                                                  */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-static
-FRESULT sync (	/* FR_OK: successful, FR_DISK_ERR: failed */
-	FATFS *fs	/* File system object */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-
-
-	res = move_window(fs, 0);
-	if (res == FR_OK) {
-		/* Update FSInfo sector if needed */
-		if (fs->fs_type == FS_FAT32 && fs->fsi_flag) {
-			fs->winsect = 0;
-			/* Create FSInfo structure */
-			mem_set(fs->win, 0, 512);
-			ST_WORD(fs->win+BS_55AA, 0xAA55);
-			ST_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_LeadSig, 0x41615252);
-			ST_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_StrucSig, 0x61417272);
-			ST_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_Free_Count, fs->free_clust);
-			ST_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_Nxt_Free, fs->last_clust);
-			/* Write it into the FSInfo sector */
-			disk_write(fs->drv, fs->win, fs->fsi_sector, 1);
-			fs->fsi_flag = 0;
-		}
-		/* Make sure that no pending write process in the physical drive */
-		if (disk_ioctl(fs->drv, CTRL_SYNC, 0) != RES_OK)
-			res = FR_DISK_ERR;
-	}
-
-	return res;
-}
-#endif
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Get sector# from cluster#                                             */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-
-DWORD clust2sect (	/* !=0: Sector number, 0: Failed - invalid cluster# */
-	FATFS *fs,		/* File system object */
-	DWORD clst		/* Cluster# to be converted */
-)
-{
-	clst -= 2;
-	if (clst >= (fs->n_fatent - 2)) return 0;		/* Invalid cluster# */
-	return clst * fs->csize + fs->database;
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* FAT access - Read value of a FAT entry                                */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-
-DWORD get_fat (	/* 0xFFFFFFFF:Disk error, 1:Internal error, Else:Cluster status */
-	FATFS *fs,	/* File system object */
-	DWORD clst	/* Cluster# to get the link information */
-)
-{
-	UINT wc, bc;
-	BYTE *p;
-
-
-	if (clst < 2 || clst >= fs->n_fatent)	/* Check range */
-		return 1;
-
-	switch (fs->fs_type) {
-	case FS_FAT12 :
-		bc = (UINT)clst; bc += bc / 2;
-		if (move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (bc / SS(fs)))) break;
-		wc = fs->win[bc % SS(fs)]; bc++;
-		if (move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (bc / SS(fs)))) break;
-		wc |= fs->win[bc % SS(fs)] << 8;
-		return (clst & 1) ? (wc >> 4) : (wc & 0xFFF);
-
-	case FS_FAT16 :
-		if (move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (clst / (SS(fs) / 2)))) break;
-		p = &fs->win[clst * 2 % SS(fs)];
-		return LD_WORD(p);
-
-	case FS_FAT32 :
-		if (move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (clst / (SS(fs) / 4)))) break;
-		p = &fs->win[clst * 4 % SS(fs)];
-		return LD_DWORD(p) & 0x0FFFFFFF;
-	}
-
-	return 0xFFFFFFFF;	/* An error occurred at the disk I/O layer */
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* FAT access - Change value of a FAT entry                              */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-
-FRESULT put_fat (
-	FATFS *fs,	/* File system object */
-	DWORD clst,	/* Cluster# to be changed in range of 2 to fs->n_fatent - 1 */
-	DWORD val	/* New value to mark the cluster */
-)
-{
-	UINT bc;
-	BYTE *p;
-	FRESULT res;
-
-
-	if (clst < 2 || clst >= fs->n_fatent) {	/* Check range */
-		res = FR_INT_ERR;
-
-	} else {
-		switch (fs->fs_type) {
-		case FS_FAT12 :
-			bc = (UINT)clst; bc += bc / 2;
-			res = move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (bc / SS(fs)));
-			if (res != FR_OK) break;
-			p = &fs->win[bc % SS(fs)];
-			*p = (clst & 1) ? ((*p & 0x0F) | ((BYTE)val << 4)) : (BYTE)val;
-			bc++;
-			fs->wflag = 1;
-			res = move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (bc / SS(fs)));
-			if (res != FR_OK) break;
-			p = &fs->win[bc % SS(fs)];
-			*p = (clst & 1) ? (BYTE)(val >> 4) : ((*p & 0xF0) | ((BYTE)(val >> 8) & 0x0F));
-			break;
-
-		case FS_FAT16 :
-			res = move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (clst / (SS(fs) / 2)));
-			if (res != FR_OK) break;
-			p = &fs->win[clst * 2 % SS(fs)];
-			ST_WORD(p, (WORD)val);
-			break;
-
-		case FS_FAT32 :
-			res = move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (clst / (SS(fs) / 4)));
-			if (res != FR_OK) break;
-			p = &fs->win[clst * 4 % SS(fs)];
-			val |= LD_DWORD(p) & 0xF0000000;
-			ST_DWORD(p, val);
-			break;
-
-		default :
-			res = FR_INT_ERR;
-		}
-		fs->wflag = 1;
-	}
-
-	return res;
-}
-#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* FAT handling - Remove a cluster chain                                 */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-static
-FRESULT remove_chain (
-	FATFS *fs,			/* File system object */
-	DWORD clst			/* Cluster# to remove a chain from */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	DWORD nxt;
-#if _USE_ERASE
-	DWORD scl = clst, ecl = clst, rt[2];
-#endif
-
-	if (clst < 2 || clst >= fs->n_fatent) {	/* Check range */
-		res = FR_INT_ERR;
-
-	} else {
-		res = FR_OK;
-		while (clst < fs->n_fatent) {			/* Not a last link? */
-			nxt = get_fat(fs, clst);			/* Get cluster status */
-			if (nxt == 0) break;				/* Empty cluster? */
-			if (nxt == 1) { res = FR_INT_ERR; break; }	/* Internal error? */
-			if (nxt == 0xFFFFFFFF) { res = FR_DISK_ERR; break; }	/* Disk error? */
-			res = put_fat(fs, clst, 0);			/* Mark the cluster "empty" */
-			if (res != FR_OK) break;
-			if (fs->free_clust != 0xFFFFFFFF) {	/* Update FSInfo */
-				fs->free_clust++;
-				fs->fsi_flag = 1;
-			}
-#if _USE_ERASE
-			if (ecl + 1 == nxt) {	/* Is next cluster contiguous? */
-				ecl = nxt;
-			} else {				/* End of contiguous clusters */ 
-				rt[0] = clust2sect(fs, scl);					/* Start sector */
-				rt[1] = clust2sect(fs, ecl) + fs->csize - 1;	/* End sector */
-				disk_ioctl(fs->drv, CTRL_ERASE_SECTOR, rt);		/* Erase the block */
-				scl = ecl = nxt;
-			}
-#endif
-			clst = nxt;	/* Next cluster */
-		}
-	}
-
-	return res;
-}
-#endif
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* FAT handling - Stretch or Create a cluster chain                      */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-static
-DWORD create_chain (	/* 0:No free cluster, 1:Internal error, 0xFFFFFFFF:Disk error, >=2:New cluster# */
-	FATFS *fs,			/* File system object */
-	DWORD clst			/* Cluster# to stretch. 0 means create a new chain. */
-)
-{
-	DWORD cs, ncl, scl;
-	FRESULT res;
-
-
-	if (clst == 0) {		/* Create a new chain */
-		scl = fs->last_clust;			/* Get suggested start point */
-		if (!scl || scl >= fs->n_fatent) scl = 1;
-	}
-	else {					/* Stretch the current chain */
-		cs = get_fat(fs, clst);			/* Check the cluster status */
-		if (cs < 2) return 1;			/* It is an invalid cluster */
-		if (cs < fs->n_fatent) return cs;	/* It is already followed by next cluster */
-		scl = clst;
-	}
-
-	ncl = scl;				/* Start cluster */
-	for (;;) {
-		ncl++;							/* Next cluster */
-		if (ncl >= fs->n_fatent) {		/* Wrap around */
-			ncl = 2;
-			if (ncl > scl) return 0;	/* No free cluster */
-		}
-		cs = get_fat(fs, ncl);			/* Get the cluster status */
-		if (cs == 0) break;				/* Found a free cluster */
-		if (cs == 0xFFFFFFFF || cs == 1)/* An error occurred */
-			return cs;
-		if (ncl == scl) return 0;		/* No free cluster */
-	}
-
-	res = put_fat(fs, ncl, 0x0FFFFFFF);	/* Mark the new cluster "last link" */
-	if (res == FR_OK && clst != 0) {
-		res = put_fat(fs, clst, ncl);	/* Link it to the previous one if needed */
-	}
-	if (res == FR_OK) {
-		fs->last_clust = ncl;			/* Update FSINFO */
-		if (fs->free_clust != 0xFFFFFFFF) {
-			fs->free_clust--;
-			fs->fsi_flag = 1;
-		}
-	} else {
-		ncl = (res == FR_DISK_ERR) ? 0xFFFFFFFF : 1;
-	}
-
-	return ncl;		/* Return new cluster number or error code */
-}
-#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* FAT handling - Convert offset into cluster with link map table        */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-#if _USE_FASTSEEK
-static
-DWORD clmt_clust (	/* <2:Error, >=2:Cluster number */
-	FIL* fp,		/* Pointer to the file object */
-	DWORD ofs		/* File offset to be converted to cluster# */
-)
-{
-	DWORD cl, ncl, *tbl;
-
-
-	tbl = fp->cltbl + 1;	/* Top of CLMT */
-	cl = ofs / SS(fp->fs) / fp->fs->csize;	/* Cluster order from top of the file */
-	for (;;) {
-		ncl = *tbl++;			/* Number of cluters in the fragment */
-		if (!ncl) return 0;		/* End of table? (error) */
-		if (cl < ncl) break;	/* In this fragment? */
-		cl -= ncl; tbl++;		/* Next fragment */
-	}
-	return cl + *tbl;	/* Return the cluster number */
-}
-#endif	/* _USE_FASTSEEK */
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Directory handling - Set directory index                              */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-static
-FRESULT dir_sdi (
-	DIR *dj,		/* Pointer to directory object */
-	WORD idx		/* Index of directory table */
-)
-{
-	DWORD clst;
-	WORD ic;
-
-
-	dj->index = idx;
-	clst = dj->sclust;
-	if (clst == 1 || clst >= dj->fs->n_fatent)	/* Check start cluster range */
-		return FR_INT_ERR;
-	if (!clst && dj->fs->fs_type == FS_FAT32)	/* Replace cluster# 0 with root cluster# if in FAT32 */
-		clst = dj->fs->dirbase;
-
-	if (clst == 0) {	/* Static table (root-dir in FAT12/16) */
-		dj->clust = clst;
-		if (idx >= dj->fs->n_rootdir)		/* Index is out of range */
-			return FR_INT_ERR;
-		dj->sect = dj->fs->dirbase + idx / (SS(dj->fs) / SZ_DIR);	/* Sector# */
-	}
-	else {				/* Dynamic table (sub-dirs or root-dir in FAT32) */
-		ic = SS(dj->fs) / SZ_DIR * dj->fs->csize;	/* Entries per cluster */
-		while (idx >= ic) {	/* Follow cluster chain */
-			clst = get_fat(dj->fs, clst);				/* Get next cluster */
-			if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) return FR_DISK_ERR;	/* Disk error */
-			if (clst < 2 || clst >= dj->fs->n_fatent)	/* Reached to end of table or int error */
-				return FR_INT_ERR;
-			idx -= ic;
-		}
-		dj->clust = clst;
-		dj->sect = clust2sect(dj->fs, clst) + idx / (SS(dj->fs) / SZ_DIR);	/* Sector# */
-	}
-
-	dj->dir = dj->fs->win + (idx % (SS(dj->fs) / SZ_DIR)) * SZ_DIR;	/* Ptr to the entry in the sector */
-
-	return FR_OK;	/* Seek succeeded */
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Directory handling - Move directory table index next                  */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-static
-FRESULT dir_next (	/* FR_OK:Succeeded, FR_NO_FILE:End of table, FR_DENIED:EOT and could not stretch */
-	DIR *dj,		/* Pointer to directory object */
-	int stretch		/* 0: Do not stretch table, 1: Stretch table if needed */
-)
-{
-	DWORD clst;
-	WORD i;
-
-
-	stretch = stretch;		/* To suppress warning on read-only cfg. */
-	i = dj->index + 1;
-	if (!i || !dj->sect)	/* Report EOT when index has reached 65535 */
-		return FR_NO_FILE;
-
-	if (!(i % (SS(dj->fs) / SZ_DIR))) {	/* Sector changed? */
-		dj->sect++;					/* Next sector */
-
-		if (dj->clust == 0) {	/* Static table */
-			if (i >= dj->fs->n_rootdir)	/* Report EOT when end of table */
-				return FR_NO_FILE;
-		}
-		else {					/* Dynamic table */
-			if (((i / (SS(dj->fs) / SZ_DIR)) & (dj->fs->csize - 1)) == 0) {	/* Cluster changed? */
-				clst = get_fat(dj->fs, dj->clust);				/* Get next cluster */
-				if (clst <= 1) return FR_INT_ERR;
-				if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) return FR_DISK_ERR;
-				if (clst >= dj->fs->n_fatent) {					/* When it reached end of dynamic table */
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-					BYTE c;
-					if (!stretch) return FR_NO_FILE;			/* When do not stretch, report EOT */
-					clst = create_chain(dj->fs, dj->clust);		/* Stretch cluster chain */
-					if (clst == 0) return FR_DENIED;			/* No free cluster */
-					if (clst == 1) return FR_INT_ERR;
-					if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) return FR_DISK_ERR;
-					/* Clean-up stretched table */
-					if (move_window(dj->fs, 0)) return FR_DISK_ERR;	/* Flush active window */
-					mem_set(dj->fs->win, 0, SS(dj->fs));			/* Clear window buffer */
-					dj->fs->winsect = clust2sect(dj->fs, clst);	/* Cluster start sector */
-					for (c = 0; c < dj->fs->csize; c++) {		/* Fill the new cluster with 0 */
-						dj->fs->wflag = 1;
-						if (move_window(dj->fs, 0)) return FR_DISK_ERR;
-						dj->fs->winsect++;
-					}
-					dj->fs->winsect -= c;						/* Rewind window address */
-#else
-					return FR_NO_FILE;			/* Report EOT */
-#endif
-				}
-				dj->clust = clst;				/* Initialize data for new cluster */
-				dj->sect = clust2sect(dj->fs, clst);
-			}
-		}
-	}
-
-	dj->index = i;
-	dj->dir = dj->fs->win + (i % (SS(dj->fs) / SZ_DIR)) * SZ_DIR;
-
-	return FR_OK;
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Directory handling - Load/Store start cluster number                  */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-static
-DWORD ld_clust (
-	FATFS *fs,	/* Pointer to the fs object */
-	BYTE *dir	/* Pointer to the directory entry */
-)
-{
-	DWORD cl;
-
-	cl = LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO);
-	if (fs->fs_type == FS_FAT32)
-		cl |= (DWORD)LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI) << 16;
-
-	return cl;
-}
-
-
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-static
-void st_clust (
-	BYTE *dir,	/* Pointer to the directory entry */
-	DWORD cl	/* Value to be set */
-)
-{
-	ST_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO, cl);
-	ST_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI, cl >> 16);
-}
-#endif
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* LFN handling - Test/Pick/Fit an LFN segment from/to directory entry   */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#if _USE_LFN
-static
-const BYTE LfnOfs[] = {1,3,5,7,9,14,16,18,20,22,24,28,30};	/* Offset of LFN chars in the directory entry */
-
-
-static
-int cmp_lfn (			/* 1:Matched, 0:Not matched */
-	WCHAR *lfnbuf,		/* Pointer to the LFN to be compared */
-	BYTE *dir			/* Pointer to the directory entry containing a part of LFN */
-)
-{
-	UINT i, s;
-	WCHAR wc, uc;
-
-
-	i = ((dir[LDIR_Ord] & ~LLE) - 1) * 13;	/* Get offset in the LFN buffer */
-	s = 0; wc = 1;
-	do {
-		uc = LD_WORD(dir+LfnOfs[s]);	/* Pick an LFN character from the entry */
-		if (wc) {	/* Last char has not been processed */
-			wc = ff_wtoupper(uc);		/* Convert it to upper case */
-			if (i >= _MAX_LFN || wc != ff_wtoupper(lfnbuf[i++]))	/* Compare it */
-				return 0;				/* Not matched */
-		} else {
-			if (uc != 0xFFFF) return 0;	/* Check filler */
-		}
-	} while (++s < 13);				/* Repeat until all chars in the entry are checked */
-
-	if ((dir[LDIR_Ord] & LLE) && wc && lfnbuf[i])	/* Last segment matched but different length */
-		return 0;
-
-	return 1;						/* The part of LFN matched */
-}
-
-
-
-static
-int pick_lfn (			/* 1:Succeeded, 0:Buffer overflow */
-	WCHAR *lfnbuf,		/* Pointer to the Unicode-LFN buffer */
-	BYTE *dir			/* Pointer to the directory entry */
-)
-{
-	UINT i, s;
-	WCHAR wc, uc;
-
-
-	i = ((dir[LDIR_Ord] & 0x3F) - 1) * 13;	/* Offset in the LFN buffer */
-
-	s = 0; wc = 1;
-	do {
-		uc = LD_WORD(dir+LfnOfs[s]);		/* Pick an LFN character from the entry */
-		if (wc) {	/* Last char has not been processed */
-			if (i >= _MAX_LFN) return 0;	/* Buffer overflow? */
-			lfnbuf[i++] = wc = uc;			/* Store it */
-		} else {
-			if (uc != 0xFFFF) return 0;		/* Check filler */
-		}
-	} while (++s < 13);						/* Read all character in the entry */
-
-	if (dir[LDIR_Ord] & LLE) {				/* Put terminator if it is the last LFN part */
-		if (i >= _MAX_LFN) return 0;		/* Buffer overflow? */
-		lfnbuf[i] = 0;
-	}
-
-	return 1;
-}
-
-
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-static
-void fit_lfn (
-	const WCHAR *lfnbuf,	/* Pointer to the LFN buffer */
-	BYTE *dir,				/* Pointer to the directory entry */
-	BYTE ord,				/* LFN order (1-20) */
-	BYTE sum				/* SFN sum */
-)
-{
-	UINT i, s;
-	WCHAR wc;
-
-
-	dir[LDIR_Chksum] = sum;			/* Set check sum */
-	dir[LDIR_Attr] = AM_LFN;		/* Set attribute. LFN entry */
-	dir[LDIR_Type] = 0;
-	ST_WORD(dir+LDIR_FstClusLO, 0);
-
-	i = (ord - 1) * 13;				/* Get offset in the LFN buffer */
-	s = wc = 0;
-	do {
-		if (wc != 0xFFFF) wc = lfnbuf[i++];	/* Get an effective char */
-		ST_WORD(dir+LfnOfs[s], wc);	/* Put it */
-		if (!wc) wc = 0xFFFF;		/* Padding chars following last char */
-	} while (++s < 13);
-	if (wc == 0xFFFF || !lfnbuf[i]) ord |= LLE;	/* Bottom LFN part is the start of LFN sequence */
-	dir[LDIR_Ord] = ord;			/* Set the LFN order */
-}
-
-#endif
-#endif
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Create numbered name                                                  */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#if _USE_LFN
-void gen_numname (
-	BYTE *dst,			/* Pointer to generated SFN */
-	const BYTE *src,	/* Pointer to source SFN to be modified */
-	const WCHAR *lfn,	/* Pointer to LFN */
-	WORD seq			/* Sequence number */
-)
-{
-	BYTE ns[8], c;
-	UINT i, j;
-
-
-	mem_cpy(dst, src, 11);
-
-	if (seq > 5) {	/* On many collisions, generate a hash number instead of sequential number */
-		do seq = (seq >> 1) + (seq << 15) + (WORD)*lfn++; while (*lfn);
-	}
-
-	/* itoa (hexdecimal) */
-	i = 7;
-	do {
-		c = (seq % 16) + '0';
-		if (c > '9') c += 7;
-		ns[i--] = c;
-		seq /= 16;
-	} while (seq);
-	ns[i] = '~';
-
-	/* Append the number */
-	for (j = 0; j < i && dst[j] != ' '; j++) {
-		if (IsDBCS1(dst[j])) {
-			if (j == i - 1) break;
-			j++;
-		}
-	}
-	do {
-		dst[j++] = (i < 8) ? ns[i++] : ' ';
-	} while (j < 8);
-}
-#endif
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Calculate sum of an SFN                                               */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#if _USE_LFN
-static
-BYTE sum_sfn (
-	const BYTE *dir		/* Ptr to directory entry */
-)
-{
-	BYTE sum = 0;
-	UINT n = 11;
-
-	do sum = (sum >> 1) + (sum << 7) + *dir++; while (--n);
-	return sum;
-}
-#endif
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Directory handling - Find an object in the directory                  */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-static
-FRESULT dir_find (
-	DIR *dj			/* Pointer to the directory object linked to the file name */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	BYTE c, *dir;
-#if _USE_LFN
-	BYTE a, ord, sum;
-#endif
-
-	res = dir_sdi(dj, 0);			/* Rewind directory object */
-	if (res != FR_OK) return res;
-
-#if _USE_LFN
-	ord = sum = 0xFF;
-#endif
-	do {
-		res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
-		if (res != FR_OK) break;
-		dir = dj->dir;					/* Ptr to the directory entry of current index */
-		c = dir[DIR_Name];
-		if (c == 0) { res = FR_NO_FILE; break; }	/* Reached to end of table */
-#if _USE_LFN	/* LFN configuration */
-		a = dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_MASK;
-		if (c == DDE || ((a & AM_VOL) && a != AM_LFN)) {	/* An entry without valid data */
-			ord = 0xFF;
-		} else {
-			if (a == AM_LFN) {			/* An LFN entry is found */
-				if (dj->lfn) {
-					if (c & LLE) {		/* Is it start of LFN sequence? */
-						sum = dir[LDIR_Chksum];
-						c &= ~LLE; ord = c;	/* LFN start order */
-						dj->lfn_idx = dj->index;
-					}
-					/* Check validity of the LFN entry and compare it with given name */
-					ord = (c == ord && sum == dir[LDIR_Chksum] && cmp_lfn(dj->lfn, dir)) ? ord - 1 : 0xFF;
-				}
-			} else {					/* An SFN entry is found */
-				if (!ord && sum == sum_sfn(dir)) break;	/* LFN matched? */
-				ord = 0xFF; dj->lfn_idx = 0xFFFF;	/* Reset LFN sequence */
-				if (!(dj->fn[NS] & NS_LOSS) && !mem_cmp(dir, dj->fn, 11)) break;	/* SFN matched? */
-			}
-		}
-#else		/* Non LFN configuration */
-		if (!(dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_VOL) && !mem_cmp(dir, dj->fn, 11)) /* Is it a valid entry? */
-			break;
-#endif
-		res = dir_next(dj, 0);		/* Next entry */
-	} while (res == FR_OK);
-
-	return res;
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Read an object from the directory                                     */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#if _FS_MINIMIZE <= 1
-static
-FRESULT dir_read (
-	DIR *dj			/* Pointer to the directory object that pointing the entry to be read */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	BYTE c, *dir;
-#if _USE_LFN
-	BYTE a, ord = 0xFF, sum = 0xFF;
-#endif
-
-	res = FR_NO_FILE;
-	while (dj->sect) {
-		res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
-		if (res != FR_OK) break;
-		dir = dj->dir;					/* Ptr to the directory entry of current index */
-		c = dir[DIR_Name];
-		if (c == 0) { res = FR_NO_FILE; break; }	/* Reached to end of table */
-#if _USE_LFN	/* LFN configuration */
-		a = dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_MASK;
-		if (c == DDE || (!_FS_RPATH && c == '.') || ((a & AM_VOL) && a != AM_LFN)) {	/* An entry without valid data */
-			ord = 0xFF;
-		} else {
-			if (a == AM_LFN) {			/* An LFN entry is found */
-				if (c & LLE) {			/* Is it start of LFN sequence? */
-					sum = dir[LDIR_Chksum];
-					c &= ~LLE; ord = c;
-					dj->lfn_idx = dj->index;
-				}
-				/* Check LFN validity and capture it */
-				ord = (c == ord && sum == dir[LDIR_Chksum] && pick_lfn(dj->lfn, dir)) ? ord - 1 : 0xFF;
-			} else {					/* An SFN entry is found */
-				if (ord || sum != sum_sfn(dir))	/* Is there a valid LFN? */
-					dj->lfn_idx = 0xFFFF;		/* It has no LFN. */
-				break;
-			}
-		}
-#else		/* Non LFN configuration */
-		if (c != DDE && (_FS_RPATH || c != '.') && !(dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_VOL))	/* Is it a valid entry? */
-			break;
-#endif
-		res = dir_next(dj, 0);				/* Next entry */
-		if (res != FR_OK) break;
-	}
-
-	if (res != FR_OK) dj->sect = 0;
-
-	return res;
-}
-#endif
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Register an object to the directory                                   */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-static
-FRESULT dir_register (	/* FR_OK:Successful, FR_DENIED:No free entry or too many SFN collision, FR_DISK_ERR:Disk error */
-	DIR *dj				/* Target directory with object name to be created */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	BYTE c, *dir;
-#if _USE_LFN	/* LFN configuration */
-	WORD n, ne, is;
-	BYTE sn[12], *fn, sum;
-	WCHAR *lfn;
-
-
-	fn = dj->fn; lfn = dj->lfn;
-	mem_cpy(sn, fn, 12);
-
-	if (_FS_RPATH && (sn[NS] & NS_DOT))		/* Cannot create dot entry */
-		return FR_INVALID_NAME;
-
-	if (sn[NS] & NS_LOSS) {			/* When LFN is out of 8.3 format, generate a numbered name */
-		fn[NS] = 0; dj->lfn = 0;			/* Find only SFN */
-		for (n = 1; n < 100; n++) {
-			gen_numname(fn, sn, lfn, n);	/* Generate a numbered name */
-			res = dir_find(dj);				/* Check if the name collides with existing SFN */
-			if (res != FR_OK) break;
-		}
-		if (n == 100) return FR_DENIED;		/* Abort if too many collisions */
-		if (res != FR_NO_FILE) return res;	/* Abort if the result is other than 'not collided' */
-		fn[NS] = sn[NS]; dj->lfn = lfn;
-	}
-
-	if (sn[NS] & NS_LFN) {			/* When LFN is to be created, reserve an SFN + LFN entries. */
-		for (ne = 0; lfn[ne]; ne++) ;
-		ne = (ne + 25) / 13;
-	} else {						/* Otherwise reserve only an SFN entry. */
-		ne = 1;
-	}
-
-	/* Reserve contiguous entries */
-	res = dir_sdi(dj, 0);
-	if (res != FR_OK) return res;
-	n = is = 0;
-	do {
-		res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
-		if (res != FR_OK) break;
-		c = *dj->dir;				/* Check the entry status */
-		if (c == DDE || c == 0) {	/* Is it a blank entry? */
-			if (n == 0) is = dj->index;	/* First index of the contiguous entry */
-			if (++n == ne) break;	/* A contiguous entry that required count is found */
-		} else {
-			n = 0;					/* Not a blank entry. Restart to search */
-		}
-		res = dir_next(dj, 1);		/* Next entry with table stretch */
-	} while (res == FR_OK);
-
-	if (res == FR_OK && ne > 1) {	/* Initialize LFN entry if needed */
-		res = dir_sdi(dj, is);
-		if (res == FR_OK) {
-			sum = sum_sfn(dj->fn);	/* Sum of the SFN tied to the LFN */
-			ne--;
-			do {					/* Store LFN entries in bottom first */
-				res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
-				if (res != FR_OK) break;
-				fit_lfn(dj->lfn, dj->dir, (BYTE)ne, sum);
-				dj->fs->wflag = 1;
-				res = dir_next(dj, 0);	/* Next entry */
-			} while (res == FR_OK && --ne);
-		}
-	}
-
-#else	/* Non LFN configuration */
-	res = dir_sdi(dj, 0);
-	if (res == FR_OK) {
-		do {	/* Find a blank entry for the SFN */
-			res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
-			if (res != FR_OK) break;
-			c = *dj->dir;
-			if (c == DDE || c == 0) break;	/* Is it a blank entry? */
-			res = dir_next(dj, 1);			/* Next entry with table stretch */
-		} while (res == FR_OK);
-	}
-#endif
-
-	if (res == FR_OK) {		/* Initialize the SFN entry */
-		res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
-		if (res == FR_OK) {
-			dir = dj->dir;
-			mem_set(dir, 0, SZ_DIR);	/* Clean the entry */
-			mem_cpy(dir, dj->fn, 11);	/* Put SFN */
-#if _USE_LFN
-			dir[DIR_NTres] = *(dj->fn+NS) & (NS_BODY | NS_EXT);	/* Put NT flag */
-#endif
-			dj->fs->wflag = 1;
-		}
-	}
-
-	return res;
-}
-#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Remove an object from the directory                                   */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#if !_FS_READONLY && !_FS_MINIMIZE
-static
-FRESULT dir_remove (	/* FR_OK: Successful, FR_DISK_ERR: A disk error */
-	DIR *dj				/* Directory object pointing the entry to be removed */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-#if _USE_LFN	/* LFN configuration */
-	WORD i;
-
-	i = dj->index;	/* SFN index */
-	res = dir_sdi(dj, (WORD)((dj->lfn_idx == 0xFFFF) ? i : dj->lfn_idx));	/* Goto the SFN or top of the LFN entries */
-	if (res == FR_OK) {
-		do {
-			res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
-			if (res != FR_OK) break;
-			*dj->dir = DDE;			/* Mark the entry "deleted" */
-			dj->fs->wflag = 1;
-			if (dj->index >= i) break;	/* When reached SFN, all entries of the object has been deleted. */
-			res = dir_next(dj, 0);		/* Next entry */
-		} while (res == FR_OK);
-		if (res == FR_NO_FILE) res = FR_INT_ERR;
-	}
-
-#else			/* Non LFN configuration */
-	res = dir_sdi(dj, dj->index);
-	if (res == FR_OK) {
-		res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
-		if (res == FR_OK) {
-			*dj->dir = DDE;			/* Mark the entry "deleted" */
-			dj->fs->wflag = 1;
-		}
-	}
-#endif
-
-	return res;
-}
-#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Pick a segment and create the object name in directory form           */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-static
-FRESULT create_name (
-	DIR *dj,			/* Pointer to the directory object */
-	const TCHAR **path	/* Pointer to pointer to the segment in the path string */
-)
-{
-#ifdef _EXCVT
-	static const BYTE excvt[] = _EXCVT;	/* Upper conversion table for extended chars */
-#endif
-
-#if _USE_LFN	/* LFN configuration */
-	BYTE b, cf;
-	WCHAR w, *lfn;
-	UINT i, ni, si, di;
-	const TCHAR *p;
-
-	/* Create LFN in Unicode */
-	for (p = *path; *p == '/' || *p == '\\'; p++) ;	/* Strip duplicated separator */
-	lfn = dj->lfn;
-	si = di = 0;
-	for (;;) {
-		w = p[si++];					/* Get a character */
-		if (w < ' ' || w == '/' || w == '\\') break;	/* Break on end of segment */
-		if (di >= _MAX_LFN)				/* Reject too long name */
-			return FR_INVALID_NAME;
-#if !_LFN_UNICODE
-		w &= 0xFF;
-		if (IsDBCS1(w)) {				/* Check if it is a DBC 1st byte (always false on SBCS cfg) */
-			b = (BYTE)p[si++];			/* Get 2nd byte */
-			if (!IsDBCS2(b))
-				return FR_INVALID_NAME;	/* Reject invalid sequence */
-			w = (w << 8) + b;			/* Create a DBC */
-		}
-		w = ff_convert(w, 1);			/* Convert ANSI/OEM to Unicode */
-		if (!w) return FR_INVALID_NAME;	/* Reject invalid code */
-#endif
-		if (w < 0x80 && chk_chr("\"*:<>\?|\x7F", w)) /* Reject illegal chars for LFN */
-			return FR_INVALID_NAME;
-		lfn[di++] = w;					/* Store the Unicode char */
-	}
-	*path = &p[si];						/* Return pointer to the next segment */
-	cf = (w < ' ') ? NS_LAST : 0;		/* Set last segment flag if end of path */
-#if _FS_RPATH
-	if ((di == 1 && lfn[di-1] == '.') || /* Is this a dot entry? */
-		(di == 2 && lfn[di-1] == '.' && lfn[di-2] == '.')) {
-		lfn[di] = 0;
-		for (i = 0; i < 11; i++)
-			dj->fn[i] = (i < di) ? '.' : ' ';
-		dj->fn[i] = cf | NS_DOT;		/* This is a dot entry */
-		return FR_OK;
-	}
-#endif
-	while (di) {						/* Strip trailing spaces and dots */
-		w = lfn[di-1];
-		if (w != ' ' && w != '.') break;
-		di--;
-	}
-	if (!di) return FR_INVALID_NAME;	/* Reject nul string */
-
-	lfn[di] = 0;						/* LFN is created */
-
-	/* Create SFN in directory form */
-	mem_set(dj->fn, ' ', 11);
-	for (si = 0; lfn[si] == ' ' || lfn[si] == '.'; si++) ;	/* Strip leading spaces and dots */
-	if (si) cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN;
-	while (di && lfn[di - 1] != '.') di--;	/* Find extension (di<=si: no extension) */
-
-	b = i = 0; ni = 8;
-	for (;;) {
-		w = lfn[si++];					/* Get an LFN char */
-		if (!w) break;					/* Break on end of the LFN */
-		if (w == ' ' || (w == '.' && si != di)) {	/* Remove spaces and dots */
-			cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN; continue;
-		}
-
-		if (i >= ni || si == di) {		/* Extension or end of SFN */
-			if (ni == 11) {				/* Long extension */
-				cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN; break;
-			}
-			if (si != di) cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN;	/* Out of 8.3 format */
-			if (si > di) break;			/* No extension */
-			si = di; i = 8; ni = 11;	/* Enter extension section */
-			b <<= 2; continue;
-		}
-
-		if (w >= 0x80) {				/* Non ASCII char */
-#ifdef _EXCVT
-			w = ff_convert(w, 0);		/* Unicode -> OEM code */
-			if (w) w = excvt[w - 0x80];	/* Convert extended char to upper (SBCS) */
-#else
-			w = ff_convert(ff_wtoupper(w), 0);	/* Upper converted Unicode -> OEM code */
-#endif
-			cf |= NS_LFN;				/* Force create LFN entry */
-		}
-
-		if (_DF1S && w >= 0x100) {		/* Double byte char (always false on SBCS cfg) */
-			if (i >= ni - 1) {
-				cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN; i = ni; continue;
-			}
-			dj->fn[i++] = (BYTE)(w >> 8);
-		} else {						/* Single byte char */
-			if (!w || chk_chr("+,;=[]", w)) {	/* Replace illegal chars for SFN */
-				w = '_'; cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN;/* Lossy conversion */
-			} else {
-				if (IsUpper(w)) {		/* ASCII large capital */
-					b |= 2;
-				} else {
-					if (IsLower(w)) {	/* ASCII small capital */
-						b |= 1; w -= 0x20;
-					}
-				}
-			}
-		}
-		dj->fn[i++] = (BYTE)w;
-	}
-
-	if (dj->fn[0] == DDE) dj->fn[0] = NDDE;	/* If the first char collides with deleted mark, replace it with 0x05 */
-
-	if (ni == 8) b <<= 2;
-	if ((b & 0x0C) == 0x0C || (b & 0x03) == 0x03)	/* Create LFN entry when there are composite capitals */
-		cf |= NS_LFN;
-	if (!(cf & NS_LFN)) {						/* When LFN is in 8.3 format without extended char, NT flags are created */
-		if ((b & 0x03) == 0x01) cf |= NS_EXT;	/* NT flag (Extension has only small capital) */
-		if ((b & 0x0C) == 0x04) cf |= NS_BODY;	/* NT flag (Filename has only small capital) */
-	}
-
-	dj->fn[NS] = cf;	/* SFN is created */
-
-	return FR_OK;
-
-
-#else	/* Non-LFN configuration */
-	BYTE b, c, d, *sfn;
-	UINT ni, si, i;
-	const char *p;
-
-	/* Create file name in directory form */
-	for (p = *path; *p == '/' || *p == '\\'; p++) ;	/* Strip duplicated separator */
-	sfn = dj->fn;
-	mem_set(sfn, ' ', 11);
-	si = i = b = 0; ni = 8;
-#if _FS_RPATH
-	if (p[si] == '.') { /* Is this a dot entry? */
-		for (;;) {
-			c = (BYTE)p[si++];
-			if (c != '.' || si >= 3) break;
-			sfn[i++] = c;
-		}
-		if (c != '/' && c != '\\' && c > ' ') return FR_INVALID_NAME;
-		*path = &p[si];									/* Return pointer to the next segment */
-		sfn[NS] = (c <= ' ') ? NS_LAST | NS_DOT : NS_DOT;	/* Set last segment flag if end of path */
-		return FR_OK;
-	}
-#endif
-	for (;;) {
-		c = (BYTE)p[si++];
-		if (c <= ' ' || c == '/' || c == '\\') break;	/* Break on end of segment */
-		if (c == '.' || i >= ni) {
-			if (ni != 8 || c != '.') return FR_INVALID_NAME;
-			i = 8; ni = 11;
-			b <<= 2; continue;
-		}
-		if (c >= 0x80) {				/* Extended char? */
-			b |= 3;						/* Eliminate NT flag */
-#ifdef _EXCVT
-			c = excvt[c - 0x80];		/* Upper conversion (SBCS) */
-#else
-#if !_DF1S	/* ASCII only cfg */
-			return FR_INVALID_NAME;
-#endif
-#endif
-		}
-		if (IsDBCS1(c)) {				/* Check if it is a DBC 1st byte (always false on SBCS cfg) */
-			d = (BYTE)p[si++];			/* Get 2nd byte */
-			if (!IsDBCS2(d) || i >= ni - 1)	/* Reject invalid DBC */
-				return FR_INVALID_NAME;
-			sfn[i++] = c;
-			sfn[i++] = d;
-		} else {						/* Single byte code */
-			if (chk_chr("\"*+,:;<=>\?[]|\x7F", c))	/* Reject illegal chrs for SFN */
-				return FR_INVALID_NAME;
-			if (IsUpper(c)) {			/* ASCII large capital? */
-				b |= 2;
-			} else {
-				if (IsLower(c)) {		/* ASCII small capital? */
-					b |= 1; c -= 0x20;
-				}
-			}
-			sfn[i++] = c;
-		}
-	}
-	*path = &p[si];						/* Return pointer to the next segment */
-	c = (c <= ' ') ? NS_LAST : 0;		/* Set last segment flag if end of path */
-
-	if (!i) return FR_INVALID_NAME;		/* Reject nul string */
-	if (sfn[0] == DDE) sfn[0] = NDDE;	/* When first char collides with DDE, replace it with 0x05 */
-
-	if (ni == 8) b <<= 2;
-	if ((b & 0x03) == 0x01) c |= NS_EXT;	/* NT flag (Name extension has only small capital) */
-	if ((b & 0x0C) == 0x04) c |= NS_BODY;	/* NT flag (Name body has only small capital) */
-
-	sfn[NS] = c;		/* Store NT flag, File name is created */
-
-	return FR_OK;
-#endif
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Get file information from directory entry                             */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#if _FS_MINIMIZE <= 1
-static
-void get_fileinfo (		/* No return code */
-	DIR *dj,			/* Pointer to the directory object */
-	FILINFO *fno	 	/* Pointer to the file information to be filled */
-)
-{
-	UINT i;
-	BYTE nt, *dir;
-	TCHAR *p, c;
-
-
-	p = fno->fname;
-	if (dj->sect) {
-		dir = dj->dir;
-		nt = dir[DIR_NTres];		/* NT flag */
-		for (i = 0; i < 8; i++) {	/* Copy name body */
-			c = dir[i];
-			if (c == ' ') break;
-			if (c == NDDE) c = (TCHAR)DDE;
-			if (_USE_LFN && (nt & NS_BODY) && IsUpper(c)) c += 0x20;
-#if _LFN_UNICODE
-			if (IsDBCS1(c) && i < 7 && IsDBCS2(dir[i+1]))
-				c = (c << 8) | dir[++i];
-			c = ff_convert(c, 1);
-			if (!c) c = '?';
-#endif
-			*p++ = c;
-		}
-		if (dir[8] != ' ') {		/* Copy name extension */
-			*p++ = '.';
-			for (i = 8; i < 11; i++) {
-				c = dir[i];
-				if (c == ' ') break;
-				if (_USE_LFN && (nt & NS_EXT) && IsUpper(c)) c += 0x20;
-#if _LFN_UNICODE
-				if (IsDBCS1(c) && i < 10 && IsDBCS2(dir[i+1]))
-					c = (c << 8) | dir[++i];
-				c = ff_convert(c, 1);
-				if (!c) c = '?';
-#endif
-				*p++ = c;
-			}
-		}
-		fno->fattrib = dir[DIR_Attr];				/* Attribute */
-		fno->fsize = LD_DWORD(dir+DIR_FileSize);	/* Size */
-		fno->fdate = LD_WORD(dir+DIR_WrtDate);		/* Date */
-		fno->ftime = LD_WORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime);		/* Time */
-	}
-	*p = 0;		/* Terminate SFN str by a \0 */
-
-#if _USE_LFN
-	if (fno->lfname && fno->lfsize) {
-		TCHAR *tp = fno->lfname;
-		WCHAR w, *lfn;
-
-		i = 0;
-		if (dj->sect && dj->lfn_idx != 0xFFFF) {/* Get LFN if available */
-			lfn = dj->lfn;
-			while ((w = *lfn++) != 0) {			/* Get an LFN char */
-#if !_LFN_UNICODE
-				w = ff_convert(w, 0);			/* Unicode -> OEM conversion */
-				if (!w) { i = 0; break; }		/* Could not convert, no LFN */
-				if (_DF1S && w >= 0x100)		/* Put 1st byte if it is a DBC (always false on SBCS cfg) */
-					tp[i++] = (TCHAR)(w >> 8);
-#endif
-				if (i >= fno->lfsize - 1) { i = 0; break; }	/* Buffer overflow, no LFN */
-				tp[i++] = (TCHAR)w;
-			}
-		}
-		tp[i] = 0;	/* Terminate the LFN str by a \0 */
-	}
-#endif
-}
-#endif /* _FS_MINIMIZE <= 1 */
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Follow a file path                                                    */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-static
-FRESULT follow_path (	/* FR_OK(0): successful, !=0: error code */
-	DIR *dj,			/* Directory object to return last directory and found object */
-	const TCHAR *path	/* Full-path string to find a file or directory */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	BYTE *dir, ns;
-
-
-#if _FS_RPATH
-	if (*path == '/' || *path == '\\') { /* There is a heading separator */
-		path++;	dj->sclust = 0;		/* Strip it and start from the root dir */
-	} else {							/* No heading separator */
-		dj->sclust = dj->fs->cdir;	/* Start from the current dir */
-	}
-#else
-	if (*path == '/' || *path == '\\')	/* Strip heading separator if exist */
-		path++;
-	dj->sclust = 0;						/* Start from the root dir */
-#endif
-
-	if ((UINT)*path < ' ') {			/* Nul path means the start directory itself */
-		res = dir_sdi(dj, 0);
-		dj->dir = 0;
-	} else {							/* Follow path */
-		for (;;) {
-			res = create_name(dj, &path);	/* Get a segment */
-			if (res != FR_OK) break;
-			res = dir_find(dj);				/* Find it */
-			ns = *(dj->fn+NS);
-			if (res != FR_OK) {				/* Failed to find the object */
-				if (res != FR_NO_FILE) break;	/* Abort if any hard error occurred */
-				/* Object not found */
-				if (_FS_RPATH && (ns & NS_DOT)) {	/* If dot entry is not exit */
-					dj->sclust = 0; dj->dir = 0;	/* It is the root dir */
-					res = FR_OK;
-					if (!(ns & NS_LAST)) continue;
-				} else {							/* Could not find the object */
-					if (!(ns & NS_LAST)) res = FR_NO_PATH;
-				}
-				break;
-			}
-			if (ns & NS_LAST) break;			/* Last segment match. Function completed. */
-			dir = dj->dir;						/* There is next segment. Follow the sub directory */
-			if (!(dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR)) {	/* Cannot follow because it is a file */
-				res = FR_NO_PATH; break;
-			}
-			dj->sclust = ld_clust(dj->fs, dir);
-		}
-	}
-
-	return res;
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Load a sector and check if it is an FAT Volume Boot Record            */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-static
-BYTE check_fs (	/* 0:FAT-VBR, 1:Any BR but not FAT, 2:Not a BR, 3:Disk error */
-	FATFS *fs,	/* File system object */
-	DWORD sect	/* Sector# (lba) to check if it is an FAT boot record or not */
-)
-{
-	if (disk_read(fs->drv, fs->win, sect, 1) != RES_OK)	/* Load boot record */
-		return 3;
-	if (LD_WORD(&fs->win[BS_55AA]) != 0xAA55)		/* Check record signature (always placed at offset 510 even if the sector size is >512) */
-		return 2;
-
-	if ((LD_DWORD(&fs->win[BS_FilSysType]) & 0xFFFFFF) == 0x544146)	/* Check "FAT" string */
-		return 0;
-	if ((LD_DWORD(&fs->win[BS_FilSysType32]) & 0xFFFFFF) == 0x544146)
-		return 0;
-
-	return 1;
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Check if the file system object is valid or not                       */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-static
-FRESULT chk_mounted (	/* FR_OK(0): successful, !=0: any error occurred */
-	const TCHAR **path,	/* Pointer to pointer to the path name (drive number) */
-	FATFS **rfs,		/* Pointer to pointer to the found file system object */
-	BYTE wmode			/* !=0: Check write protection for write access */
-)
-{
-	BYTE fmt, b, pi, *tbl;
-	UINT vol;
-	DSTATUS stat;
-	DWORD bsect, fasize, tsect, sysect, nclst, szbfat;
-	WORD nrsv;
-	const TCHAR *p = *path;
-	FATFS *fs;
-
-
-	/* Get logical drive number from the path name */
-	vol = p[0] - '0';					/* Is there a drive number? */
-	if (vol <= 9 && p[1] == ':') {		/* Found a drive number, get and strip it */
-		p += 2; *path = p;				/* Return pointer to the path name */
-	} else {							/* No drive number is given */
-#if _FS_RPATH
-		vol = CurrVol;					/* Use current drive */
-#else
-		vol = 0;						/* Use drive 0 */
-#endif
-	}
-
-	/* Check if the file system object is valid or not */
-	*rfs = 0;
-	if (vol >= _VOLUMES) 				/* Is the drive number valid? */
-		return FR_INVALID_DRIVE;
-	fs = FatFs[vol];					/* Get corresponding file system object */
-	if (!fs) return FR_NOT_ENABLED;		/* Is the file system object available? */
-
-	ENTER_FF(fs);						/* Lock file system */
-
-	*rfs = fs;							/* Return pointer to the corresponding file system object */
-	if (fs->fs_type) {					/* If the volume has been mounted */
-		stat = disk_status(fs->drv);
-		if (!(stat & STA_NOINIT)) {		/* and the physical drive is kept initialized (has not been changed), */
-			if (!_FS_READONLY && wmode && (stat & STA_PROTECT))	/* Check write protection if needed */
-				return FR_WRITE_PROTECTED;
-			return FR_OK;				/* The file system object is valid */
-		}
-	}
-
-	/* The file system object is not valid. */
-	/* Following code attempts to mount the volume. (analyze BPB and initialize the fs object) */
-
-	fs->fs_type = 0;					/* Clear the file system object */
-	fs->drv = LD2PD(vol);				/* Bind the logical drive and a physical drive */
-	stat = disk_initialize(fs->drv);	/* Initialize the physical drive */
-	if (stat & STA_NOINIT)				/* Check if the initialization succeeded */
-		return FR_NOT_READY;			/* Failed to initialize due to no medium or hard error */
-	if (!_FS_READONLY && wmode && (stat & STA_PROTECT))	/* Check disk write protection if needed */
-		return FR_WRITE_PROTECTED;
-#if _MAX_SS != 512						/* Get disk sector size (variable sector size cfg only) */
-	if (disk_ioctl(fs->drv, GET_SECTOR_SIZE, &fs->ssize) != RES_OK)
-		return FR_DISK_ERR;
-#endif
-	/* Search FAT partition on the drive. Supports only generic partitions, FDISK and SFD. */
-	fmt = check_fs(fs, bsect = 0);		/* Load sector 0 and check if it is an FAT-VBR (in SFD) */
-	if (LD2PT(vol) && !fmt) fmt = 1;	/* Force non-SFD if the volume is forced partition */
-	if (fmt == 1) {						/* Not an FAT-VBR, the physical drive can be partitioned */
-		/* Check the partition listed in the partition table */
-		pi = LD2PT(vol);
-		if (pi) pi--;
-		tbl = &fs->win[MBR_Table + pi * SZ_PTE];/* Partition table */
-		if (tbl[4]) {						/* Is the partition existing? */
-			bsect = LD_DWORD(&tbl[8]);		/* Partition offset in LBA */
-			fmt = check_fs(fs, bsect);		/* Check the partition */
-		}
-	}
-	if (fmt == 3) return FR_DISK_ERR;
-	if (fmt) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;		/* No FAT volume is found */
-
-	/* An FAT volume is found. Following code initializes the file system object */
-
-	if (LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_BytsPerSec) != SS(fs))		/* (BPB_BytsPerSec must be equal to the physical sector size) */
-		return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;
-
-	fasize = LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_FATSz16);				/* Number of sectors per FAT */
-	if (!fasize) fasize = LD_DWORD(fs->win+BPB_FATSz32);
-	fs->fsize = fasize;
-
-	fs->n_fats = b = fs->win[BPB_NumFATs];				/* Number of FAT copies */
-	if (b != 1 && b != 2) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;		/* (Must be 1 or 2) */
-	fasize *= b;										/* Number of sectors for FAT area */
-
-	fs->csize = b = fs->win[BPB_SecPerClus];			/* Number of sectors per cluster */
-	if (!b || (b & (b - 1))) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;	/* (Must be power of 2) */
-
-	fs->n_rootdir = LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_RootEntCnt);	/* Number of root directory entries */
-	if (fs->n_rootdir % (SS(fs) / SZ_DIR)) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;	/* (BPB_RootEntCnt must be sector aligned) */
-
-	tsect = LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_TotSec16);				/* Number of sectors on the volume */
-	if (!tsect) tsect = LD_DWORD(fs->win+BPB_TotSec32);
-
-	nrsv = LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_RsvdSecCnt);				/* Number of reserved sectors */
-	if (!nrsv) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;					/* (BPB_RsvdSecCnt must not be 0) */
-
-	/* Determine the FAT sub type */
-	sysect = nrsv + fasize + fs->n_rootdir / (SS(fs) / SZ_DIR);	/* RSV+FAT+DIR */
-	if (tsect < sysect) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;		/* (Invalid volume size) */
-	nclst = (tsect - sysect) / fs->csize;				/* Number of clusters */
-	if (!nclst) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;				/* (Invalid volume size) */
-	fmt = FS_FAT12;
-	if (nclst >= MIN_FAT16) fmt = FS_FAT16;
-	if (nclst >= MIN_FAT32) fmt = FS_FAT32;
-
-	/* Boundaries and Limits */
-	fs->n_fatent = nclst + 2;							/* Number of FAT entries */
-	fs->database = bsect + sysect;						/* Data start sector */
-	fs->fatbase = bsect + nrsv; 						/* FAT start sector */
-	if (fmt == FS_FAT32) {
-		if (fs->n_rootdir) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;		/* (BPB_RootEntCnt must be 0) */
-		fs->dirbase = LD_DWORD(fs->win+BPB_RootClus);	/* Root directory start cluster */
-		szbfat = fs->n_fatent * 4;						/* (Required FAT size) */
-	} else {
-		if (!fs->n_rootdir)	return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;	/* (BPB_RootEntCnt must not be 0) */
-		fs->dirbase = fs->fatbase + fasize;				/* Root directory start sector */
-		szbfat = (fmt == FS_FAT16) ?					/* (Required FAT size) */
-			fs->n_fatent * 2 : fs->n_fatent * 3 / 2 + (fs->n_fatent & 1);
-	}
-	if (fs->fsize < (szbfat + (SS(fs) - 1)) / SS(fs))	/* (BPB_FATSz must not be less than required) */
-		return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;
-
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-	/* Initialize cluster allocation information */
-	fs->free_clust = 0xFFFFFFFF;
-	fs->last_clust = 0;
-
-	/* Get fsinfo if available */
-	if (fmt == FS_FAT32) {
-	 	fs->fsi_flag = 0;
-		fs->fsi_sector = bsect + LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_FSInfo);
-		if (disk_read(fs->drv, fs->win, fs->fsi_sector, 1) == RES_OK &&
-			LD_WORD(fs->win+BS_55AA) == 0xAA55 &&
-			LD_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_LeadSig) == 0x41615252 &&
-			LD_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_StrucSig) == 0x61417272) {
-				fs->last_clust = LD_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_Nxt_Free);
-				fs->free_clust = LD_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_Free_Count);
-		}
-	}
-#endif
-	fs->fs_type = fmt;		/* FAT sub-type */
-	fs->id = ++Fsid;		/* File system mount ID */
-	fs->winsect = 0;		/* Invalidate sector cache */
-	fs->wflag = 0;
-#if _FS_RPATH
-	fs->cdir = 0;			/* Current directory (root dir) */
-#endif
-#if _FS_LOCK				/* Clear file lock semaphores */
-	clear_lock(fs);
-#endif
-
-	return FR_OK;
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Check if the file/dir object is valid or not                          */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-static
-FRESULT validate (	/* FR_OK(0): The object is valid, !=0: Invalid */
-	void* obj		/* Pointer to the object FIL/DIR to check validity */
-)
-{
-	FIL *fil;
-
-
-	fil = (FIL*)obj;	/* Assuming offset of fs and id in the FIL/DIR is identical */
-	if (!fil->fs || !fil->fs->fs_type || fil->fs->id != fil->id)
-		return FR_INVALID_OBJECT;
-
-	ENTER_FF(fil->fs);		/* Lock file system */
-
-	if (disk_status(fil->fs->drv) & STA_NOINIT)
-		return FR_NOT_READY;
-
-	return FR_OK;
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*--------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-   Public Functions
-
---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Mount/Unmount a Logical Drive                                         */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT f_mount (
-	BYTE vol,		/* Logical drive number to be mounted/unmounted */
-	FATFS *fs		/* Pointer to new file system object (NULL for unmount)*/
-)
-{
-	FATFS *rfs;
-
-
-	if (vol >= _VOLUMES)		/* Check if the drive number is valid */
-		return FR_INVALID_DRIVE;
-	rfs = FatFs[vol];			/* Get current fs object */
-
-	if (rfs) {
-#if _FS_LOCK
-		clear_lock(rfs);
-#endif
-#if _FS_REENTRANT				/* Discard sync object of the current volume */
-		if (!ff_del_syncobj(rfs->sobj)) return FR_INT_ERR;
-#endif
-		rfs->fs_type = 0;		/* Clear old fs object */
-	}
-
-	if (fs) {
-		fs->fs_type = 0;		/* Clear new fs object */
-#if _FS_REENTRANT				/* Create sync object for the new volume */
-		if (!ff_cre_syncobj(vol, &fs->sobj)) return FR_INT_ERR;
-#endif
-	}
-	FatFs[vol] = fs;			/* Register new fs object */
-
-	return FR_OK;
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Open or Create a File                                                 */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT f_open (
-	FIL *fp,			/* Pointer to the blank file object */
-	const TCHAR *path,	/* Pointer to the file name */
-	BYTE mode			/* Access mode and file open mode flags */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	DIR dj;
-	BYTE *dir;
-	DEF_NAMEBUF;
-
-
-	if (!fp) return FR_INVALID_OBJECT;
-	fp->fs = 0;			/* Clear file object */
-
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-	mode &= FA_READ | FA_WRITE | FA_CREATE_ALWAYS | FA_OPEN_ALWAYS | FA_CREATE_NEW;
-	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, (BYTE)(mode & ~FA_READ));
-#else
-	mode &= FA_READ;
-	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 0);
-#endif
-	if (res == FR_OK) {
-		INIT_BUF(dj);
-		res = follow_path(&dj, path);	/* Follow the file path */
-		dir = dj.dir;
-#if !_FS_READONLY	/* R/W configuration */
-		if (res == FR_OK) {
-			if (!dir)	/* Current dir itself */
-				res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
-#if _FS_LOCK
-			else
-				res = chk_lock(&dj, (mode & ~FA_READ) ? 1 : 0);
-#endif
-		}
-		/* Create or Open a file */
-		if (mode & (FA_CREATE_ALWAYS | FA_OPEN_ALWAYS | FA_CREATE_NEW)) {
-			DWORD dw, cl;
-
-			if (res != FR_OK) {					/* No file, create new */
-				if (res == FR_NO_FILE)			/* There is no file to open, create a new entry */
-#if _FS_LOCK
-					res = enq_lock() ? dir_register(&dj) : FR_TOO_MANY_OPEN_FILES;
-#else
-					res = dir_register(&dj);
-#endif
-				mode |= FA_CREATE_ALWAYS;		/* File is created */
-				dir = dj.dir;					/* New entry */
-			}
-			else {								/* Any object is already existing */
-				if (dir[DIR_Attr] & (AM_RDO | AM_DIR)) {	/* Cannot overwrite it (R/O or DIR) */
-					res = FR_DENIED;
-				} else {
-					if (mode & FA_CREATE_NEW)	/* Cannot create as new file */
-						res = FR_EXIST;
-				}
-			}
-			if (res == FR_OK && (mode & FA_CREATE_ALWAYS)) {	/* Truncate it if overwrite mode */
-				dw = get_fattime();					/* Created time */
-				ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_CrtTime, dw);
-				dir[DIR_Attr] = 0;					/* Reset attribute */
-				ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_FileSize, 0);		/* size = 0 */
-				cl = ld_clust(dj.fs, dir);			/* Get start cluster */
-				st_clust(dir, 0);					/* cluster = 0 */
-				dj.fs->wflag = 1;
-				if (cl) {							/* Remove the cluster chain if exist */
-					dw = dj.fs->winsect;
-					res = remove_chain(dj.fs, cl);
-					if (res == FR_OK) {
-						dj.fs->last_clust = cl - 1;	/* Reuse the cluster hole */
-						res = move_window(dj.fs, dw);
-					}
-				}
-			}
-		}
-		else {	/* Open an existing file */
-			if (res == FR_OK) {						/* Follow succeeded */
-				if (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR) {		/* It is a directory */
-					res = FR_NO_FILE;
-				} else {
-					if ((mode & FA_WRITE) && (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_RDO)) /* R/O violation */
-						res = FR_DENIED;
-				}
-			}
-		}
-		if (res == FR_OK) {
-			if (mode & FA_CREATE_ALWAYS)			/* Set file change flag if created or overwritten */
-				mode |= FA__WRITTEN;
-			fp->dir_sect = dj.fs->winsect;			/* Pointer to the directory entry */
-			fp->dir_ptr = dir;
-#if _FS_LOCK
-			fp->lockid = inc_lock(&dj, (mode & ~FA_READ) ? 1 : 0);
-			if (!fp->lockid) res = FR_INT_ERR;
-#endif
-		}
-
-#else				/* R/O configuration */
-		if (res == FR_OK) {					/* Follow succeeded */
-			dir = dj.dir;
-			if (!dir) {						/* Current dir itself */
-				res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
-			} else {
-				if (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR)	/* It is a directory */
-					res = FR_NO_FILE;
-			}
-		}
-#endif
-		FREE_BUF();
-
-		if (res == FR_OK) {
-			fp->flag = mode;					/* File access mode */
-			fp->sclust = ld_clust(dj.fs, dir);	/* File start cluster */
-			fp->fsize = LD_DWORD(dir+DIR_FileSize);	/* File size */
-			fp->fptr = 0;						/* File pointer */
-			fp->dsect = 0;
-#if _USE_FASTSEEK
-			fp->cltbl = 0;						/* Normal seek mode */
-#endif
-			fp->fs = dj.fs; fp->id = dj.fs->id;	/* Validate file object */
-		}
-	}
-
-	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Read File                                                             */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT f_read (
-	FIL *fp, 		/* Pointer to the file object */
-	void *buff,		/* Pointer to data buffer */
-	UINT btr,		/* Number of bytes to read */
-	UINT *br		/* Pointer to number of bytes read */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	DWORD clst, sect, remain;
-	UINT rcnt, cc;
-	BYTE csect, *rbuff = buff;
-
-
-	*br = 0;	/* Clear read byte counter */
-
-	res = validate(fp);							/* Check validity */
-	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
-	if (fp->flag & FA__ERROR)					/* Aborted file? */
-		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
-	if (!(fp->flag & FA_READ)) 					/* Check access mode */
-		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_DENIED);
-	remain = fp->fsize - fp->fptr;
-	if (btr > remain) btr = (UINT)remain;		/* Truncate btr by remaining bytes */
-
-	for ( ;  btr;								/* Repeat until all data read */
-		rbuff += rcnt, fp->fptr += rcnt, *br += rcnt, btr -= rcnt) {
-		if ((fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)) == 0) {		/* On the sector boundary? */
-			csect = (BYTE)(fp->fptr / SS(fp->fs) & (fp->fs->csize - 1));	/* Sector offset in the cluster */
-			if (!csect) {						/* On the cluster boundary? */
-				if (fp->fptr == 0) {			/* On the top of the file? */
-					clst = fp->sclust;			/* Follow from the origin */
-				} else {						/* Middle or end of the file */
-#if _USE_FASTSEEK
-					if (fp->cltbl)
-						clst = clmt_clust(fp, fp->fptr);	/* Get cluster# from the CLMT */
-					else
-#endif
-						clst = get_fat(fp->fs, fp->clust);	/* Follow cluster chain on the FAT */
-				}
-				if (clst < 2) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
-				if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-				fp->clust = clst;				/* Update current cluster */
-			}
-			sect = clust2sect(fp->fs, fp->clust);	/* Get current sector */
-			if (!sect) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
-			sect += csect;
-			cc = btr / SS(fp->fs);				/* When remaining bytes >= sector size, */
-			if (cc) {							/* Read maximum contiguous sectors directly */
-				if (csect + cc > fp->fs->csize)	/* Clip at cluster boundary */
-					cc = fp->fs->csize - csect;
-				if (disk_read(fp->fs->drv, rbuff, sect, (BYTE)cc) != RES_OK)
-					ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-#if !_FS_READONLY && _FS_MINIMIZE <= 2			/* Replace one of the read sectors with cached data if it contains a dirty sector */
-#if _FS_TINY
-				if (fp->fs->wflag && fp->fs->winsect - sect < cc)
-					mem_cpy(rbuff + ((fp->fs->winsect - sect) * SS(fp->fs)), fp->fs->win, SS(fp->fs));
-#else
-				if ((fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) && fp->dsect - sect < cc)
-					mem_cpy(rbuff + ((fp->dsect - sect) * SS(fp->fs)), fp->buf, SS(fp->fs));
-#endif
-#endif
-				rcnt = SS(fp->fs) * cc;			/* Number of bytes transferred */
-				continue;
-			}
-#if !_FS_TINY
-			if (fp->dsect != sect) {			/* Load data sector if not in cache */
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-				if (fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) {		/* Write-back dirty sector cache */
-					if (disk_write(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, fp->dsect, 1) != RES_OK)
-						ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-					fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY;
-				}
-#endif
-				if (disk_read(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, sect, 1) != RES_OK)	/* Fill sector cache */
-					ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-			}
-#endif
-			fp->dsect = sect;
-		}
-		rcnt = SS(fp->fs) - ((UINT)fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs));	/* Get partial sector data from sector buffer */
-		if (rcnt > btr) rcnt = btr;
-#if _FS_TINY
-		if (move_window(fp->fs, fp->dsect))		/* Move sector window */
-			ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-		mem_cpy(rbuff, &fp->fs->win[fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)], rcnt);	/* Pick partial sector */
-#else
-		mem_cpy(rbuff, &fp->buf[fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)], rcnt);	/* Pick partial sector */
-#endif
-	}
-
-	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_OK);
-}
-
-
-
-
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Write File                                                            */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT f_write (
-	FIL *fp,			/* Pointer to the file object */
-	const void *buff,	/* Pointer to the data to be written */
-	UINT btw,			/* Number of bytes to write */
-	UINT *bw			/* Pointer to number of bytes written */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	DWORD clst, sect;
-	UINT wcnt, cc;
-	const BYTE *wbuff = buff;
-	BYTE csect;
-
-
-	*bw = 0;	/* Clear write byte counter */
-
-	res = validate(fp);						/* Check validity */
-	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
-	if (fp->flag & FA__ERROR)				/* Aborted file? */
-		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
-	if (!(fp->flag & FA_WRITE))				/* Check access mode */
-		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_DENIED);
-	if ((DWORD)(fp->fsize + btw) < fp->fsize) btw = 0;	/* File size cannot reach 4GB */
-
-	for ( ;  btw;							/* Repeat until all data written */
-		wbuff += wcnt, fp->fptr += wcnt, *bw += wcnt, btw -= wcnt) {
-		if ((fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)) == 0) {	/* On the sector boundary? */
-			csect = (BYTE)(fp->fptr / SS(fp->fs) & (fp->fs->csize - 1));	/* Sector offset in the cluster */
-			if (!csect) {					/* On the cluster boundary? */
-				if (fp->fptr == 0) {		/* On the top of the file? */
-					clst = fp->sclust;		/* Follow from the origin */
-					if (clst == 0)			/* When no cluster is allocated, */
-						fp->sclust = clst = create_chain(fp->fs, 0);	/* Create a new cluster chain */
-				} else {					/* Middle or end of the file */
-#if _USE_FASTSEEK
-					if (fp->cltbl)
-						clst = clmt_clust(fp, fp->fptr);	/* Get cluster# from the CLMT */
-					else
-#endif
-						clst = create_chain(fp->fs, fp->clust);	/* Follow or stretch cluster chain on the FAT */
-				}
-				if (clst == 0) break;		/* Could not allocate a new cluster (disk full) */
-				if (clst == 1) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
-				if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-				fp->clust = clst;			/* Update current cluster */
-			}
-#if _FS_TINY
-			if (fp->fs->winsect == fp->dsect && move_window(fp->fs, 0))	/* Write-back sector cache */
-				ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-#else
-			if (fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) {		/* Write-back sector cache */
-				if (disk_write(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, fp->dsect, 1) != RES_OK)
-					ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-				fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY;
-			}
-#endif
-			sect = clust2sect(fp->fs, fp->clust);	/* Get current sector */
-			if (!sect) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
-			sect += csect;
-			cc = btw / SS(fp->fs);			/* When remaining bytes >= sector size, */
-			if (cc) {						/* Write maximum contiguous sectors directly */
-				if (csect + cc > fp->fs->csize)	/* Clip at cluster boundary */
-					cc = fp->fs->csize - csect;
-				if (disk_write(fp->fs->drv, wbuff, sect, (BYTE)cc) != RES_OK)
-					ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-#if _FS_TINY
-				if (fp->fs->winsect - sect < cc) {	/* Refill sector cache if it gets invalidated by the direct write */
-					mem_cpy(fp->fs->win, wbuff + ((fp->fs->winsect - sect) * SS(fp->fs)), SS(fp->fs));
-					fp->fs->wflag = 0;
-				}
-#else
-				if (fp->dsect - sect < cc) { /* Refill sector cache if it gets invalidated by the direct write */
-					mem_cpy(fp->buf, wbuff + ((fp->dsect - sect) * SS(fp->fs)), SS(fp->fs));
-					fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY;
-				}
-#endif
-				wcnt = SS(fp->fs) * cc;		/* Number of bytes transferred */
-				continue;
-			}
-#if _FS_TINY
-			if (fp->fptr >= fp->fsize) {	/* Avoid silly cache filling at growing edge */
-				if (move_window(fp->fs, 0)) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-				fp->fs->winsect = sect;
-			}
-#else
-			if (fp->dsect != sect) {		/* Fill sector cache with file data */
-				if (fp->fptr < fp->fsize &&
-					disk_read(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, sect, 1) != RES_OK)
-						ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-			}
-#endif
-			fp->dsect = sect;
-		}
-		wcnt = SS(fp->fs) - ((UINT)fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs));/* Put partial sector into file I/O buffer */
-		if (wcnt > btw) wcnt = btw;
-#if _FS_TINY
-		if (move_window(fp->fs, fp->dsect))	/* Move sector window */
-			ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-		mem_cpy(&fp->fs->win[fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)], wbuff, wcnt);	/* Fit partial sector */
-		fp->fs->wflag = 1;
-#else
-		mem_cpy(&fp->buf[fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)], wbuff, wcnt);	/* Fit partial sector */
-		fp->flag |= FA__DIRTY;
-#endif
-	}
-
-	if (fp->fptr > fp->fsize) fp->fsize = fp->fptr;	/* Update file size if needed */
-	fp->flag |= FA__WRITTEN;						/* Set file change flag */
-
-	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_OK);
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Synchronize the File Object                                           */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT f_sync (
-	FIL *fp		/* Pointer to the file object */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	DWORD tim;
-	BYTE *dir;
-
-
-	res = validate(fp);					/* Check validity of the object */
-	if (res == FR_OK) {
-		if (fp->flag & FA__WRITTEN) {	/* Has the file been written? */
-#if !_FS_TINY	/* Write-back dirty buffer */
-			if (fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) {
-				if (disk_write(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, fp->dsect, 1) != RES_OK)
-					LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-				fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY;
-			}
-#endif
-			/* Update the directory entry */
-			res = move_window(fp->fs, fp->dir_sect);
-			if (res == FR_OK) {
-				dir = fp->dir_ptr;
-				dir[DIR_Attr] |= AM_ARC;					/* Set archive bit */
-				ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_FileSize, fp->fsize);		/* Update file size */
-				st_clust(dir, fp->sclust);					/* Update start cluster */
-				tim = get_fattime();						/* Update updated time */
-				ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime, tim);
-				ST_WORD(dir+DIR_LstAccDate, 0);
-				fp->flag &= ~FA__WRITTEN;
-				fp->fs->wflag = 1;
-				res = sync(fp->fs);
-			}
-		}
-	}
-
-	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
-}
-
-#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Close File                                                            */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT f_close (
-	FIL *fp		/* Pointer to the file object to be closed */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-
-
-#if _FS_READONLY
-	res = validate(fp);
-	{
-#if _FS_REENTRANT
-		FATFS *fs = fp->fs;
-#endif
-		if (res == FR_OK) fp->fs = 0;	/* Discard file object */
-		LEAVE_FF(fs, res);
-	}
-#else
-	res = f_sync(fp);		/* Flush cached data */
-#if _FS_LOCK
-	if (res == FR_OK) {		/* Decrement open counter */
-#if _FS_REENTRANT
-		FATFS *fs = fp->fs;;
-		res = validate(fp);
-		if (res == FR_OK) {
-			res = dec_lock(fp->lockid);	
-			unlock_fs(fs, FR_OK);
-		}
-#else
-		res = dec_lock(fp->lockid);
-#endif
-	}
-#endif
-	if (res == FR_OK) fp->fs = 0;	/* Discard file object */
-	return res;
-#endif
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Current Drive/Directory Handlings                                     */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-#if _FS_RPATH >= 1
-
-FRESULT f_chdrive (
-	BYTE drv		/* Drive number */
-)
-{
-	if (drv >= _VOLUMES) return FR_INVALID_DRIVE;
-
-	CurrVol = drv;
-
-	return FR_OK;
-}
-
-
-
-FRESULT f_chdir (
-	const TCHAR *path	/* Pointer to the directory path */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	DIR dj;
-	DEF_NAMEBUF;
-
-
-	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 0);
-	if (res == FR_OK) {
-		INIT_BUF(dj);
-		res = follow_path(&dj, path);		/* Follow the path */
-		FREE_BUF();
-		if (res == FR_OK) {					/* Follow completed */
-			if (!dj.dir) {
-				dj.fs->cdir = dj.sclust;	/* Start directory itself */
-			} else {
-				if (dj.dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR)	/* Reached to the directory */
-					dj.fs->cdir = ld_clust(dj.fs, dj.dir);
-				else
-					res = FR_NO_PATH;		/* Reached but a file */
-			}
-		}
-		if (res == FR_NO_FILE) res = FR_NO_PATH;
-	}
-
-	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
-}
-
-
-#if _FS_RPATH >= 2
-FRESULT f_getcwd (
-	TCHAR *path,	/* Pointer to the directory path */
-	UINT sz_path	/* Size of path */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	DIR dj;
-	UINT i, n;
-	DWORD ccl;
-	TCHAR *tp;
-	FILINFO fno;
-	DEF_NAMEBUF;
-
-
-	*path = 0;
-	res = chk_mounted((const TCHAR**)&path, &dj.fs, 0);	/* Get current volume */
-	if (res == FR_OK) {
-		INIT_BUF(dj);
-		i = sz_path;		/* Bottom of buffer (dir stack base) */
-		dj.sclust = dj.fs->cdir;			/* Start to follow upper dir from current dir */
-		while ((ccl = dj.sclust) != 0) {	/* Repeat while current dir is a sub-dir */
-			res = dir_sdi(&dj, 1);			/* Get parent dir */
-			if (res != FR_OK) break;
-			res = dir_read(&dj);
-			if (res != FR_OK) break;
-			dj.sclust = ld_clust(dj.fs, dj.dir);	/* Goto parent dir */
-			res = dir_sdi(&dj, 0);
-			if (res != FR_OK) break;
-			do {							/* Find the entry links to the child dir */
-				res = dir_read(&dj);
-				if (res != FR_OK) break;
-				if (ccl == ld_clust(dj.fs, dj.dir)) break;	/* Found the entry */
-				res = dir_next(&dj, 0);	
-			} while (res == FR_OK);
-			if (res == FR_NO_FILE) res = FR_INT_ERR;/* It cannot be 'not found'. */
-			if (res != FR_OK) break;
-#if _USE_LFN
-			fno.lfname = path;
-			fno.lfsize = i;
-#endif
-			get_fileinfo(&dj, &fno);		/* Get the dir name and push it to the buffer */
-			tp = fno.fname;
-			if (_USE_LFN && *path) tp = path;
-			for (n = 0; tp[n]; n++) ;
-			if (i < n + 3) {
-				res = FR_NOT_ENOUGH_CORE; break;
-			}
-			while (n) path[--i] = tp[--n];
-			path[--i] = '/';
-		}
-		tp = path;
-		if (res == FR_OK) {
-			*tp++ = '0' + CurrVol;			/* Put drive number */
-			*tp++ = ':';
-			if (i == sz_path) {				/* Root-dir */
-				*tp++ = '/';
-			} else {						/* Sub-dir */
-				do		/* Add stacked path str */
-					*tp++ = path[i++];
-				while (i < sz_path);
-			}
-		}
-		*tp = 0;
-		FREE_BUF();
-	}
-
-	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
-}
-#endif /* _FS_RPATH >= 2 */
-#endif /* _FS_RPATH >= 1 */
-
-
-
-#if _FS_MINIMIZE <= 2
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Seek File R/W Pointer                                                 */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT f_lseek (
-	FIL *fp,		/* Pointer to the file object */
-	DWORD ofs		/* File pointer from top of file */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-
-
-	res = validate(fp);					/* Check validity of the object */
-	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
-	if (fp->flag & FA__ERROR)			/* Check abort flag */
-		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
-
-#if _USE_FASTSEEK
-	if (fp->cltbl) {	/* Fast seek */
-		DWORD cl, pcl, ncl, tcl, dsc, tlen, ulen, *tbl;
-
-		if (ofs == CREATE_LINKMAP) {	/* Create CLMT */
-			tbl = fp->cltbl;
-			tlen = *tbl++; ulen = 2;	/* Given table size and required table size */
-			cl = fp->sclust;			/* Top of the chain */
-			if (cl) {
-				do {
-					/* Get a fragment */
-					tcl = cl; ncl = 0; ulen += 2;	/* Top, length and used items */
-					do {
-						pcl = cl; ncl++;
-						cl = get_fat(fp->fs, cl);
-						if (cl <= 1) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
-						if (cl == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-					} while (cl == pcl + 1);
-					if (ulen <= tlen) {		/* Store the length and top of the fragment */
-						*tbl++ = ncl; *tbl++ = tcl;
-					}
-				} while (cl < fp->fs->n_fatent);	/* Repeat until end of chain */
-			}
-			*fp->cltbl = ulen;	/* Number of items used */
-			if (ulen <= tlen)
-				*tbl = 0;		/* Terminate table */
-			else
-				res = FR_NOT_ENOUGH_CORE;	/* Given table size is smaller than required */
-
-		} else {						/* Fast seek */
-			if (ofs > fp->fsize)		/* Clip offset at the file size */
-				ofs = fp->fsize;
-			fp->fptr = ofs;				/* Set file pointer */
-			if (ofs) {
-				fp->clust = clmt_clust(fp, ofs - 1);
-				dsc = clust2sect(fp->fs, fp->clust);
-				if (!dsc) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
-				dsc += (ofs - 1) / SS(fp->fs) & (fp->fs->csize - 1);
-				if (fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs) && dsc != fp->dsect) {	/* Refill sector cache if needed */
-#if !_FS_TINY
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-					if (fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) {		/* Write-back dirty sector cache */
-						if (disk_write(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, fp->dsect, 1) != RES_OK)
-							ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-						fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY;
-					}
-#endif
-					if (disk_read(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, dsc, 1) != RES_OK)	/* Load current sector */
-						ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-#endif
-					fp->dsect = dsc;
-				}
-			}
-		}
-	} else
-#endif
-
-	/* Normal Seek */
-	{
-		DWORD clst, bcs, nsect, ifptr;
-
-		if (ofs > fp->fsize					/* In read-only mode, clip offset with the file size */
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-			 && !(fp->flag & FA_WRITE)
-#endif
-			) ofs = fp->fsize;
-
-		ifptr = fp->fptr;
-		fp->fptr = nsect = 0;
-		if (ofs) {
-			bcs = (DWORD)fp->fs->csize * SS(fp->fs);	/* Cluster size (byte) */
-			if (ifptr > 0 &&
-				(ofs - 1) / bcs >= (ifptr - 1) / bcs) {	/* When seek to same or following cluster, */
-				fp->fptr = (ifptr - 1) & ~(bcs - 1);	/* start from the current cluster */
-				ofs -= fp->fptr;
-				clst = fp->clust;
-			} else {									/* When seek to back cluster, */
-				clst = fp->sclust;						/* start from the first cluster */
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-				if (clst == 0) {						/* If no cluster chain, create a new chain */
-					clst = create_chain(fp->fs, 0);
-					if (clst == 1) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
-					if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-					fp->sclust = clst;
-				}
-#endif
-				fp->clust = clst;
-			}
-			if (clst != 0) {
-				while (ofs > bcs) {						/* Cluster following loop */
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-					if (fp->flag & FA_WRITE) {			/* Check if in write mode or not */
-						clst = create_chain(fp->fs, clst);	/* Force stretch if in write mode */
-						if (clst == 0) {				/* When disk gets full, clip file size */
-							ofs = bcs; break;
-						}
-					} else
-#endif
-						clst = get_fat(fp->fs, clst);	/* Follow cluster chain if not in write mode */
-					if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-					if (clst <= 1 || clst >= fp->fs->n_fatent) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
-					fp->clust = clst;
-					fp->fptr += bcs;
-					ofs -= bcs;
-				}
-				fp->fptr += ofs;
-				if (ofs % SS(fp->fs)) {
-					nsect = clust2sect(fp->fs, clst);	/* Current sector */
-					if (!nsect) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
-					nsect += ofs / SS(fp->fs);
-				}
-			}
-		}
-		if (fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs) && nsect != fp->dsect) {	/* Fill sector cache if needed */
-#if !_FS_TINY
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-			if (fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) {			/* Write-back dirty sector cache */
-				if (disk_write(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, fp->dsect, 1) != RES_OK)
-					ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-				fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY;
-			}
-#endif
-			if (disk_read(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, nsect, 1) != RES_OK)	/* Fill sector cache */
-				ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-#endif
-			fp->dsect = nsect;
-		}
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-		if (fp->fptr > fp->fsize) {			/* Set file change flag if the file size is extended */
-			fp->fsize = fp->fptr;
-			fp->flag |= FA__WRITTEN;
-		}
-#endif
-	}
-
-	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
-}
-
-
-
-#if _FS_MINIMIZE <= 1
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Create a Directory Object                                             */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT f_opendir (
-	DIR *dj,			/* Pointer to directory object to create */
-	const TCHAR *path	/* Pointer to the directory path */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	FATFS *fs;
-	DEF_NAMEBUF;
-
-
-	if (!dj) return FR_INVALID_OBJECT;
-
-	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj->fs, 0);
-	fs = dj->fs;
-	if (res == FR_OK) {
-		INIT_BUF(*dj);
-		res = follow_path(dj, path);			/* Follow the path to the directory */
-		FREE_BUF();
-		if (res == FR_OK) {						/* Follow completed */
-			if (dj->dir) {						/* It is not the root dir */
-				if (dj->dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR) {	/* The object is a directory */
-					dj->sclust = ld_clust(fs, dj->dir);
-				} else {						/* The object is not a directory */
-					res = FR_NO_PATH;
-				}
-			}
-			if (res == FR_OK) {
-				dj->id = fs->id;
-				res = dir_sdi(dj, 0);			/* Rewind dir */
-			}
-		}
-		if (res == FR_NO_FILE) res = FR_NO_PATH;
-		if (res != FR_OK) dj->fs = 0;			/* Invalidate the dir object if function failed */
-	} else {
-		dj->fs = 0;
-	}
-
-	LEAVE_FF(fs, res);
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Read Directory Entry in Sequence                                      */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT f_readdir (
-	DIR *dj,			/* Pointer to the open directory object */
-	FILINFO *fno		/* Pointer to file information to return */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	DEF_NAMEBUF;
-
-
-	res = validate(dj);						/* Check validity of the object */
-	if (res == FR_OK) {
-		if (!fno) {
-			res = dir_sdi(dj, 0);			/* Rewind the directory object */
-		} else {
-			INIT_BUF(*dj);
-			res = dir_read(dj);				/* Read an directory item */
-			if (res == FR_NO_FILE) {		/* Reached end of dir */
-				dj->sect = 0;
-				res = FR_OK;
-			}
-			if (res == FR_OK) {				/* A valid entry is found */
-				get_fileinfo(dj, fno);		/* Get the object information */
-				res = dir_next(dj, 0);		/* Increment index for next */
-				if (res == FR_NO_FILE) {
-					dj->sect = 0;
-					res = FR_OK;
-				}
-			}
-			FREE_BUF();
-		}
-	}
-
-	LEAVE_FF(dj->fs, res);
-}
-
-
-
-#if _FS_MINIMIZE == 0
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Get File Status                                                       */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT f_stat (
-	const TCHAR *path,	/* Pointer to the file path */
-	FILINFO *fno		/* Pointer to file information to return */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	DIR dj;
-	DEF_NAMEBUF;
-
-
-	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 0);
-	if (res == FR_OK) {
-		INIT_BUF(dj);
-		res = follow_path(&dj, path);	/* Follow the file path */
-		if (res == FR_OK) {				/* Follow completed */
-			if (dj.dir)		/* Found an object */
-				get_fileinfo(&dj, fno);
-			else			/* It is root dir */
-				res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
-		}
-		FREE_BUF();
-	}
-
-	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
-}
-
-
-
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Get Number of Free Clusters                                           */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT f_getfree (
-	const TCHAR *path,	/* Pointer to the logical drive number (root dir) */
-	DWORD *nclst,		/* Pointer to the variable to return number of free clusters */
-	FATFS **fatfs		/* Pointer to pointer to corresponding file system object to return */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	FATFS *fs;
-	DWORD n, clst, sect, stat;
-	UINT i;
-	BYTE fat, *p;
-
-
-	/* Get drive number */
-	res = chk_mounted(&path, fatfs, 0);
-	fs = *fatfs;
-	if (res == FR_OK) {
-		/* If free_clust is valid, return it without full cluster scan */
-		if (fs->free_clust <= fs->n_fatent - 2) {
-			*nclst = fs->free_clust;
-		} else {
-			/* Get number of free clusters */
-			fat = fs->fs_type;
-			n = 0;
-			if (fat == FS_FAT12) {
-				clst = 2;
-				do {
-					stat = get_fat(fs, clst);
-					if (stat == 0xFFFFFFFF) { res = FR_DISK_ERR; break; }
-					if (stat == 1) { res = FR_INT_ERR; break; }
-					if (stat == 0) n++;
-				} while (++clst < fs->n_fatent);
-			} else {
-				clst = fs->n_fatent;
-				sect = fs->fatbase;
-				i = 0; p = 0;
-				do {
-					if (!i) {
-						res = move_window(fs, sect++);
-						if (res != FR_OK) break;
-						p = fs->win;
-						i = SS(fs);
-					}
-					if (fat == FS_FAT16) {
-						if (LD_WORD(p) == 0) n++;
-						p += 2; i -= 2;
-					} else {
-						if ((LD_DWORD(p) & 0x0FFFFFFF) == 0) n++;
-						p += 4; i -= 4;
-					}
-				} while (--clst);
-			}
-			fs->free_clust = n;
-			if (fat == FS_FAT32) fs->fsi_flag = 1;
-			*nclst = n;
-		}
-	}
-	LEAVE_FF(fs, res);
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Truncate File                                                         */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT f_truncate (
-	FIL *fp		/* Pointer to the file object */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	DWORD ncl;
-
-
-	if (!fp) return FR_INVALID_OBJECT;
-
-	res = validate(fp);						/* Check validity of the object */
-	if (res == FR_OK) {
-		if (fp->flag & FA__ERROR) {			/* Check abort flag */
-			res = FR_INT_ERR;
-		} else {
-			if (!(fp->flag & FA_WRITE))		/* Check access mode */
-				res = FR_DENIED;
-		}
-	}
-	if (res == FR_OK) {
-		if (fp->fsize > fp->fptr) {
-			fp->fsize = fp->fptr;	/* Set file size to current R/W point */
-			fp->flag |= FA__WRITTEN;
-			if (fp->fptr == 0) {	/* When set file size to zero, remove entire cluster chain */
-				res = remove_chain(fp->fs, fp->sclust);
-				fp->sclust = 0;
-			} else {				/* When truncate a part of the file, remove remaining clusters */
-				ncl = get_fat(fp->fs, fp->clust);
-				res = FR_OK;
-				if (ncl == 0xFFFFFFFF) res = FR_DISK_ERR;
-				if (ncl == 1) res = FR_INT_ERR;
-				if (res == FR_OK && ncl < fp->fs->n_fatent) {
-					res = put_fat(fp->fs, fp->clust, 0x0FFFFFFF);
-					if (res == FR_OK) res = remove_chain(fp->fs, ncl);
-				}
-			}
-		}
-		if (res != FR_OK) fp->flag |= FA__ERROR;
-	}
-
-	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Delete a File or Directory                                            */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT f_unlink (
-	const TCHAR *path		/* Pointer to the file or directory path */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	DIR dj, sdj;
-	BYTE *dir;
-	DWORD dclst;
-	DEF_NAMEBUF;
-
-
-	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 1);
-	if (res == FR_OK) {
-		INIT_BUF(dj);
-		res = follow_path(&dj, path);		/* Follow the file path */
-		if (_FS_RPATH && res == FR_OK && (dj.fn[NS] & NS_DOT))
-			res = FR_INVALID_NAME;			/* Cannot remove dot entry */
-#if _FS_LOCK
-		if (res == FR_OK) res = chk_lock(&dj, 2);	/* Cannot remove open file */
-#endif
-		if (res == FR_OK) {					/* The object is accessible */
-			dir = dj.dir;
-			if (!dir) {
-				res = FR_INVALID_NAME;		/* Cannot remove the start directory */
-			} else {
-				if (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_RDO)
-					res = FR_DENIED;		/* Cannot remove R/O object */
-			}
-			dclst = ld_clust(dj.fs, dir);
-			if (res == FR_OK && (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR)) {	/* Is it a sub-dir? */
-				if (dclst < 2) {
-					res = FR_INT_ERR;
-				} else {
-					mem_cpy(&sdj, &dj, sizeof (DIR));	/* Check if the sub-dir is empty or not */
-					sdj.sclust = dclst;
-					res = dir_sdi(&sdj, 2);		/* Exclude dot entries */
-					if (res == FR_OK) {
-						res = dir_read(&sdj);
-						if (res == FR_OK		/* Not empty dir */
-#if _FS_RPATH
-						|| dclst == dj.fs->cdir	/* Current dir */
-#endif
-						) res = FR_DENIED;
-						if (res == FR_NO_FILE) res = FR_OK;	/* Empty */
-					}
-				}
-			}
-			if (res == FR_OK) {
-				res = dir_remove(&dj);		/* Remove the directory entry */
-				if (res == FR_OK) {
-					if (dclst)				/* Remove the cluster chain if exist */
-						res = remove_chain(dj.fs, dclst);
-					if (res == FR_OK) res = sync(dj.fs);
-				}
-			}
-		}
-		FREE_BUF();
-	}
-	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Create a Directory                                                    */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT f_mkdir (
-	const TCHAR *path		/* Pointer to the directory path */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	DIR dj;
-	BYTE *dir, n;
-	DWORD dsc, dcl, pcl, tim = get_fattime();
-	DEF_NAMEBUF;
-
-
-	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 1);
-	if (res == FR_OK) {
-		INIT_BUF(dj);
-		res = follow_path(&dj, path);			/* Follow the file path */
-		if (res == FR_OK) res = FR_EXIST;		/* Any object with same name is already existing */
-		if (_FS_RPATH && res == FR_NO_FILE && (dj.fn[NS] & NS_DOT))
-			res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
-		if (res == FR_NO_FILE) {				/* Can create a new directory */
-			dcl = create_chain(dj.fs, 0);		/* Allocate a cluster for the new directory table */
-			res = FR_OK;
-			if (dcl == 0) res = FR_DENIED;		/* No space to allocate a new cluster */
-			if (dcl == 1) res = FR_INT_ERR;
-			if (dcl == 0xFFFFFFFF) res = FR_DISK_ERR;
-			if (res == FR_OK)					/* Flush FAT */
-				res = move_window(dj.fs, 0);
-			if (res == FR_OK) {					/* Initialize the new directory table */
-				dsc = clust2sect(dj.fs, dcl);
-				dir = dj.fs->win;
-				mem_set(dir, 0, SS(dj.fs));
-				mem_set(dir+DIR_Name, ' ', 8+3);	/* Create "." entry */
-				dir[DIR_Name] = '.';
-				dir[DIR_Attr] = AM_DIR;
-				ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime, tim);
-				st_clust(dir, dcl);
-				mem_cpy(dir+SZ_DIR, dir, SZ_DIR); 	/* Create ".." entry */
-				dir[33] = '.'; pcl = dj.sclust;
-				if (dj.fs->fs_type == FS_FAT32 && pcl == dj.fs->dirbase)
-					pcl = 0;
-				st_clust(dir+SZ_DIR, pcl);
-				for (n = dj.fs->csize; n; n--) {	/* Write dot entries and clear following sectors */
-					dj.fs->winsect = dsc++;
-					dj.fs->wflag = 1;
-					res = move_window(dj.fs, 0);
-					if (res != FR_OK) break;
-					mem_set(dir, 0, SS(dj.fs));
-				}
-			}
-			if (res == FR_OK) res = dir_register(&dj);	/* Register the object to the directory */
-			if (res != FR_OK) {
-				remove_chain(dj.fs, dcl);			/* Could not register, remove cluster chain */
-			} else {
-				dir = dj.dir;
-				dir[DIR_Attr] = AM_DIR;				/* Attribute */
-				ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime, tim);		/* Created time */
-				st_clust(dir, dcl);					/* Table start cluster */
-				dj.fs->wflag = 1;
-				res = sync(dj.fs);
-			}
-		}
-		FREE_BUF();
-	}
-
-	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Change Attribute                                                      */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT f_chmod (
-	const TCHAR *path,	/* Pointer to the file path */
-	BYTE value,			/* Attribute bits */
-	BYTE mask			/* Attribute mask to change */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	DIR dj;
-	BYTE *dir;
-	DEF_NAMEBUF;
-
-
-	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 1);
-	if (res == FR_OK) {
-		INIT_BUF(dj);
-		res = follow_path(&dj, path);		/* Follow the file path */
-		FREE_BUF();
-		if (_FS_RPATH && res == FR_OK && (dj.fn[NS] & NS_DOT))
-			res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
-		if (res == FR_OK) {
-			dir = dj.dir;
-			if (!dir) {						/* Is it a root directory? */
-				res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
-			} else {						/* File or sub directory */
-				mask &= AM_RDO|AM_HID|AM_SYS|AM_ARC;	/* Valid attribute mask */
-				dir[DIR_Attr] = (value & mask) | (dir[DIR_Attr] & (BYTE)~mask);	/* Apply attribute change */
-				dj.fs->wflag = 1;
-				res = sync(dj.fs);
-			}
-		}
-	}
-
-	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Change Timestamp                                                      */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT f_utime (
-	const TCHAR *path,	/* Pointer to the file/directory name */
-	const FILINFO *fno	/* Pointer to the time stamp to be set */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	DIR dj;
-	BYTE *dir;
-	DEF_NAMEBUF;
-
-
-	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 1);
-	if (res == FR_OK) {
-		INIT_BUF(dj);
-		res = follow_path(&dj, path);	/* Follow the file path */
-		FREE_BUF();
-		if (_FS_RPATH && res == FR_OK && (dj.fn[NS] & NS_DOT))
-			res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
-		if (res == FR_OK) {
-			dir = dj.dir;
-			if (!dir) {					/* Root directory */
-				res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
-			} else {					/* File or sub-directory */
-				ST_WORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime, fno->ftime);
-				ST_WORD(dir+DIR_WrtDate, fno->fdate);
-				dj.fs->wflag = 1;
-				res = sync(dj.fs);
-			}
-		}
-	}
-
-	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Rename File/Directory                                                 */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT f_rename (
-	const TCHAR *path_old,	/* Pointer to the old name */
-	const TCHAR *path_new	/* Pointer to the new name */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	DIR djo, djn;
-	BYTE buf[21], *dir;
-	DWORD dw;
-	DEF_NAMEBUF;
-
-
-	res = chk_mounted(&path_old, &djo.fs, 1);
-	if (res == FR_OK) {
-		djn.fs = djo.fs;
-		INIT_BUF(djo);
-		res = follow_path(&djo, path_old);		/* Check old object */
-		if (_FS_RPATH && res == FR_OK && (djo.fn[NS] & NS_DOT))
-			res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
-#if _FS_LOCK
-		if (res == FR_OK) res = chk_lock(&djo, 2);
-#endif
-		if (res == FR_OK) {						/* Old object is found */
-			if (!djo.dir) {						/* Is root dir? */
-				res = FR_NO_FILE;
-			} else {
-				mem_cpy(buf, djo.dir+DIR_Attr, 21);		/* Save the object information except for name */
-				mem_cpy(&djn, &djo, sizeof (DIR));		/* Check new object */
-				res = follow_path(&djn, path_new);
-				if (res == FR_OK) res = FR_EXIST;		/* The new object name is already existing */
-				if (res == FR_NO_FILE) { 				/* Is it a valid path and no name collision? */
-/* Start critical section that an interruption or error can cause cross-link */
-					res = dir_register(&djn);			/* Register the new entry */
-					if (res == FR_OK) {
-						dir = djn.dir;					/* Copy object information except for name */
-						mem_cpy(dir+13, buf+2, 19);
-						dir[DIR_Attr] = buf[0] | AM_ARC;
-						djo.fs->wflag = 1;
-						if (djo.sclust != djn.sclust && (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR)) {		/* Update .. entry in the directory if needed */
-							dw = clust2sect(djo.fs, ld_clust(djo.fs, dir));
-							if (!dw) {
-								res = FR_INT_ERR;
-							} else {
-								res = move_window(djo.fs, dw);
-								dir = djo.fs->win+SZ_DIR;	/* .. entry */
-								if (res == FR_OK && dir[1] == '.') {
-									dw = (djo.fs->fs_type == FS_FAT32 && djn.sclust == djo.fs->dirbase) ? 0 : djn.sclust;
-									st_clust(dir, dw);
-									djo.fs->wflag = 1;
-								}
-							}
-						}
-						if (res == FR_OK) {
-							res = dir_remove(&djo);		/* Remove old entry */
-							if (res == FR_OK)
-								res = sync(djo.fs);
-						}
-					}
-/* End critical section */
-				}
-			}
-		}
-		FREE_BUF();
-	}
-	LEAVE_FF(djo.fs, res);
-}
-
-#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
-#endif /* _FS_MINIMIZE == 0 */
-#endif /* _FS_MINIMIZE <= 1 */
-#endif /* _FS_MINIMIZE <= 2 */
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Forward data to the stream directly (available on only tiny cfg)      */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#if _USE_FORWARD && _FS_TINY
-
-FRESULT f_forward (
-	FIL *fp, 						/* Pointer to the file object */
-	UINT (*func)(const BYTE*,UINT),	/* Pointer to the streaming function */
-	UINT btr,						/* Number of bytes to forward */
-	UINT *bf						/* Pointer to number of bytes forwarded */
-)
-{
-	FRESULT res;
-	DWORD remain, clst, sect;
-	UINT rcnt;
-	BYTE csect;
-
-
-	*bf = 0;	/* Clear transfer byte counter */
-
-	if (!fp) return FR_INVALID_OBJECT;
-
-	res = validate(fp);								/* Check validity of the object */
-	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
-	if (fp->flag & FA__ERROR)						/* Check error flag */
-		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
-	if (!(fp->flag & FA_READ))						/* Check access mode */
-		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_DENIED);
-
-	remain = fp->fsize - fp->fptr;
-	if (btr > remain) btr = (UINT)remain;			/* Truncate btr by remaining bytes */
-
-	for ( ;  btr && (*func)(0, 0);					/* Repeat until all data transferred or stream becomes busy */
-		fp->fptr += rcnt, *bf += rcnt, btr -= rcnt) {
-		csect = (BYTE)(fp->fptr / SS(fp->fs) & (fp->fs->csize - 1));	/* Sector offset in the cluster */
-		if ((fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)) == 0) {			/* On the sector boundary? */
-			if (!csect) {							/* On the cluster boundary? */
-				clst = (fp->fptr == 0) ?			/* On the top of the file? */
-					fp->sclust : get_fat(fp->fs, fp->clust);
-				if (clst <= 1) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
-				if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-				fp->clust = clst;					/* Update current cluster */
-			}
-		}
-		sect = clust2sect(fp->fs, fp->clust);		/* Get current data sector */
-		if (!sect) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
-		sect += csect;
-		if (move_window(fp->fs, sect))				/* Move sector window */
-			ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
-		fp->dsect = sect;
-		rcnt = SS(fp->fs) - (WORD)(fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs));	/* Forward data from sector window */
-		if (rcnt > btr) rcnt = btr;
-		rcnt = (*func)(&fp->fs->win[(WORD)fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)], rcnt);
-		if (!rcnt) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
-	}
-
-	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_OK);
-}
-#endif /* _USE_FORWARD */
-
-
-
-#if _USE_MKFS && !_FS_READONLY
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Create File System on the Drive                                       */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#define N_ROOTDIR	512		/* Number of root dir entries for FAT12/16 */
-#define N_FATS		1		/* Number of FAT copies (1 or 2) */
-
-
-FRESULT f_mkfs (
-	BYTE drv,		/* Logical drive number */
-	BYTE sfd,		/* Partitioning rule 0:FDISK, 1:SFD */
-	UINT au			/* Allocation unit size [bytes] */
-)
-{
-	static const WORD vst[] = { 1024,   512,  256,  128,   64,    32,   16,    8,    4,    2,   0};
-	static const WORD cst[] = {32768, 16384, 8192, 4096, 2048, 16384, 8192, 4096, 2048, 1024, 512};
-	BYTE fmt, md, sys, *tbl, pdrv, part;
-	DWORD n_clst, vs, n, wsect;
-	UINT i;
-	DWORD b_vol, b_fat, b_dir, b_data;	/* LBA */
-	DWORD n_vol, n_rsv, n_fat, n_dir;	/* Size */
-	FATFS *fs;
-	DSTATUS stat;
-
-
-	/* Check mounted drive and clear work area */
-	if (drv >= _VOLUMES) return FR_INVALID_DRIVE;
-	if (sfd > 1) return FR_INVALID_PARAMETER;
-	if (au & (au - 1)) return FR_INVALID_PARAMETER;
-	fs = FatFs[drv];
-	if (!fs) return FR_NOT_ENABLED;
-	fs->fs_type = 0;
-	pdrv = LD2PD(drv);	/* Physical drive */
-	part = LD2PT(drv);	/* Partition (0:auto detect, 1-4:get from partition table)*/
-
-	/* Get disk statics */
-	stat = disk_initialize(pdrv);
-	if (stat & STA_NOINIT) return FR_NOT_READY;
-	if (stat & STA_PROTECT) return FR_WRITE_PROTECTED;
-#if _MAX_SS != 512					/* Get disk sector size */
-	if (disk_ioctl(pdrv, GET_SECTOR_SIZE, &SS(fs)) != RES_OK || SS(fs) > _MAX_SS)
-		return FR_DISK_ERR;
-#endif
-	if (_MULTI_PARTITION && part) {
-		/* Get partition information from partition table in the MBR */
-		if (disk_read(pdrv, fs->win, 0, 1) != RES_OK) return FR_DISK_ERR;
-		if (LD_WORD(fs->win+BS_55AA) != 0xAA55) return FR_MKFS_ABORTED;
-		tbl = &fs->win[MBR_Table + (part - 1) * SZ_PTE];
-		if (!tbl[4]) return FR_MKFS_ABORTED;	/* No partition? */
-		b_vol = LD_DWORD(tbl+8);	/* Volume start sector */
-		n_vol = LD_DWORD(tbl+12);	/* Volume size */
-	} else {
-		/* Create a partition in this function */
-		if (disk_ioctl(pdrv, GET_SECTOR_COUNT, &n_vol) != RES_OK || n_vol < 128)
-			return FR_DISK_ERR;
-		b_vol = (sfd) ? 0 : 63;		/* Volume start sector */
-		n_vol -= b_vol;				/* Volume size */
-	}
-
-	if (!au) {				/* AU auto selection */
-		vs = n_vol / (2000 / (SS(fs) / 512));
-		for (i = 0; vs < vst[i]; i++) ;
-		au = cst[i];
-	}
-	au /= SS(fs);		/* Number of sectors per cluster */
-	if (au == 0) au = 1;
-	if (au > 128) au = 128;
-
-	/* Pre-compute number of clusters and FAT sub-type */
-	n_clst = n_vol / au;
-	fmt = FS_FAT12;
-	if (n_clst >= MIN_FAT16) fmt = FS_FAT16;
-	if (n_clst >= MIN_FAT32) fmt = FS_FAT32;
-
-	/* Determine offset and size of FAT structure */
-	if (fmt == FS_FAT32) {
-		n_fat = ((n_clst * 4) + 8 + SS(fs) - 1) / SS(fs);
-		n_rsv = 32;
-		n_dir = 0;
-	} else {
-		n_fat = (fmt == FS_FAT12) ? (n_clst * 3 + 1) / 2 + 3 : (n_clst * 2) + 4;
-		n_fat = (n_fat + SS(fs) - 1) / SS(fs);
-		n_rsv = 1;
-		n_dir = (DWORD)N_ROOTDIR * SZ_DIR / SS(fs);
-	}
-	b_fat = b_vol + n_rsv;				/* FAT area start sector */
-	b_dir = b_fat + n_fat * N_FATS;		/* Directory area start sector */
-	b_data = b_dir + n_dir;				/* Data area start sector */
-	if (n_vol < b_data + au - b_vol) return FR_MKFS_ABORTED;	/* Too small volume */
-
-	/* Align data start sector to erase block boundary (for flash memory media) */
-	if (disk_ioctl(pdrv, GET_BLOCK_SIZE, &n) != RES_OK || !n || n > 32768) n = 1;
-	n = (b_data + n - 1) & ~(n - 1);	/* Next nearest erase block from current data start */
-	n = (n - b_data) / N_FATS;
-	if (fmt == FS_FAT32) {		/* FAT32: Move FAT offset */
-		n_rsv += n;
-		b_fat += n;
-	} else {					/* FAT12/16: Expand FAT size */
-		n_fat += n;
-	}
-
-	/* Determine number of clusters and final check of validity of the FAT sub-type */
-	n_clst = (n_vol - n_rsv - n_fat * N_FATS - n_dir) / au;
-	if (   (fmt == FS_FAT16 && n_clst < MIN_FAT16)
-		|| (fmt == FS_FAT32 && n_clst < MIN_FAT32))
-		return FR_MKFS_ABORTED;
-
-	switch (fmt) {	/* Determine system ID for partition table */
-	case FS_FAT12:	sys = 0x01; break;
-	case FS_FAT16:	sys = (n_vol < 0x10000) ? 0x04 : 0x06; break;
-	default: 		sys = 0x0C;
-	}
-
-	if (_MULTI_PARTITION && part) {
-		/* Update system ID in the partition table */
-		tbl = &fs->win[MBR_Table + (part - 1) * SZ_PTE];
-		tbl[4] = sys;
-		if (disk_write(pdrv, fs->win, 0, 1) != RES_OK) return FR_DISK_ERR;
-		md = 0xF8;
-	} else {
-		if (sfd) {	/* No partition table (SFD) */
-			md = 0xF0;
-		} else {	/* Create partition table (FDISK) */
-			mem_set(fs->win, 0, SS(fs));
-			tbl = fs->win+MBR_Table;	/* Create partition table for single partition in the drive */
-			tbl[1] = 1;						/* Partition start head */
-			tbl[2] = 1;						/* Partition start sector */
-			tbl[3] = 0;						/* Partition start cylinder */
-			tbl[4] = sys;					/* System type */
-			tbl[5] = 254;					/* Partition end head */
-			n = (b_vol + n_vol) / 63 / 255;
-			tbl[6] = (BYTE)((n >> 2) | 63);	/* Partition end sector */
-			tbl[7] = (BYTE)n;				/* End cylinder */
-			ST_DWORD(tbl+8, 63);			/* Partition start in LBA */
-			ST_DWORD(tbl+12, n_vol);		/* Partition size in LBA */
-			ST_WORD(fs->win+BS_55AA, 0xAA55);	/* MBR signature */
-			if (disk_write(pdrv, fs->win, 0, 1) != RES_OK)	/* Write it to the MBR sector */
-				return FR_DISK_ERR;
-			md = 0xF8;
-		}
-	}
-
-	/* Create BPB in the VBR */
-	tbl = fs->win;							/* Clear sector */
-	mem_set(tbl, 0, SS(fs));
-	mem_cpy(tbl, "\xEB\xFE\x90" "MSDOS5.0", 11);/* Boot jump code, OEM name */
-	i = SS(fs);								/* Sector size */
-	ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_BytsPerSec, i);
-	tbl[BPB_SecPerClus] = (BYTE)au;			/* Sectors per cluster */
-	ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_RsvdSecCnt, n_rsv);		/* Reserved sectors */
-	tbl[BPB_NumFATs] = N_FATS;				/* Number of FATs */
-	i = (fmt == FS_FAT32) ? 0 : N_ROOTDIR;	/* Number of rootdir entries */
-	ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_RootEntCnt, i);
-	if (n_vol < 0x10000) {					/* Number of total sectors */
-		ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_TotSec16, n_vol);
-	} else {
-		ST_DWORD(tbl+BPB_TotSec32, n_vol);
-	}
-	tbl[BPB_Media] = md;					/* Media descriptor */
-	ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_SecPerTrk, 63);			/* Number of sectors per track */
-	ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_NumHeads, 255);			/* Number of heads */
-	ST_DWORD(tbl+BPB_HiddSec, b_vol);		/* Hidden sectors */
-	n = get_fattime();						/* Use current time as VSN */
-	if (fmt == FS_FAT32) {
-		ST_DWORD(tbl+BS_VolID32, n);		/* VSN */
-		ST_DWORD(tbl+BPB_FATSz32, n_fat);	/* Number of sectors per FAT */
-		ST_DWORD(tbl+BPB_RootClus, 2);		/* Root directory start cluster (2) */
-		ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_FSInfo, 1);			/* FSInfo record offset (VBR+1) */
-		ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_BkBootSec, 6);		/* Backup boot record offset (VBR+6) */
-		tbl[BS_DrvNum32] = 0x80;			/* Drive number */
-		tbl[BS_BootSig32] = 0x29;			/* Extended boot signature */
-		mem_cpy(tbl+BS_VolLab32, "NO NAME    " "FAT32   ", 19);	/* Volume label, FAT signature */
-	} else {
-		ST_DWORD(tbl+BS_VolID, n);			/* VSN */
-		ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_FATSz16, n_fat);	/* Number of sectors per FAT */
-		tbl[BS_DrvNum] = 0x80;				/* Drive number */
-		tbl[BS_BootSig] = 0x29;				/* Extended boot signature */
-		mem_cpy(tbl+BS_VolLab, "NO NAME    " "FAT     ", 19);	/* Volume label, FAT signature */
-	}
-	ST_WORD(tbl+BS_55AA, 0xAA55);			/* Signature (Offset is fixed here regardless of sector size) */
-	if (disk_write(pdrv, tbl, b_vol, 1) != RES_OK)	/* Write it to the VBR sector */
-		return FR_DISK_ERR;
-	if (fmt == FS_FAT32)							/* Write backup VBR if needed (VBR+6) */
-		disk_write(pdrv, tbl, b_vol + 6, 1);
-
-	/* Initialize FAT area */
-	wsect = b_fat;
-	for (i = 0; i < N_FATS; i++) {		/* Initialize each FAT copy */
-		mem_set(tbl, 0, SS(fs));			/* 1st sector of the FAT  */
-		n = md;								/* Media descriptor byte */
-		if (fmt != FS_FAT32) {
-			n |= (fmt == FS_FAT12) ? 0x00FFFF00 : 0xFFFFFF00;
-			ST_DWORD(tbl+0, n);				/* Reserve cluster #0-1 (FAT12/16) */
-		} else {
-			n |= 0xFFFFFF00;
-			ST_DWORD(tbl+0, n);				/* Reserve cluster #0-1 (FAT32) */
-			ST_DWORD(tbl+4, 0xFFFFFFFF);
-			ST_DWORD(tbl+8, 0x0FFFFFFF);	/* Reserve cluster #2 for root dir */
-		}
-		if (disk_write(pdrv, tbl, wsect++, 1) != RES_OK)
-			return FR_DISK_ERR;
-		mem_set(tbl, 0, SS(fs));			/* Fill following FAT entries with zero */
-		for (n = 1; n < n_fat; n++) {		/* This loop may take a time on FAT32 volume due to many single sector writes */
-			if (disk_write(pdrv, tbl, wsect++, 1) != RES_OK)
-				return FR_DISK_ERR;
-		}
-	}
-
-	/* Initialize root directory */
-	i = (fmt == FS_FAT32) ? au : n_dir;
-	do {
-		if (disk_write(pdrv, tbl, wsect++, 1) != RES_OK)
-			return FR_DISK_ERR;
-	} while (--i);
-
-#if _USE_ERASE	/* Erase data area if needed */
-	{
-		DWORD eb[2];
-
-		eb[0] = wsect; eb[1] = wsect + (n_clst - ((fmt == FS_FAT32) ? 1 : 0)) * au - 1;
-		disk_ioctl(pdrv, CTRL_ERASE_SECTOR, eb);
-	}
-#endif
-
-	/* Create FSInfo if needed */
-	if (fmt == FS_FAT32) {
-		ST_DWORD(tbl+FSI_LeadSig, 0x41615252);
-		ST_DWORD(tbl+FSI_StrucSig, 0x61417272);
-		ST_DWORD(tbl+FSI_Free_Count, n_clst - 1);	/* Number of free clusters */
-		ST_DWORD(tbl+FSI_Nxt_Free, 2);				/* Last allocated cluster# */
-		ST_WORD(tbl+BS_55AA, 0xAA55);
-		disk_write(pdrv, tbl, b_vol + 1, 1);	/* Write original (VBR+1) */
-		disk_write(pdrv, tbl, b_vol + 7, 1);	/* Write backup (VBR+7) */
-	}
-
-	return (disk_ioctl(pdrv, CTRL_SYNC, 0) == RES_OK) ? FR_OK : FR_DISK_ERR;
-}
-
-
-#if _MULTI_PARTITION == 2
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Divide Physical Drive                                                 */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-FRESULT f_fdisk (
-	BYTE pdrv,			/* Physical drive number */
-	const DWORD szt[],	/* Pointer to the size table for each partitions */
-	void* work			/* Pointer to the working buffer */
-)
-{
-	UINT i, n, sz_cyl, tot_cyl, b_cyl, e_cyl, p_cyl;
-	BYTE s_hd, e_hd, *p, *buf = (BYTE*)work;
-	DSTATUS stat;
-	DWORD sz_disk, sz_part, s_part;
-
-
-	stat = disk_initialize(pdrv);
-	if (stat & STA_NOINIT) return FR_NOT_READY;
-	if (stat & STA_PROTECT) return FR_WRITE_PROTECTED;
-	if (disk_ioctl(pdrv, GET_SECTOR_COUNT, &sz_disk)) return FR_DISK_ERR;
-
-	/* Determine CHS in the table regardless of the drive geometry */
-	for (n = 16; n < 256 && sz_disk / n / 63 > 1024; n *= 2) ;
-	if (n == 256) n--;
-	e_hd = n - 1;
-	sz_cyl = 63 * n;
-	tot_cyl = sz_disk / sz_cyl;
-
-	/* Create partition table */
-	mem_set(buf, 0, _MAX_SS);
-	p = buf + MBR_Table; b_cyl = 0;
-	for (i = 0; i < 4; i++, p += SZ_PTE) {
-		p_cyl = (szt[i] <= 100) ? (DWORD)tot_cyl * szt[i] / 100 : szt[i] / sz_cyl;
-		if (!p_cyl) continue;
-		s_part = (DWORD)sz_cyl * b_cyl;
-		sz_part = (DWORD)sz_cyl * p_cyl;
-		if (i == 0) {	/* Exclude first track of cylinder 0 */
-			s_hd = 1;
-			s_part += 63; sz_part -= 63;
-		} else {
-			s_hd = 0;
-		}
-		e_cyl = b_cyl + p_cyl - 1;
-		if (e_cyl >= tot_cyl) return FR_INVALID_PARAMETER;
-
-		/* Set partition table */
-		p[1] = s_hd;						/* Start head */
-		p[2] = (BYTE)((b_cyl >> 2) + 1);	/* Start sector */
-		p[3] = (BYTE)b_cyl;					/* Start cylinder */
-		p[4] = 0x06;						/* System type (temporary setting) */
-		p[5] = e_hd;						/* End head */
-		p[6] = (BYTE)((e_cyl >> 2) + 63);	/* End sector */
-		p[7] = (BYTE)e_cyl;					/* End cylinder */
-		ST_DWORD(p + 8, s_part);			/* Start sector in LBA */
-		ST_DWORD(p + 12, sz_part);			/* Partition size */
-
-		/* Next partition */
-		b_cyl += p_cyl;
-	}
-	ST_WORD(p, 0xAA55);
-
-	/* Write it to the MBR */
-	return (disk_write(pdrv, buf, 0, 1) || disk_ioctl(pdrv, CTRL_SYNC, 0)) ? FR_DISK_ERR : FR_OK;
-}
-
-
-#endif /* _MULTI_PARTITION == 2 */
-#endif /* _USE_MKFS && !_FS_READONLY */
-
-
-
-
-#if _USE_STRFUNC
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Get a string from the file                                            */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-TCHAR* f_gets (
-	TCHAR* buff,	/* Pointer to the string buffer to read */
-	int len,		/* Size of string buffer (characters) */
-	FIL* fil		/* Pointer to the file object */
-)
-{
-	int n = 0;
-	TCHAR c, *p = buff;
-	BYTE s[2];
-	UINT rc;
-
-
-	while (n < len - 1) {			/* Read bytes until buffer gets filled */
-		f_read(fil, s, 1, &rc);
-		if (rc != 1) break;			/* Break on EOF or error */
-		c = s[0];
-#if _LFN_UNICODE					/* Read a character in UTF-8 encoding */
-		if (c >= 0x80) {
-			if (c < 0xC0) continue;	/* Skip stray trailer */
-			if (c < 0xE0) {			/* Two-byte sequence */
-				f_read(fil, s, 1, &rc);
-				if (rc != 1) break;
-				c = ((c & 0x1F) << 6) | (s[0] & 0x3F);
-				if (c < 0x80) c = '?';
-			} else {
-				if (c < 0xF0) {		/* Three-byte sequence */
-					f_read(fil, s, 2, &rc);
-					if (rc != 2) break;
-					c = (c << 12) | ((s[0] & 0x3F) << 6) | (s[1] & 0x3F);
-					if (c < 0x800) c = '?';
-				} else {			/* Reject four-byte sequence */
-					c = '?';
-				}
-			}
-		}
-#endif
-#if _USE_STRFUNC >= 2
-		if (c == '\r') continue;	/* Strip '\r' */
-#endif
-		*p++ = c;
-		n++;
-		if (c == '\n') break;		/* Break on EOL */
-	}
-	*p = 0;
-	return n ? buff : 0;			/* When no data read (eof or error), return with error. */
-}
-
-
-
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-#include <stdarg.h>
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Put a character to the file                                           */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-int f_putc (
-	TCHAR c,	/* A character to be output */
-	FIL* fil	/* Pointer to the file object */
-)
-{
-	UINT bw, btw;
-	BYTE s[3];
-
-
-#if _USE_STRFUNC >= 2
-	if (c == '\n') f_putc ('\r', fil);	/* LF -> CRLF conversion */
-#endif
-
-#if _LFN_UNICODE	/* Write the character in UTF-8 encoding */
-	if (c < 0x80) {			/* 7-bit */
-		s[0] = (BYTE)c;
-		btw = 1;
-	} else {
-		if (c < 0x800) {	/* 11-bit */
-			s[0] = (BYTE)(0xC0 | (c >> 6));
-			s[1] = (BYTE)(0x80 | (c & 0x3F));
-			btw = 2;
-		} else {			/* 16-bit */
-			s[0] = (BYTE)(0xE0 | (c >> 12));
-			s[1] = (BYTE)(0x80 | ((c >> 6) & 0x3F));
-			s[2] = (BYTE)(0x80 | (c & 0x3F));
-			btw = 3;
-		}
-	}
-#else				/* Write the character without conversion */
-	s[0] = (BYTE)c;
-	btw = 1;
-#endif
-	f_write(fil, s, btw, &bw);		/* Write the char to the file */
-	return (bw == btw) ? 1 : EOF;	/* Return the result */
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Put a string to the file                                              */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-int f_puts (
-	const TCHAR* str,	/* Pointer to the string to be output */
-	FIL* fil			/* Pointer to the file object */
-)
-{
-	int n;
-
-
-	for (n = 0; *str; str++, n++) {
-		if (f_putc(*str, fil) == EOF) return EOF;
-	}
-	return n;
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Put a formatted string to the file                                    */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-int f_printf (
-	FIL* fil,			/* Pointer to the file object */
-	const TCHAR* str,	/* Pointer to the format string */
-	...					/* Optional arguments... */
-)
-{
-	va_list arp;
-	BYTE f, r;
-	UINT i, j, w;
-	ULONG v;
-	TCHAR c, d, s[16], *p;
-	int res, chc, cc;
-
-
-	va_start(arp, str);
-
-	for (cc = res = 0; cc != EOF; res += cc) {
-		c = *str++;
-		if (c == 0) break;			/* End of string */
-		if (c != '%') {				/* Non escape character */
-			cc = f_putc(c, fil);
-			if (cc != EOF) cc = 1;
-			continue;
-		}
-		w = f = 0;
-		c = *str++;
-		if (c == '0') {				/* Flag: '0' padding */
-			f = 1; c = *str++;
-		} else {
-			if (c == '-') {			/* Flag: left justified */
-				f = 2; c = *str++;
-			}
-		}
-		while (IsDigit(c)) {		/* Precision */
-			w = w * 10 + c - '0';
-			c = *str++;
-		}
-		if (c == 'l' || c == 'L') {	/* Prefix: Size is long int */
-			f |= 4; c = *str++;
-		}
-		if (!c) break;
-		d = c;
-		if (IsLower(d)) d -= 0x20;
-		switch (d) {				/* Type is... */
-		case 'S' :					/* String */
-			p = va_arg(arp, TCHAR*);
-			for (j = 0; p[j]; j++) ;
-			chc = 0;
-			if (!(f & 2)) {
-				while (j++ < w) chc += (cc = f_putc(' ', fil));
-			}
-			chc += (cc = f_puts(p, fil));
-			while (j++ < w) chc += (cc = f_putc(' ', fil));
-			if (cc != EOF) cc = chc;
-			continue;
-		case 'C' :					/* Character */
-			cc = f_putc((TCHAR)va_arg(arp, int), fil); continue;
-		case 'B' :					/* Binary */
-			r = 2; break;
-		case 'O' :					/* Octal */
-			r = 8; break;
-		case 'D' :					/* Signed decimal */
-		case 'U' :					/* Unsigned decimal */
-			r = 10; break;
-		case 'X' :					/* Hexdecimal */
-			r = 16; break;
-		default:					/* Unknown type (pass-through) */
-			cc = f_putc(c, fil); continue;
-		}
-
-		/* Get an argument and put it in numeral */
-		v = (f & 4) ? (ULONG)va_arg(arp, long) : ((d == 'D') ? (ULONG)(long)va_arg(arp, int) : (ULONG)va_arg(arp, unsigned int));
-		if (d == 'D' && (v & 0x80000000)) {
-			v = 0 - v;
-			f |= 8;
-		}
-		i = 0;
-		do {
-			d = (TCHAR)(v % r); v /= r;
-			if (d > 9) d += (c == 'x') ? 0x27 : 0x07;
-			s[i++] = d + '0';
-		} while (v && i < sizeof s / sizeof s[0]);
-		if (f & 8) s[i++] = '-';
-		j = i; d = (f & 1) ? '0' : ' ';
-		res = 0;
-		while (!(f & 2) && j++ < w) res += (cc = f_putc(d, fil));
-		do res += (cc = f_putc(s[--i], fil)); while(i);
-		while (j++ < w) res += (cc = f_putc(' ', fil));
-		if (cc != EOF) cc = res;
-	}
-
-	va_end(arp);
-	return (cc == EOF) ? cc : res;
-}
-
-#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
-#endif /* _USE_STRFUNC */
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/ff.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/ff.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 627cbaabe..000000000
--- a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/ff.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,337 +0,0 @@
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
-/  FatFs - FAT file system module include file  R0.09a    (C)ChaN, 2012
-/----------------------------------------------------------------------------/
-/ FatFs module is a generic FAT file system module for small embedded systems.
-/ This is a free software that opened for education, research and commercial
-/ developments under license policy of following terms.
-/
-/  Copyright (C) 2012, ChaN, all right reserved.
-/
-/ * The FatFs module is a free software and there is NO WARRANTY.
-/ * No restriction on use. You can use, modify and redistribute it for
-/   personal, non-profit or commercial product UNDER YOUR RESPONSIBILITY.
-/ * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice.
-/
-/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-#ifndef _FATFS
-#define _FATFS	4004	/* Revision ID */
-
-#ifdef __cplusplus
-extern "C" {
-#endif
-
-#include "integer.h"	/* Basic integer types */
-#include "ffconf.h"		/* FatFs configuration options */
-
-#if _FATFS != _FFCONF
-#error Wrong configuration file (ffconf.h).
-#endif
-
-
-
-/* Definitions of volume management */
-
-#if _MULTI_PARTITION		/* Multiple partition configuration */
-typedef struct {
-	BYTE pd;	/* Physical drive number */
-	BYTE pt;	/* Partition: 0:Auto detect, 1-4:Forced partition) */
-} PARTITION;
-extern PARTITION VolToPart[];	/* Volume - Partition resolution table */
-#define LD2PD(vol) (VolToPart[vol].pd)	/* Get physical drive number */
-#define LD2PT(vol) (VolToPart[vol].pt)	/* Get partition index */
-
-#else							/* Single partition configuration */
-#define LD2PD(vol) (BYTE)(vol)	/* Each logical drive is bound to the same physical drive number */
-#define LD2PT(vol) 0			/* Always mounts the 1st partition or in SFD */
-
-#endif
-
-
-
-/* Type of path name strings on FatFs API */
-
-#if _LFN_UNICODE			/* Unicode string */
-#if !_USE_LFN
-#error _LFN_UNICODE must be 0 in non-LFN cfg.
-#endif
-#ifndef _INC_TCHAR
-typedef WCHAR TCHAR;
-#define _T(x) L ## x
-#define _TEXT(x) L ## x
-#endif
-
-#else						/* ANSI/OEM string */
-#ifndef _INC_TCHAR
-typedef char TCHAR;
-#define _T(x) x
-#define _TEXT(x) x
-#endif
-
-#endif
-
-
-
-/* File system object structure (FATFS) */
-
-typedef struct {
-	BYTE	fs_type;		/* FAT sub-type (0:Not mounted) */
-	BYTE	drv;			/* Physical drive number */
-	BYTE	csize;			/* Sectors per cluster (1,2,4...128) */
-	BYTE	n_fats;			/* Number of FAT copies (1,2) */
-	BYTE	wflag;			/* win[] dirty flag (1:must be written back) */
-	BYTE	fsi_flag;		/* fsinfo dirty flag (1:must be written back) */
-	WORD	id;				/* File system mount ID */
-	WORD	n_rootdir;		/* Number of root directory entries (FAT12/16) */
-#if _MAX_SS != 512
-	WORD	ssize;			/* Bytes per sector (512, 1024, 2048 or 4096) */
-#endif
-#if _FS_REENTRANT
-	_SYNC_t	sobj;			/* Identifier of sync object */
-#endif
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-	DWORD	last_clust;		/* Last allocated cluster */
-	DWORD	free_clust;		/* Number of free clusters */
-	DWORD	fsi_sector;		/* fsinfo sector (FAT32) */
-#endif
-#if _FS_RPATH
-	DWORD	cdir;			/* Current directory start cluster (0:root) */
-#endif
-	DWORD	n_fatent;		/* Number of FAT entries (= number of clusters + 2) */
-	DWORD	fsize;			/* Sectors per FAT */
-	DWORD	fatbase;		/* FAT start sector */
-	DWORD	dirbase;		/* Root directory start sector (FAT32:Cluster#) */
-	DWORD	database;		/* Data start sector */
-	DWORD	winsect;		/* Current sector appearing in the win[] */
-	BYTE	win[_MAX_SS];	/* Disk access window for Directory, FAT (and Data on tiny cfg) */
-} FATFS;
-
-
-
-/* File object structure (FIL) */
-
-typedef struct {
-	FATFS*	fs;				/* Pointer to the related file system object */
-	WORD	id;				/* File system mount ID of the related file system object */
-	BYTE	flag;			/* File status flags */
-	BYTE	pad1;
-	DWORD	fptr;			/* File read/write pointer (0ed on file open) */
-	DWORD	fsize;			/* File size */
-	DWORD	sclust;			/* File data start cluster (0:no data cluster, always 0 when fsize is 0) */
-	DWORD	clust;			/* Current cluster of fpter */
-	DWORD	dsect;			/* Current data sector of fpter */
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-	DWORD	dir_sect;		/* Sector containing the directory entry */
-	BYTE*	dir_ptr;		/* Pointer to the directory entry in the window */
-#endif
-#if _USE_FASTSEEK
-	DWORD*	cltbl;			/* Pointer to the cluster link map table (null on file open) */
-#endif
-#if _FS_LOCK
-	UINT	lockid;			/* File lock ID (index of file semaphore table Files[]) */
-#endif
-#if !_FS_TINY
-	BYTE	buf[_MAX_SS];	/* File data read/write buffer */
-#endif
-} FIL;
-
-
-
-/* Directory object structure (DIR) */
-
-typedef struct {
-	FATFS*	fs;				/* Pointer to the owner file system object */
-	WORD	id;				/* Owner file system mount ID */
-	WORD	index;			/* Current read/write index number */
-	DWORD	sclust;			/* Table start cluster (0:Root dir) */
-	DWORD	clust;			/* Current cluster */
-	DWORD	sect;			/* Current sector */
-	BYTE*	dir;			/* Pointer to the current SFN entry in the win[] */
-	BYTE*	fn;				/* Pointer to the SFN (in/out) {file[8],ext[3],status[1]} */
-#if _USE_LFN
-	WCHAR*	lfn;			/* Pointer to the LFN working buffer */
-	WORD	lfn_idx;		/* Last matched LFN index number (0xFFFF:No LFN) */
-#endif
-} DIR;
-
-
-
-/* File status structure (FILINFO) */
-
-typedef struct {
-	DWORD	fsize;			/* File size */
-	WORD	fdate;			/* Last modified date */
-	WORD	ftime;			/* Last modified time */
-	BYTE	fattrib;		/* Attribute */
-	TCHAR	fname[13];		/* Short file name (8.3 format) */
-#if _USE_LFN
-	TCHAR*	lfname;			/* Pointer to the LFN buffer */
-	UINT 	lfsize;			/* Size of LFN buffer in TCHAR */
-#endif
-} FILINFO;
-
-
-
-/* File function return code (FRESULT) */
-
-typedef enum {
-	FR_OK = 0,				/* (0) Succeeded */
-	FR_DISK_ERR,			/* (1) A hard error occurred in the low level disk I/O layer */
-	FR_INT_ERR,				/* (2) Assertion failed */
-	FR_NOT_READY,			/* (3) The physical drive cannot work */
-	FR_NO_FILE,				/* (4) Could not find the file */
-	FR_NO_PATH,				/* (5) Could not find the path */
-	FR_INVALID_NAME,		/* (6) The path name format is invalid */
-	FR_DENIED,				/* (7) Access denied due to prohibited access or directory full */
-	FR_EXIST,				/* (8) Access denied due to prohibited access */
-	FR_INVALID_OBJECT,		/* (9) The file/directory object is invalid */
-	FR_WRITE_PROTECTED,		/* (10) The physical drive is write protected */
-	FR_INVALID_DRIVE,		/* (11) The logical drive number is invalid */
-	FR_NOT_ENABLED,			/* (12) The volume has no work area */
-	FR_NO_FILESYSTEM,		/* (13) There is no valid FAT volume */
-	FR_MKFS_ABORTED,		/* (14) The f_mkfs() aborted due to any parameter error */
-	FR_TIMEOUT,				/* (15) Could not get a grant to access the volume within defined period */
-	FR_LOCKED,				/* (16) The operation is rejected according to the file sharing policy */
-	FR_NOT_ENOUGH_CORE,		/* (17) LFN working buffer could not be allocated */
-	FR_TOO_MANY_OPEN_FILES,	/* (18) Number of open files > _FS_SHARE */
-	FR_INVALID_PARAMETER	/* (19) Given parameter is invalid */
-} FRESULT;
-
-
-
-/*--------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* FatFs module application interface                           */
-
-FRESULT f_mount (BYTE, FATFS*);						/* Mount/Unmount a logical drive */
-FRESULT f_open (FIL*, const TCHAR*, BYTE);			/* Open or create a file */
-FRESULT f_read (FIL*, void*, UINT, UINT*);			/* Read data from a file */
-FRESULT f_lseek (FIL*, DWORD);						/* Move file pointer of a file object */
-FRESULT f_close (FIL*);								/* Close an open file object */
-FRESULT f_opendir (DIR*, const TCHAR*);				/* Open an existing directory */
-FRESULT f_readdir (DIR*, FILINFO*);					/* Read a directory item */
-FRESULT f_stat (const TCHAR*, FILINFO*);			/* Get file status */
-FRESULT f_write (FIL*, const void*, UINT, UINT*);	/* Write data to a file */
-FRESULT f_getfree (const TCHAR*, DWORD*, FATFS**);	/* Get number of free clusters on the drive */
-FRESULT f_truncate (FIL*);							/* Truncate file */
-FRESULT f_sync (FIL*);								/* Flush cached data of a writing file */
-FRESULT f_unlink (const TCHAR*);					/* Delete an existing file or directory */
-FRESULT	f_mkdir (const TCHAR*);						/* Create a new directory */
-FRESULT f_chmod (const TCHAR*, BYTE, BYTE);			/* Change attribute of the file/dir */
-FRESULT f_utime (const TCHAR*, const FILINFO*);		/* Change times-tamp of the file/dir */
-FRESULT f_rename (const TCHAR*, const TCHAR*);		/* Rename/Move a file or directory */
-FRESULT f_chdrive (BYTE);							/* Change current drive */
-FRESULT f_chdir (const TCHAR*);						/* Change current directory */
-FRESULT f_getcwd (TCHAR*, UINT);					/* Get current directory */
-FRESULT f_forward (FIL*, UINT(*)(const BYTE*,UINT), UINT, UINT*);	/* Forward data to the stream */
-FRESULT f_mkfs (BYTE, BYTE, UINT);					/* Create a file system on the drive */
-FRESULT	f_fdisk (BYTE, const DWORD[], void*);		/* Divide a physical drive into some partitions */
-int f_putc (TCHAR, FIL*);							/* Put a character to the file */
-int f_puts (const TCHAR*, FIL*);					/* Put a string to the file */
-int f_printf (FIL*, const TCHAR*, ...);				/* Put a formatted string to the file */
-TCHAR* f_gets (TCHAR*, int, FIL*);					/* Get a string from the file */
-
-#define f_eof(fp) (((fp)->fptr == (fp)->fsize) ? 1 : 0)
-#define f_error(fp) (((fp)->flag & FA__ERROR) ? 1 : 0)
-#define f_tell(fp) ((fp)->fptr)
-#define f_size(fp) ((fp)->fsize)
-
-#ifndef EOF
-#define EOF (-1)
-#endif
-
-
-
-
-/*--------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Additional user defined functions                            */
-
-/* RTC function */
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-DWORD get_fattime (void);
-#endif
-
-/* Unicode support functions */
-#if _USE_LFN						/* Unicode - OEM code conversion */
-WCHAR ff_convert (WCHAR, UINT);		/* OEM-Unicode bidirectional conversion */
-WCHAR ff_wtoupper (WCHAR);			/* Unicode upper-case conversion */
-#if _USE_LFN == 3					/* Memory functions */
-void* ff_memalloc (UINT);			/* Allocate memory block */
-void ff_memfree (void*);			/* Free memory block */
-#endif
-#endif
-
-/* Sync functions */
-#if _FS_REENTRANT
-int ff_cre_syncobj (BYTE, _SYNC_t*);/* Create a sync object */
-int ff_req_grant (_SYNC_t);			/* Lock sync object */
-void ff_rel_grant (_SYNC_t);		/* Unlock sync object */
-int ff_del_syncobj (_SYNC_t);		/* Delete a sync object */
-#endif
-
-
-
-
-/*--------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Flags and offset address                                     */
-
-
-/* File access control and file status flags (FIL.flag) */
-
-#define	FA_READ				0x01
-#define	FA_OPEN_EXISTING	0x00
-#define FA__ERROR			0x80
-
-#if !_FS_READONLY
-#define	FA_WRITE			0x02
-#define	FA_CREATE_NEW		0x04
-#define	FA_CREATE_ALWAYS	0x08
-#define	FA_OPEN_ALWAYS		0x10
-#define FA__WRITTEN			0x20
-#define FA__DIRTY			0x40
-#endif
-
-
-/* FAT sub type (FATFS.fs_type) */
-
-#define FS_FAT12	1
-#define FS_FAT16	2
-#define FS_FAT32	3
-
-
-/* File attribute bits for directory entry */
-
-#define	AM_RDO	0x01	/* Read only */
-#define	AM_HID	0x02	/* Hidden */
-#define	AM_SYS	0x04	/* System */
-#define	AM_VOL	0x08	/* Volume label */
-#define AM_LFN	0x0F	/* LFN entry */
-#define AM_DIR	0x10	/* Directory */
-#define AM_ARC	0x20	/* Archive */
-#define AM_MASK	0x3F	/* Mask of defined bits */
-
-
-/* Fast seek feature */
-#define CREATE_LINKMAP	0xFFFFFFFF
-
-
-
-/*--------------------------------*/
-/* Multi-byte word access macros  */
-
-#if _WORD_ACCESS == 1	/* Enable word access to the FAT structure */
-#define	LD_WORD(ptr)		(WORD)(*(WORD*)(BYTE*)(ptr))
-#define	LD_DWORD(ptr)		(DWORD)(*(DWORD*)(BYTE*)(ptr))
-#define	ST_WORD(ptr,val)	*(WORD*)(BYTE*)(ptr)=(WORD)(val)
-#define	ST_DWORD(ptr,val)	*(DWORD*)(BYTE*)(ptr)=(DWORD)(val)
-#else					/* Use byte-by-byte access to the FAT structure */
-#define	LD_WORD(ptr)		(WORD)(((WORD)*((BYTE*)(ptr)+1)<<8)|(WORD)*(BYTE*)(ptr))
-#define	LD_DWORD(ptr)		(DWORD)(((DWORD)*((BYTE*)(ptr)+3)<<24)|((DWORD)*((BYTE*)(ptr)+2)<<16)|((WORD)*((BYTE*)(ptr)+1)<<8)|*(BYTE*)(ptr))
-#define	ST_WORD(ptr,val)	*(BYTE*)(ptr)=(BYTE)(val); *((BYTE*)(ptr)+1)=(BYTE)((WORD)(val)>>8)
-#define	ST_DWORD(ptr,val)	*(BYTE*)(ptr)=(BYTE)(val); *((BYTE*)(ptr)+1)=(BYTE)((WORD)(val)>>8); *((BYTE*)(ptr)+2)=(BYTE)((DWORD)(val)>>16); *((BYTE*)(ptr)+3)=(BYTE)((DWORD)(val)>>24)
-#endif
-
-#ifdef __cplusplus
-}
-#endif
-
-#endif /* _FATFS */
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/ffconf.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/ffconf.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 243a20fa2..000000000
--- a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/ffconf.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,190 +0,0 @@
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
-/  FatFs - FAT file system module configuration file  R0.09a (C)ChaN, 2012
-/----------------------------------------------------------------------------/
-/
-/ CAUTION! Do not forget to make clean the project after any changes to
-/ the configuration options.
-/
-/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#ifndef _FFCONF
-#define _FFCONF 4004	/* Revision ID */
-
-
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
-/ Function and Buffer Configurations
-/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-#define	_FS_TINY	1		/* 0:Normal or 1:Tiny */
-/* When _FS_TINY is set to 1, FatFs uses the sector buffer in the file system
-/  object instead of the sector buffer in the individual file object for file
-/  data transfer. This reduces memory consumption 512 bytes each file object. */
-
-
-#define _FS_READONLY	1	/* 0:Read/Write or 1:Read only */
-/* Setting _FS_READONLY to 1 defines read only configuration. This removes
-/  writing functions, f_write, f_sync, f_unlink, f_mkdir, f_chmod, f_rename,
-/  f_truncate and useless f_getfree. */
-
-
-#define _FS_MINIMIZE	2	/* 0 to 3 */
-/* The _FS_MINIMIZE option defines minimization level to remove some functions.
-/
-/   0: Full function.
-/   1: f_stat, f_getfree, f_unlink, f_mkdir, f_chmod, f_truncate and f_rename
-/      are removed.
-/   2: f_opendir and f_readdir are removed in addition to 1.
-/   3: f_lseek is removed in addition to 2. */
-
-
-#define	_USE_STRFUNC	0	/* 0:Disable or 1-2:Enable */
-/* To enable string functions, set _USE_STRFUNC to 1 or 2. */
-
-
-#define	_USE_MKFS	0		/* 0:Disable or 1:Enable */
-/* To enable f_mkfs function, set _USE_MKFS to 1 and set _FS_READONLY to 0 */
-
-
-#define	_USE_FORWARD	0	/* 0:Disable or 1:Enable */
-/* To enable f_forward function, set _USE_FORWARD to 1 and set _FS_TINY to 1. */
-
-
-#define	_USE_FASTSEEK	0	/* 0:Disable or 1:Enable */
-/* To enable fast seek feature, set _USE_FASTSEEK to 1. */
-
-
-
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
-/ Locale and Namespace Configurations
-/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-#define _CODE_PAGE	932
-/* The _CODE_PAGE specifies the OEM code page to be used on the target system.
-/  Incorrect setting of the code page can cause a file open failure.
-/
-/   932  - Japanese Shift-JIS (DBCS, OEM, Windows)
-/   936  - Simplified Chinese GBK (DBCS, OEM, Windows)
-/   949  - Korean (DBCS, OEM, Windows)
-/   950  - Traditional Chinese Big5 (DBCS, OEM, Windows)
-/   1250 - Central Europe (Windows)
-/   1251 - Cyrillic (Windows)
-/   1252 - Latin 1 (Windows)
-/   1253 - Greek (Windows)
-/   1254 - Turkish (Windows)
-/   1255 - Hebrew (Windows)
-/   1256 - Arabic (Windows)
-/   1257 - Baltic (Windows)
-/   1258 - Vietnam (OEM, Windows)
-/   437  - U.S. (OEM)
-/   720  - Arabic (OEM)
-/   737  - Greek (OEM)
-/   775  - Baltic (OEM)
-/   850  - Multilingual Latin 1 (OEM)
-/   858  - Multilingual Latin 1 + Euro (OEM)
-/   852  - Latin 2 (OEM)
-/   855  - Cyrillic (OEM)
-/   866  - Russian (OEM)
-/   857  - Turkish (OEM)
-/   862  - Hebrew (OEM)
-/   874  - Thai (OEM, Windows)
-/	1    - ASCII only (Valid for non LFN cfg.)
-*/
-
-
-#define	_USE_LFN	0		/* 0 to 3 */
-#define	_MAX_LFN	255		/* Maximum LFN length to handle (12 to 255) */
-/* The _USE_LFN option switches the LFN support.
-/
-/   0: Disable LFN feature. _MAX_LFN and _LFN_UNICODE have no effect.
-/   1: Enable LFN with static working buffer on the BSS. Always NOT reentrant.
-/   2: Enable LFN with dynamic working buffer on the STACK.
-/   3: Enable LFN with dynamic working buffer on the HEAP.
-/
-/  The LFN working buffer occupies (_MAX_LFN + 1) * 2 bytes. To enable LFN,
-/  Unicode handling functions ff_convert() and ff_wtoupper() must be added
-/  to the project. When enable to use heap, memory control functions
-/  ff_memalloc() and ff_memfree() must be added to the project. */
-
-
-#define	_LFN_UNICODE	0	/* 0:ANSI/OEM or 1:Unicode */
-/* To switch the character code set on FatFs API to Unicode,
-/  enable LFN feature and set _LFN_UNICODE to 1. */
-
-
-#define _FS_RPATH		0	/* 0 to 2 */
-/* The _FS_RPATH option configures relative path feature.
-/
-/   0: Disable relative path feature and remove related functions.
-/   1: Enable relative path. f_chdrive() and f_chdir() are available.
-/   2: f_getcwd() is available in addition to 1.
-/
-/  Note that output of the f_readdir function is affected by this option. */
-
-
-
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
-/ Physical Drive Configurations
-/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-#define _VOLUMES	1
-/* Number of volumes (logical drives) to be used. */
-
-
-#define	_MAX_SS		512		/* 512, 1024, 2048 or 4096 */
-/* Maximum sector size to be handled.
-/  Always set 512 for memory card and hard disk but a larger value may be
-/  required for on-board flash memory, floppy disk and optical disk.
-/  When _MAX_SS is larger than 512, it configures FatFs to variable sector size
-/  and GET_SECTOR_SIZE command must be implemented to the disk_ioctl function. */
-
-
-#define	_MULTI_PARTITION	0	/* 0:Single partition, 1/2:Enable multiple partition */
-/* When set to 0, each volume is bound to the same physical drive number and
-/ it can mount only first primary partition. When it is set to 1, each volume
-/ is tied to the partitions listed in VolToPart[]. */
-
-
-#define	_USE_ERASE	0	/* 0:Disable or 1:Enable */
-/* To enable sector erase feature, set _USE_ERASE to 1. CTRL_ERASE_SECTOR command
-/  should be added to the disk_ioctl function. */
-
-
-
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
-/ System Configurations
-/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-#define _WORD_ACCESS	1	/* 0 or 1 */
-/* Set 0 first and it is always compatible with all platforms. The _WORD_ACCESS
-/  option defines which access method is used to the word data on the FAT volume.
-/
-/   0: Byte-by-byte access.
-/   1: Word access. Do not choose this unless following condition is met.
-/
-/  When the byte order on the memory is big-endian or address miss-aligned word
-/  access results incorrect behavior, the _WORD_ACCESS must be set to 0.
-/  If it is not the case, the value can also be set to 1 to improve the
-/  performance and code size. */
-
-
-/* A header file that defines sync object types on the O/S, such as
-/  windows.h, ucos_ii.h and semphr.h, must be included prior to ff.h. */
-
-#define _FS_REENTRANT	0		/* 0:Disable or 1:Enable */
-#define _FS_TIMEOUT		1000	/* Timeout period in unit of time ticks */
-#define	_SYNC_t			HANDLE	/* O/S dependent type of sync object. e.g. HANDLE, OS_EVENT*, ID and etc.. */
-
-/* The _FS_REENTRANT option switches the reentrancy (thread safe) of the FatFs module.
-/
-/   0: Disable reentrancy. _SYNC_t and _FS_TIMEOUT have no effect.
-/   1: Enable reentrancy. Also user provided synchronization handlers,
-/      ff_req_grant, ff_rel_grant, ff_del_syncobj and ff_cre_syncobj
-/      function must be added to the project. */
-
-
-#define	_FS_LOCK	0	/* 0:Disable or >=1:Enable */
-/* To enable file lock control feature, set _FS_LOCK to 1 or greater.
-   The value defines how many files can be opened simultaneously. */
-
-
-#endif /* _FFCONFIG */
-
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/integer.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/integer.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 5408fe6b3..000000000
--- a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/integer.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,38 +0,0 @@
-/*-------------------------------------------*/
-/* Integer type definitions for FatFs module */
-/*-------------------------------------------*/
-
-#ifndef _INTEGER
-#define _INTEGER
-
-#ifdef _WIN32	/* FatFs development platform */
-
-#include <windows.h>
-#include <tchar.h>
-
-#else			/* Embedded platform */
-
-/* These types must be 16-bit, 32-bit or larger integer */
-typedef int				INT;
-typedef unsigned int	UINT;
-
-/* These types must be 8-bit integer */
-typedef char			CHAR;
-typedef unsigned char	UCHAR;
-typedef unsigned char	BYTE;
-
-/* These types must be 16-bit integer */
-typedef short			SHORT;
-typedef unsigned short	USHORT;
-typedef unsigned short	WORD;
-typedef unsigned short	WCHAR;
-
-/* These types must be 32-bit integer */
-typedef long			LONG;
-typedef unsigned long	ULONG;
-typedef unsigned long	DWORD;
-
-#endif
-
-#endif
-
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/HTTPServerApp.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/HTTPServerApp.c
deleted file mode 100644
index ba5ce8b99..000000000
--- a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/HTTPServerApp.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,284 +0,0 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
-
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-           www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Simple HTTP Webserver Application. When connected to the uIP stack,
- *  this will serve out files to HTTP clients on port 80.
- */
-
-#define  INCLUDE_FROM_HTTPSERVERAPP_C
-#include "HTTPServerApp.h"
-
-/** HTTP server response header, for transmission before the page contents. This indicates to the host that a page exists at the
- *  given location, and gives extra connection information.
- */
-const char PROGMEM HTTP200Header[] = "HTTP/1.1 200 OK\r\n"
-                                     "Server: LUFA " LUFA_VERSION_STRING "\r\n"
-                                     "Connection: close\r\n"
-                                     "MIME-version: 1.0\r\n"
-                                     "Content-Type: ";
-
-/** HTTP server response header, for transmission before a resource not found error. This indicates to the host that the given
- *  URL is invalid, and gives extra error information.
- */
-const char PROGMEM HTTP404Header[] = "HTTP/1.1 404 Not Found\r\n"
-                                     "Server: LUFA " LUFA_VERSION_STRING "\r\n"
-                                     "Connection: close\r\n"
-                                     "MIME-version: 1.0\r\n"
-                                     "Content-Type: text/plain\r\n\r\n"
-                                     "Error 404: File Not Found: /";
-
-/** Default filename to fetch when a directory is requested */
-const char PROGMEM DefaultDirFileName[] = "index.htm";
-
-/** Default MIME type sent if no other MIME type can be determined. */
-const char PROGMEM DefaultMIMEType[] = "text/plain";
-
-/** List of MIME types for each supported file extension. */
-const MIME_Type_t MIMETypes[] =
-	{
-		{.Extension = "htm", .MIMEType = "text/html"},
-		{.Extension = "jpg", .MIMEType = "image/jpeg"},
-		{.Extension = "gif", .MIMEType = "image/gif"},
-		{.Extension = "bmp", .MIMEType = "image/bmp"},
-		{.Extension = "png", .MIMEType = "image/png"},
-		{.Extension = "ico", .MIMEType = "image/x-icon"},
-		{.Extension = "exe", .MIMEType = "application/octet-stream"},
-		{.Extension = "gz",  .MIMEType = "application/x-gzip"},
-		{.Extension = "zip", .MIMEType = "application/zip"},
-		{.Extension = "pdf", .MIMEType = "application/pdf"},
-	};
-
-/** FATFs structure to hold the internal state of the FAT driver for the Dataflash contents. */
-FATFS DiskFATState;
-
-
-/** Initialization function for the simple HTTP webserver. */
-void HTTPServerApp_Init(void)
-{
-	/* Listen on port 80 for HTTP connections from hosts */
-	uip_listen(HTONS(HTTP_SERVER_PORT));
-
-	/* Mount the Dataflash disk via FatFS */
-	f_mount(0, &DiskFATState);
-}
-
-/** uIP stack application callback for the simple HTTP webserver. This function must be called each time the
- *  TCP/IP stack needs a TCP packet to be processed.
- */
-void HTTPServerApp_Callback(void)
-{
-	uip_tcp_appstate_t* const AppState = &uip_conn->appstate;
-
-	if (uip_aborted() || uip_timedout() || uip_closed())
-	{
-		/* Lock to the closed state so that no further processing will occur on the connection */
-		AppState->HTTPServer.CurrentState  = WEBSERVER_STATE_Closing;
-		AppState->HTTPServer.NextState     = WEBSERVER_STATE_Closing;
-	}
-
-	if (uip_connected())
-	{
-		/* New connection - initialize connection state values */
-		AppState->HTTPServer.CurrentState  = WEBSERVER_STATE_OpenRequestedFile;
-		AppState->HTTPServer.NextState     = WEBSERVER_STATE_OpenRequestedFile;
-		AppState->HTTPServer.FileOpen      = false;
-		AppState->HTTPServer.ACKedFilePos  = 0;
-		AppState->HTTPServer.SentChunkSize = 0;
-	}
-
-	if (uip_acked())
-	{
-		/* Add the amount of ACKed file data to the total sent file bytes counter */
-		AppState->HTTPServer.ACKedFilePos += AppState->HTTPServer.SentChunkSize;
-
-		/* Progress to the next state once the current state's data has been ACKed */
-		AppState->HTTPServer.CurrentState = AppState->HTTPServer.NextState;
-	}
-
-	if (uip_rexmit())
-	{
-		/* Return file pointer to the last ACKed position */
-		f_lseek(&AppState->HTTPServer.FileHandle, AppState->HTTPServer.ACKedFilePos);
-	}
-
-	if (uip_rexmit() || uip_acked() || uip_newdata() || uip_connected() || uip_poll())
-	{
-		switch (AppState->HTTPServer.CurrentState)
-		{
-			case WEBSERVER_STATE_OpenRequestedFile:
-				HTTPServerApp_OpenRequestedFile();
-				break;
-			case WEBSERVER_STATE_SendResponseHeader:
-				HTTPServerApp_SendResponseHeader();
-				break;
-			case WEBSERVER_STATE_SendData:
-				HTTPServerApp_SendData();
-				break;
-			case WEBSERVER_STATE_Closing:
-				/* Connection is being terminated for some reason - close file handle */
-				f_close(&AppState->HTTPServer.FileHandle);
-				AppState->HTTPServer.FileOpen = false;
-
-				/* If connection is not already closed, close it */
-				uip_close();
-
-				AppState->HTTPServer.CurrentState = WEBSERVER_STATE_Closed;
-				AppState->HTTPServer.NextState    = WEBSERVER_STATE_Closed;
-				break;
-		}
-	}
-}
-
-/** HTTP Server State handler for the Request Process state. This state manages the processing of incoming HTTP
- *  GET requests to the server from the receiving HTTP client.
- */
-static void HTTPServerApp_OpenRequestedFile(void)
-{
-	uip_tcp_appstate_t* const AppState    = &uip_conn->appstate;
-	char*               const AppData     = (char*)uip_appdata;
-
-	/* No HTTP header received from the client, abort processing */
-	if (!(uip_newdata()))
-	  return;
-
-	char* RequestToken      = strtok(AppData, " ");
-	char* RequestedFileName = strtok(NULL, " ");
-
-	/* Must be a GET request, abort otherwise */
-	if (strcmp_P(RequestToken, PSTR("GET")) != 0)
-	{
-		uip_abort();
-		return;
-	}
-
-	/* Copy over the requested filename */
-	strlcpy(AppState->HTTPServer.FileName, &RequestedFileName[1], sizeof(AppState->HTTPServer.FileName));
-
-	/* Determine the length of the URI so that it can be checked to see if it is a directory */
-	uint8_t FileNameLen = strlen(AppState->HTTPServer.FileName);
-
-	/* If the URI is a directory, append the default filename */
-	if ((AppState->HTTPServer.FileName[FileNameLen - 1] == '/') || !(FileNameLen))
-	{
-		strlcpy_P(&AppState->HTTPServer.FileName[FileNameLen], DefaultDirFileName,
-		          (sizeof(AppState->HTTPServer.FileName) - FileNameLen));
-	}
-
-	/* Try to open the file from the Dataflash disk */
-	AppState->HTTPServer.FileOpen     = (f_open(&AppState->HTTPServer.FileHandle, AppState->HTTPServer.FileName,
-	                                            (FA_OPEN_EXISTING | FA_READ)) == FR_OK);
-
-	/* Lock to the SendResponseHeader state until connection terminated */
-	AppState->HTTPServer.CurrentState = WEBSERVER_STATE_SendResponseHeader;
-	AppState->HTTPServer.NextState    = WEBSERVER_STATE_SendResponseHeader;
-}
-
-/** HTTP Server State handler for the HTTP Response Header Send state. This state manages the transmission of
- *  the HTTP response header to the receiving HTTP client.
- */
-static void HTTPServerApp_SendResponseHeader(void)
-{
-	uip_tcp_appstate_t* const AppState    = &uip_conn->appstate;
-	char*               const AppData     = (char*)uip_appdata;
-
-	char* Extension     = strpbrk(AppState->HTTPServer.FileName, ".");
-	bool  FoundMIMEType = false;
-
-	/* If the file isn't already open, it wasn't found - send back a 404 error response and abort */
-	if (!(AppState->HTTPServer.FileOpen))
-	{
-		/* Copy over the HTTP 404 response header and send it to the receiving client */
-		strcpy_P(AppData, HTTP404Header);
-		strcat(AppData, AppState->HTTPServer.FileName);
-		uip_send(AppData, strlen(AppData));
-
-		AppState->HTTPServer.NextState = WEBSERVER_STATE_Closing;
-		return;
-	}
-
-	/* Copy over the HTTP 200 response header and send it to the receiving client */
-	strcpy_P(AppData, HTTP200Header);
-
-	/* Check to see if a MIME type for the requested file's extension was found */
-	if (Extension != NULL)
-	{
-		/* Look through the MIME type list, copy over the required MIME type if found */
-		for (uint8_t i = 0; i < (sizeof(MIMETypes) / sizeof(MIMETypes[0])); i++)
-		{
-			if (strcmp(&Extension[1], MIMETypes[i].Extension) == 0)
-			{
-				strcat(AppData, MIMETypes[i].MIMEType);
-				FoundMIMEType = true;
-				break;
-			}
-		}
-	}
-
-	/* Check if a MIME type was found and copied to the output buffer */
-	if (!(FoundMIMEType))
-	{
-		/* MIME type not found - copy over the default MIME type */
-		strcat_P(AppData, DefaultMIMEType);
-	}
-
-	/* Add the end-of-line terminator and end-of-headers terminator after the MIME type */
-	strcat_P(AppData, PSTR("\r\n\r\n"));
-
-	/* Send the MIME header to the receiving client */
-	uip_send(AppData, strlen(AppData));
-
-	/* When the MIME header is ACKed, progress to the data send stage */
-	AppState->HTTPServer.NextState = WEBSERVER_STATE_SendData;
-}
-
-/** HTTP Server State handler for the Data Send state. This state manages the transmission of file chunks
- *  to the receiving HTTP client.
- */
-static void HTTPServerApp_SendData(void)
-{
-	uip_tcp_appstate_t* const AppState    = &uip_conn->appstate;
-	char*               const AppData     = (char*)uip_appdata;
-
-	/* Get the maximum segment size for the current packet */
-	uint16_t MaxChunkSize = uip_mss();
-
-	/* Read the next chunk of data from the open file */
-	f_read(&AppState->HTTPServer.FileHandle, AppData, MaxChunkSize, &AppState->HTTPServer.SentChunkSize);
-
-	/* Send the next file chunk to the receiving client */
-	uip_send(AppData, AppState->HTTPServer.SentChunkSize);
-
-	/* Check if we are at the last chunk of the file, if so next ACK should close the connection */
-	if (MaxChunkSize != AppState->HTTPServer.SentChunkSize)
-	  AppState->HTTPServer.NextState = WEBSERVER_STATE_Closing;
-}
-
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/HTTPServerApp.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/HTTPServerApp.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 11c39d87e..000000000
--- a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/HTTPServerApp.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,84 +0,0 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
-
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-           www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for HTTPServerApp.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _HTTPSERVER_APP_H_
-#define _HTTPSERVER_APP_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-		#include <string.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
-
-		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
-
-		#include <uip.h>
-		#include <ff.h>
-
-	/* Enums: */
-		/** States for each HTTP connection to the webserver. */
-		enum Webserver_States_t
-		{
-			WEBSERVER_STATE_OpenRequestedFile, /**< Currently opening requested file */
-			WEBSERVER_STATE_SendResponseHeader, /**< Currently sending HTTP response headers to the client */
-			WEBSERVER_STATE_SendData, /**< Currently sending HTTP page data to the client */
-			WEBSERVER_STATE_Closing, /**< Ready to close the connection to the client */
-			WEBSERVER_STATE_Closed, /**< Connection closed after all data sent */
-		};
-
-	/* Type Defines: */
-		/** Type define for a MIME type handler. */
-		typedef struct
-		{
-			char* Extension; /**< File extension (no leading '.' character) */
-			char* MIMEType;  /**< Appropriate MIME type to send when the extension is encountered */
-		} MIME_Type_t;
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** TCP listen port for incoming HTTP traffic. */
-		#define HTTP_SERVER_PORT  80
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void HTTPServerApp_Init(void);
-		void HTTPServerApp_Callback(void);
-
-		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_HTTPSERVERAPP_C)
-			static void HTTPServerApp_OpenRequestedFile(void);
-			static void HTTPServerApp_SendResponseHeader(void);
-			static void HTTPServerApp_SendData(void);
-		#endif
-
-#endif
-
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/SCSI.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/SCSI.c
deleted file mode 100644
index 4fbbfd60e..000000000
--- a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/SCSI.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,344 +0,0 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
-
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-           www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  SCSI command processing routines, for SCSI commands issued by the host. Mass Storage
- *  devices use a thin "Bulk-Only Transport" protocol for issuing commands and status information,
- *  which wrap around standard SCSI device commands for controlling the actual storage medium.
- */
-
-#define  INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C
-#include "SCSI.h"
-
-/** Structure to hold the SCSI response data to a SCSI INQUIRY command. This gives information about the device's
- *  features and capabilities.
- */
-static const SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t InquiryData =
-	{
-		.DeviceType          = DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK,
-		.PeripheralQualifier = 0,
-
-		.Removable           = true,
-
-		.Version             = 0,
-
-		.ResponseDataFormat  = 2,
-		.NormACA             = false,
-		.TrmTsk              = false,
-		.AERC                = false,
-
-		.AdditionalLength    = 0x1F,
-
-		.SoftReset           = false,
-		.CmdQue              = false,
-		.Linked              = false,
-		.Sync                = false,
-		.WideBus16Bit        = false,
-		.WideBus32Bit        = false,
-		.RelAddr             = false,
-
-		.VendorID            = "LUFA",
-		.ProductID           = "Dataflash Disk",
-		.RevisionID          = {'0','.','0','0'},
-	};
-
-/** Structure to hold the sense data for the last issued SCSI command, which is returned to the host after a SCSI REQUEST SENSE
- *  command is issued. This gives information on exactly why the last command failed to complete.
- */
-static SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t SenseData =
-	{
-		.ResponseCode        = 0x70,
-		.AdditionalLength    = 0x0A,
-	};
-
-
-/** Main routine to process the SCSI command located in the Command Block Wrapper read from the host. This dispatches
- *  to the appropriate SCSI command handling routine if the issued command is supported by the device, else it returns
- *  a command failure due to a ILLEGAL REQUEST.
- *
- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
- *
- *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise
- */
-bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	bool CommandSuccess = false;
-
-	/* Run the appropriate SCSI command hander function based on the passed command */
-	switch (MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[0])
-	{
-		case SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY:
-			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Inquiry(MSInterfaceInfo);
-			break;
-		case SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE:
-			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(MSInterfaceInfo);
-			break;
-		case SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10:
-			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(MSInterfaceInfo);
-			break;
-		case SCSI_CMD_SEND_DIAGNOSTIC:
-			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(MSInterfaceInfo);
-			break;
-		case SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10:
-			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(MSInterfaceInfo, DATA_WRITE);
-			break;
-		case SCSI_CMD_READ_10:
-			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(MSInterfaceInfo, DATA_READ);
-			break;
-		case SCSI_CMD_MODE_SENSE_6:
-			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ModeSense_6(MSInterfaceInfo);
-			break;
-		case SCSI_CMD_START_STOP_UNIT:
-		case SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY:
-		case SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL:
-		case SCSI_CMD_VERIFY_10:
-			/* These commands should just succeed, no handling required */
-			CommandSuccess = true;
-			MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0;
-			break;
-		default:
-			/* Update the SENSE key to reflect the invalid command */
-			SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
-		                   SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_COMMAND,
-		                   SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
-			break;
-	}
-
-	/* Check if command was successfully processed */
-	if (CommandSuccess)
-	{
-		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD,
-		               SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION,
-		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
-
-		return true;
-	}
-
-	return false;
-}
-
-/** Command processing for an issued SCSI INQUIRY command. This command returns information about the device's features
- *  and capabilities to the host.
- *
- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
- *
- *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
- */
-static bool SCSI_Command_Inquiry(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	uint16_t AllocationLength  = SwapEndian_16(*(uint16_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[3]);
-	uint16_t BytesTransferred  = MIN(AllocationLength, sizeof(InquiryData));
-
-	/* Only the standard INQUIRY data is supported, check if any optional INQUIRY bits set */
-	if ((MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & ((1 << 0) | (1 << 1))) ||
-	     MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2])
-	{
-		/* Optional but unsupported bits set - update the SENSE key and fail the request */
-		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
-		               SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB,
-		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
-
-		return false;
-	}
-
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&InquiryData, BytesTransferred, NULL);
-
-	/* Pad out remaining bytes with 0x00 */
-	Endpoint_Null_Stream((AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NULL);
-
-	/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-
-	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
-	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred;
-
-	return true;
-}
-
-/** Command processing for an issued SCSI REQUEST SENSE command. This command returns information about the last issued command,
- *  including the error code and additional error information so that the host can determine why a command failed to complete.
- *
- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
- *
- *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
- */
-static bool SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	uint8_t  AllocationLength = MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4];
-	uint8_t  BytesTransferred = MIN(AllocationLength, sizeof(SenseData));
-
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&SenseData, BytesTransferred, NULL);
-	Endpoint_Null_Stream((AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NULL);
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-
-	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
-	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred;
-
-	return true;
-}
-
-/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ CAPACITY (10) command. This command returns information about the device's capacity
- *  on the selected Logical Unit (drive), as a number of OS-sized blocks.
- *
- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
- *
- *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
- */
-static bool SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	uint32_t LastBlockAddressInLUN = (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS - 1);
-	uint32_t MediaBlockSize        = VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE;
-
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(&LastBlockAddressInLUN, sizeof(LastBlockAddressInLUN), NULL);
-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(&MediaBlockSize, sizeof(MediaBlockSize), NULL);
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-
-	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
-	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= 8;
-
-	return true;
-}
-
-/** Command processing for an issued SCSI SEND DIAGNOSTIC command. This command performs a quick check of the Dataflash ICs on the
- *  board, and indicates if they are present and functioning correctly. Only the Self-Test portion of the diagnostic command is
- *  supported.
- *
- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
- *
- *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
- */
-static bool SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	/* Check to see if the SELF TEST bit is not set */
-	if (!(MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & (1 << 2)))
-	{
-		/* Only self-test supported - update SENSE key and fail the command */
-		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
-		               SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB,
-		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
-
-		return false;
-	}
-
-	/* Check to see if all attached Dataflash ICs are functional */
-	if (!(DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation()))
-	{
-		/* Update SENSE key with a hardware error condition and return command fail */
-		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_HARDWARE_ERROR,
-		               SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION,
-		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
-
-		return false;
-	}
-
-	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
-	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0;
-
-	return true;
-}
-
-/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ (10) or WRITE (10) command. This command reads in the block start address
- *  and total number of blocks to process, then calls the appropriate low-level Dataflash routine to handle the actual
- *  reading and writing of the data.
- *
- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
- *  \param[in] IsDataRead  Indicates if the command is a READ (10) command or WRITE (10) command (DATA_READ or DATA_WRITE)
- *
- *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
- */
-static bool SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
-                                      const bool IsDataRead)
-{
-	uint32_t BlockAddress;
-	uint16_t TotalBlocks;
-
-	/* Check if the disk is write protected or not */
-	if ((IsDataRead == DATA_WRITE) && DISK_READ_ONLY)
-	{
-		/* Block address is invalid, update SENSE key and return command fail */
-		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_DATA_PROTECT,
-		               SCSI_ASENSE_WRITE_PROTECTED,
-		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
-
-		return false;
-	}
-
-	/* Load in the 32-bit block address (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to reverse the byte order) */
-	BlockAddress = SwapEndian_32(*(uint32_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2]);
-
-	/* Load in the 16-bit total blocks (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to reverse the byte order) */
-	TotalBlocks  = SwapEndian_16(*(uint16_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[7]);
-
-	/* Check if the block address is outside the maximum allowable value for the LUN */
-	if (BlockAddress >= VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS)
-	{
-		/* Block address is invalid, update SENSE key and return command fail */
-		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
-		               SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_BLOCK_ADDRESS_OUT_OF_RANGE,
-		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
-
-		return false;
-	}
-
-	/* Determine if the packet is a READ (10) or WRITE (10) command, call appropriate function */
-	if (IsDataRead == DATA_READ)
-	  DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(MSInterfaceInfo, BlockAddress, TotalBlocks);
-	else
-	  DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(MSInterfaceInfo, BlockAddress, TotalBlocks);
-
-	/* Update the bytes transferred counter and succeed the command */
-	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= ((uint32_t)TotalBlocks * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE);
-
-	return true;
-}
-
-/** Command processing for an issued SCSI MODE SENSE (6) command. This command returns various informational pages about
- *  the SCSI device, as well as the device's Write Protect status.
- *
- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
- *
- *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
- */
-static bool SCSI_Command_ModeSense_6(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	/* Send an empty header response with the Write Protect flag status */
-	Endpoint_Write_8(0x00);
-	Endpoint_Write_8(0x00);
-	Endpoint_Write_8(DISK_READ_ONLY ? 0x80 : 0x00);
-	Endpoint_Write_8(0x00);
-	Endpoint_ClearIN();
-
-	/* Update the bytes transferred counter and succeed the command */
-	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= 4;
-
-	return true;
-}
-
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/SCSI.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/SCSI.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 8f41f63b4..000000000
--- a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/SCSI.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,87 +0,0 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
-
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-           www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for SCSI.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _SCSI_H_
-#define _SCSI_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-
-		#include "../Descriptors.h"
-		#include "DataflashManager.h"
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** Macro to set the current SCSI sense data to the given key, additional sense code and additional sense qualifier. This
-		 *  is for convenience, as it allows for all three sense values (returned upon request to the host to give information about
-		 *  the last command failure) in a quick and easy manner.
-		 *
-		 *  \param[in] Key    New SCSI sense key to set the sense code to
-		 *  \param[in] Acode  New SCSI additional sense key to set the additional sense code to
-		 *  \param[in] Aqual  New SCSI additional sense key qualifier to set the additional sense qualifier code to
-		 */
-		#define SCSI_SET_SENSE(Key, Acode, Aqual)  do { SenseData.SenseKey                 = (Key);   \
-		                                                SenseData.AdditionalSenseCode      = (Acode); \
-		                                                SenseData.AdditionalSenseQualifier = (Aqual); } while (0)
-
-		/** Macro for the \ref SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be read from the storage medium. */
-		#define DATA_READ           true
-
-		/** Macro for the \ref SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be written to the storage medium. */
-		#define DATA_WRITE          false
-
-		/** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a Block Media device. */
-		#define DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK   0x00
-
-		/** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a CD-ROM device. */
-		#define DEVICE_TYPE_CDROM   0x05
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
-
-		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C)
-			static bool SCSI_Command_Inquiry(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
-			static bool SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
-			static bool SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
-			static bool SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
-			static bool SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
-			                                      const bool IsDataRead);
-			static bool SCSI_Command_ModeSense_6(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
-		#endif
-
-#endif
-
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/TELNETServerApp.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/TELNETServerApp.c
deleted file mode 100644
index 4500a4b78..000000000
--- a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/TELNETServerApp.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,163 +0,0 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
-
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-           www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  TELNET Webserver Application. When connected to the uIP stack,
- *  this will serve out raw TELNET to the client on port 23.
- */
-
-#define  INCLUDE_FROM_TELNETSERVERAPP_C
-#include "TELNETServerApp.h"
-
-#if defined(ENABLE_TELNET_SERVER) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-
-/** Welcome message to send to a TELNET client when a connection is first made. */
-const char PROGMEM WelcomeHeader[] = "********************************************\r\n"
-                                     "*       LUFA uIP Webserver (TELNET)        *\r\n"
-                                     "********************************************\r\n";
-
-/** Main TELNET menu, giving the user the list of available commands they may issue */
-const char PROGMEM TELNETMenu[] = "\r\n"
-                                  "  == Available Commands: ==\r\n"
-                                  "     c) List Active TCP Connections\r\n"
-                                  "  =========================\r\n"
-                                  "\r\n>";
-
-/** Header to print before the current connections are printed to the client */
-const char PROGMEM CurrentConnectionsHeader[] = "\r\n* Current TCP Connections: *\r\n";
-
-/** Initialization function for the simple TELNET webserver. */
-void TELNETServerApp_Init(void)
-{
-	/* Listen on port 23 for TELNET connections from hosts */
-	uip_listen(HTONS(TELNET_SERVER_PORT));
-}
-
-/** uIP stack application callback for the TELNET server. This function must be called each time the
- *  TCP/IP stack needs a TCP packet to be processed.
- */
-void TELNETServerApp_Callback(void)
-{
-	uip_tcp_appstate_t* const AppState   = &uip_conn->appstate;
-	char*               const AppData    = (char*)uip_appdata;
-
-	if (uip_connected())
-	{
-		/* New connection - initialize connection state values */
-		AppState->TELNETServer.CurrentState = TELNET_STATE_SendHeader;
-	}
-
-	if (uip_acked())
-	{
-		/* Progress to the next state once the current state's data has been ACKed */
-		AppState->TELNETServer.CurrentState = AppState->TELNETServer.NextState;
-	}
-
-	if (uip_rexmit() || uip_acked() || uip_newdata() || uip_connected() || uip_poll())
-	{
-		switch (AppState->TELNETServer.CurrentState)
-		{
-			case TELNET_STATE_SendHeader:
-				/* Copy over and send the TELNET welcome message upon first connection */
-				strcpy_P(AppData, WelcomeHeader);
-				uip_send(AppData, strlen(AppData));
-
-				AppState->TELNETServer.NextState = TELNET_STATE_SendMenu;
-				break;
-			case TELNET_STATE_SendMenu:
-				/* Copy over and send the TELNET menu to the client */
-				strcpy_P(AppData, TELNETMenu);
-				uip_send(AppData, strlen(AppData));
-
-				AppState->TELNETServer.NextState = TELNET_STATE_GetCommand;
-				break;
-			case TELNET_STATE_GetCommand:
-				if (!(uip_datalen()))
-				  break;
-
-				/* Save the issued command for later processing */
-				AppState->TELNETServer.IssuedCommand = AppData[0];
-
-				AppState->TELNETServer.CurrentState  = TELNET_STATE_SendResponse;
-				break;
-			case TELNET_STATE_SendResponse:
-				/* Determine which command was issued, perform command processing */
-				switch (AppState->TELNETServer.IssuedCommand)
-				{
-					case 'c':
-						TELNETServerApp_DisplayTCPConnections();
-						break;
-					default:
-						strcpy_P(AppData, PSTR("Invalid Command.\r\n"));
-						uip_send(AppData, strlen(AppData));
-						break;
-				}
-
-				AppState->TELNETServer.NextState = TELNET_STATE_SendMenu;
-				break;
-		}
-	}
-}
-
-/** Sends a list of active TCP connections to the TELNET client. */
-static void TELNETServerApp_DisplayTCPConnections(void)
-{
-	char* const AppData    = (char*)uip_appdata;
-
-	strcpy_P(AppData, CurrentConnectionsHeader);
-
-	uint16_t ResponseLen     = strlen(AppData);
-	uint8_t  ActiveConnCount = 0;
-
-	/* Loop through the complete uIP TCP connections list, looking for active connections */
-	for (uint8_t i = 0; i < UIP_CONNS; i++)
-	{
-		struct uip_conn* CurrConnection = &uip_conns[i];
-
-		/* If the connection is not closed, it is active and must be added to the out buffer */
-		if (CurrConnection->tcpstateflags != UIP_CLOSED)
-		{
-			/* Add the current connection's details to the out buffer */
-			ResponseLen += sprintf_P(&AppData[ResponseLen], PSTR("%u) %d.%d.%d.%d (Local Port %u <=> Remote Port %u)\r\n"),
-			                         ++ActiveConnCount,
-			                         CurrConnection->ripaddr.u8[0],
-			                         CurrConnection->ripaddr.u8[1],
-			                         CurrConnection->ripaddr.u8[2],
-			                         CurrConnection->ripaddr.u8[3],
-			                         HTONS(CurrConnection->lport), HTONS(CurrConnection->rport));
-		}
-	}
-
-	uip_send(AppData, ResponseLen);
-}
-
-#endif
-
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/TELNETServerApp.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/TELNETServerApp.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 67301ba09..000000000
--- a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/TELNETServerApp.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,71 +0,0 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
-
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-           www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for TELNETServerApp.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _TELNETSERVER_APP_H_
-#define _TELNETSERVER_APP_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-		#include <string.h>
-		#include <stdio.h>
-
-		#include <uip.h>
-
-		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** TCP listen port for incoming TELNET traffic. */
-		#define TELNET_SERVER_PORT  23
-
-	/* Enums: */
-		/** States for each TELNET connection to the server. */
-		enum TELNET_States_t
-		{
-			TELNET_STATE_SendHeader, /**< Currently sending welcome header to the client */
-			TELNET_STATE_SendMenu, /**< Currently sending the command list menu to the client */
-			TELNET_STATE_GetCommand, /**< Currently waiting for a command from the client */
-			TELNET_STATE_SendResponse, /**< Processing the issued command and sending a response */
-		};
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void TELNETServerApp_Init(void);
-		void TELNETServerApp_Callback(void);
-
-		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_TELNETSERVERAPP_C)
-			static void TELNETServerApp_DisplayTCPConnections(void);
-		#endif
-
-#endif
-
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uIPManagement.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uIPManagement.c
deleted file mode 100644
index 12f6c8f9e..000000000
--- a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uIPManagement.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,298 +0,0 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
-
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-           www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  uIP Management functions. This file contains the functions and globals needed to maintain the uIP
- *  stack once an RNDIS device has been attached to the system.
- */
-
-#define  INCLUDE_FROM_UIPMANAGEMENT_C
-#include "uIPManagement.h"
-
-/** Connection timer, to retain the time elapsed since the last time the uIP connections were managed. */
-static struct timer ConnectionTimer;
-
-/** ARP timer, to retain the time elapsed since the ARP cache was last updated. */
-static struct timer ARPTimer;
-
-/** MAC address of the RNDIS device, when enumerated. */
-struct uip_eth_addr MACAddress;
-
-
-/** Configures the uIP stack ready for network traffic processing. */
-void uIPManagement_Init(void)
-{
-	/* uIP Timing Initialization */
-	clock_init();
-	timer_set(&ConnectionTimer, CLOCK_SECOND / 2);
-	timer_set(&ARPTimer, CLOCK_SECOND * 10);
-
-	/* uIP Stack Initialization */
-	uip_init();
-	uip_arp_init();
-
-	/* DHCP/Server IP Settings Initialization */
-	if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_Device)
-	{
-		MACAddress.addr[0] = SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS[0];
-		MACAddress.addr[1] = SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS[1];
-		MACAddress.addr[2] = SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS[2];
-		MACAddress.addr[3] = SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS[3];
-		MACAddress.addr[4] = SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS[4];
-		MACAddress.addr[5] = SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS[5];
-
-		#if defined(ENABLE_DHCP_SERVER)
-		DHCPServerApp_Init();
-		#endif
-
-		uip_ipaddr_t IPAddress, Netmask, GatewayIPAddress;
-		uip_ipaddr(&IPAddress,        DEVICE_IP_ADDRESS[0], DEVICE_IP_ADDRESS[1], DEVICE_IP_ADDRESS[2], DEVICE_IP_ADDRESS[3]);
-		uip_ipaddr(&Netmask,          DEVICE_NETMASK[0],    DEVICE_NETMASK[1],    DEVICE_NETMASK[2],    DEVICE_NETMASK[3]);
-		uip_ipaddr(&GatewayIPAddress, DEVICE_GATEWAY[0],    DEVICE_GATEWAY[1],    DEVICE_GATEWAY[2],    DEVICE_GATEWAY[3]);
-		uip_sethostaddr(&IPAddress);
-		uip_setnetmask(&Netmask);
-		uip_setdraddr(&GatewayIPAddress);
-	}
-	else
-	{
-		#if defined(ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT)
-		DHCPClientApp_Init();
-		#else
-		uip_ipaddr_t IPAddress, Netmask, GatewayIPAddress;
-		uip_ipaddr(&IPAddress,        DEVICE_IP_ADDRESS[0], DEVICE_IP_ADDRESS[1], DEVICE_IP_ADDRESS[2], DEVICE_IP_ADDRESS[3]);
-		uip_ipaddr(&Netmask,          DEVICE_NETMASK[0],    DEVICE_NETMASK[1],    DEVICE_NETMASK[2],    DEVICE_NETMASK[3]);
-		uip_ipaddr(&GatewayIPAddress, DEVICE_GATEWAY[0],    DEVICE_GATEWAY[1],    DEVICE_GATEWAY[2],    DEVICE_GATEWAY[3]);
-		uip_sethostaddr(&IPAddress);
-		uip_setnetmask(&Netmask);
-		uip_setdraddr(&GatewayIPAddress);
-		#endif
-	}
-
-	/* Virtual Webserver Ethernet Address Configuration */
-	uip_setethaddr(MACAddress);
-
-	/* HTTP Webserver Initialization */
-	HTTPServerApp_Init();
-
-	/* TELNET Server Initialization */
-	#if defined(ENABLE_TELNET_SERVER)
-	TELNETServerApp_Init();
-	#endif
-}
-
-/** uIP Management function. This function manages the uIP stack when called while an RNDIS device has been
- *  attached to the system.
- */
-void uIPManagement_ManageNetwork(void)
-{
-	if (((USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_Host)   && (USB_HostState   == HOST_STATE_Configured)) ||
-	    ((USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_Device) && (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Configured)))
-	{
-		uIPManagement_ProcessIncomingPacket();
-		uIPManagement_ManageConnections();
-	}
-}
-
-/** uIP TCP/IP network stack callback function for the processing of a given TCP connection. This routine dispatches
- *  to the appropriate TCP protocol application based on the connection's listen port number.
- */
-void uIPManagement_TCPCallback(void)
-{
-	/* Call the correct TCP application based on the port number the connection is listening on */
-	switch (uip_conn->lport)
-	{
-		case HTONS(HTTP_SERVER_PORT):
-			HTTPServerApp_Callback();
-			break;
-		#if defined(ENABLE_TELNET_SERVER)
-		case HTONS(TELNET_SERVER_PORT):
-			TELNETServerApp_Callback();
-			break;
-		#endif
-	}
-}
-
-/** uIP TCP/IP network stack callback function for the processing of a given UDP connection. This routine dispatches
- *  to the appropriate UDP protocol application based on the connection's listen port number.
- */
-void uIPManagement_UDPCallback(void)
-{
-	/* Call the correct UDP application based on the port number the connection is listening on */
-	switch (uip_udp_conn->lport)
-	{
-		#if defined(ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT)
-		case HTONS(DHCP_CLIENT_PORT):
-			DHCPClientApp_Callback();
-			break;
-		#endif
-		#if defined(ENABLE_DHCP_SERVER)
-		case HTONS(DHCP_SERVER_PORT):
-			DHCPServerApp_Callback();
-			break;
-		#endif
-	}
-}
-
-/** Processes Incoming packets to the server from the connected RNDIS device, creating responses as needed. */
-static void uIPManagement_ProcessIncomingPacket(void)
-{
-	/* Determine which USB mode the system is currently initialized in */
-	if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_Device)
-	{
-		/* If no packet received, exit processing routine */
-		if (!(RNDIS_Device_IsPacketReceived(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Device)))
-		  return;
-
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
-
-		/* Read the Incoming packet straight into the UIP packet buffer */
-		RNDIS_Device_ReadPacket(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Device, uip_buf, &uip_len);
-	}
-	else
-	{
-		/* If no packet received, exit processing routine */
-		if (!(RNDIS_Host_IsPacketReceived(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Host)))
-		  return;
-
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
-
-		/* Read the Incoming packet straight into the UIP packet buffer */
-		RNDIS_Host_ReadPacket(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Host, uip_buf, &uip_len);
-	}
-
-	/* If the packet contains an Ethernet frame, process it */
-	if (uip_len > 0)
-	{
-		switch (((struct uip_eth_hdr*)uip_buf)->type)
-		{
-			case HTONS(UIP_ETHTYPE_IP):
-				/* Filter packet by MAC destination */
-				uip_arp_ipin();
-
-				/* Process Incoming packet */
-				uip_input();
-
-				/* If a response was generated, send it */
-				if (uip_len > 0)
-				{
-					/* Add destination MAC to outgoing packet */
-					uip_arp_out();
-
-					uip_split_output();
-				}
-
-				break;
-			case HTONS(UIP_ETHTYPE_ARP):
-				/* Process ARP packet */
-				uip_arp_arpin();
-
-				/* If a response was generated, send it */
-				if (uip_len > 0)
-				  uip_split_output();
-
-				break;
-		}
-	}
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-}
-
-/** Manages the currently open network connections, including TCP and (if enabled) UDP. */
-static void uIPManagement_ManageConnections(void)
-{
-	/* Poll TCP connections for more data to send back to the host */
-	for (uint8_t i = 0; i < UIP_CONNS; i++)
-	{
-		uip_poll_conn(&uip_conns[i]);
-
-		/* If a response was generated, send it */
-		if (uip_len > 0)
-		{
-			/* Add destination MAC to outgoing packet */
-			uip_arp_out();
-
-			/* Split and send the outgoing packet */
-			uip_split_output();
-		}
-	}
-
-	/* Manage open connections for timeouts */
-	if (timer_expired(&ConnectionTimer))
-	{
-		timer_reset(&ConnectionTimer);
-
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
-
-		for (uint8_t i = 0; i < UIP_CONNS; i++)
-		{
-			/* Run periodic connection management for each TCP connection */
-			uip_periodic(i);
-
-			/* If a response was generated, send it */
-			if (uip_len > 0)
-			{
-				/* Add destination MAC to outgoing packet */
-				uip_arp_out();
-
-				/* Split and send the outgoing packet */
-				uip_split_output();
-			}
-		}
-
-		#if defined(ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT)
-		for (uint8_t i = 0; i < UIP_UDP_CONNS; i++)
-		{
-			/* Run periodic connection management for each UDP connection */
-			uip_udp_periodic(i);
-
-			/* If a response was generated, send it */
-			if (uip_len > 0)
-			{
-				/* Add destination MAC to outgoing packet */
-				uip_arp_out();
-
-				/* Split and send the outgoing packet */
-				uip_split_output();
-			}
-		}
-		#endif
-
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-	}
-
-	/* Manage ARP cache refreshing */
-	if (timer_expired(&ARPTimer))
-	{
-		timer_reset(&ARPTimer);
-		uip_arp_timer();
-	}
-}
-
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uIPManagement.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uIPManagement.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 3bdc5c96b..000000000
--- a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uIPManagement.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,69 +0,0 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
-
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-           www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for uIPManagement.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _UIP_MANAGEMENT_H_
-#define _UIP_MANAGEMENT_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-
-		#include <uip.h>
-		#include <uip_arp.h>
-		#include <uip-split.h>
-		#include <timer.h>
-
-		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
-
-		#include "DHCPClientApp.h"
-		#include "DHCPServerApp.h"
-		#include "HTTPServerApp.h"
-		#include "TELNETServerApp.h"
-
-	/* External Variables: */
-		extern struct uip_eth_addr MACAddress;
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void uIPManagement_Init(void);
-		void uIPManagement_ManageNetwork(void);
-		void uIPManagement_TCPCallback(void);
-		void uIPManagement_UDPCallback(void);
-
-		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_UIPMANAGEMENT_C)
-			static void uIPManagement_ProcessIncomingPacket(void);
-			static void uIPManagement_ManageConnections(void);
-		#endif
-
-#endif
-
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/clock.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/clock.c
deleted file mode 100644
index e71f7209d..000000000
--- a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/clock.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,37 +0,0 @@
-#include <stdint.h>
-#include <stdlib.h>
-#include <stdio.h>
-
-#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
-
-#include "clock.h"
-
-//Counted time
-volatile clock_time_t clock_datetime = 0;
-
-//Overflow interrupt
-ISR(TIMER1_COMPA_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
-{
-	clock_datetime += 1;
-}
-
-//Initialise the clock
-void clock_init()
-{
-	OCR1A  = (((F_CPU / 1024) / 100) - 1);
-	TCCR1B = ((1 << WGM12) | (1 << CS12) | (1 << CS10));
-	TIMSK1 = (1 << OCIE1A);
-}
-
-//Return time
-clock_time_t clock_time()
-{
-	clock_time_t time;
-
-	GlobalInterruptDisable();
-	time = clock_datetime;
-	GlobalInterruptEnable();
-
-	return time;
-}
-
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/clock.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/clock.h
deleted file mode 100644
index bbfa4ac0e..000000000
--- a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/clock.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,13 +0,0 @@
-#ifndef __CLOCK_ARCH_H__
-#define __CLOCK_ARCH_H__
-
-#include <stdint.h>
-#include <util/atomic.h>
-
-typedef uint16_t clock_time_t;
-#define CLOCK_SECOND 100
-void clock_init(void);
-clock_time_t clock_time(void);
-
-#endif /* __CLOCK_ARCH_H__ */
-
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/timer.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/timer.c
deleted file mode 100644
index eae06f43b..000000000
--- a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/timer.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,128 +0,0 @@
-/**
- * \addtogroup timer
- * @{
- */
-
-/**
- * \file
- * Timer library implementation.
- * \author
- * Adam Dunkels <adam@sics.se>
- */
-
-/*
- * Copyright (c) 2004, Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
- * All rights reserved.
- *
- * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
- * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
- * are met:
- * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
- *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
- * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
- *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
- *    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
- * 3. Neither the name of the Institute nor the names of its contributors
- *    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
- *    without specific prior written permission.
- *
- * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INSTITUTE AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
- * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
- * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
- * ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE INSTITUTE OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
- * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
- * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
- * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
- * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
- * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
- * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
- * SUCH DAMAGE.
- *
- * This file is part of the uIP TCP/IP stack
- *
- * Author: Adam Dunkels <adam@sics.se>
- *
- * $Id: timer.c,v 1.2 2006/06/12 08:00:30 adam Exp $
- */
-
-#include "clock.h"
-#include "timer.h"
-
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/**
- * Set a timer.
- *
- * This function is used to set a timer for a time sometime in the
- * future. The function timer_expired() will evaluate to true after
- * the timer has expired.
- *
- * \param t A pointer to the timer
- * \param interval The interval before the timer expires.
- *
- */
-void
-timer_set(struct timer *t, clock_time_t interval)
-{
-  t->interval = interval;
-  t->start = clock_time();
-}
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/**
- * Reset the timer with the same interval.
- *
- * This function resets the timer with the same interval that was
- * given to the timer_set() function. The start point of the interval
- * is the exact time that the timer last expired. Therefore, this
- * function will cause the timer to be stable over time, unlike the
- * timer_restart() function.
- *
- * \param t A pointer to the timer.
- *
- * \sa timer_restart()
- */
-void
-timer_reset(struct timer *t)
-{
-  t->start += t->interval;
-}
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/**
- * Restart the timer from the current point in time
- *
- * This function restarts a timer with the same interval that was
- * given to the timer_set() function. The timer will start at the
- * current time.
- *
- * \note A periodic timer will drift if this function is used to reset
- * it. For periodic timers, use the timer_reset() function instead.
- *
- * \param t A pointer to the timer.
- *
- * \sa timer_reset()
- */
-void
-timer_restart(struct timer *t)
-{
-  t->start = clock_time();
-}
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/**
- * Check if a timer has expired.
- *
- * This function tests if a timer has expired and returns true or
- * false depending on its status.
- *
- * \param t A pointer to the timer
- *
- * \return Non-zero if the timer has expired, zero otherwise.
- *
- */
-int
-timer_expired(struct timer *t)
-{
-  return (clock_time_t)(clock_time() - t->start) >= (clock_time_t)t->interval;
-}
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-/** @} */
-
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/timer.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/timer.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 04917e4c5..000000000
--- a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/timer.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,87 +0,0 @@
-/**
- * \defgroup timer Timer library
- *
- * The timer library provides functions for setting, resetting and
- * restarting timers, and for checking if a timer has expired. An
- * application must "manually" check if its timers have expired; this
- * is not done automatically.
- *
- * A timer is declared as a \c struct \c timer and all access to the
- * timer is made by a pointer to the declared timer.
- *
- * \note The timer library uses the \ref clock "Clock library" to
- * measure time. Intervals should be specified in the format used by
- * the clock library.
- *
- * @{
- */
-
-
-/**
- * \file
- * Timer library header file.
- * \author
- * Adam Dunkels <adam@sics.se>
- */
-
-/*
- * Copyright (c) 2004, Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
- * All rights reserved.
- *
- * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
- * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
- * are met:
- * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
- *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
- * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
- *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
- *    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
- * 3. Neither the name of the Institute nor the names of its contributors
- *    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
- *    without specific prior written permission.
- *
- * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INSTITUTE AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
- * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
- * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
- * ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE INSTITUTE OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
- * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
- * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
- * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
- * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
- * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
- * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
- * SUCH DAMAGE.
- *
- * This file is part of the uIP TCP/IP stack
- *
- * Author: Adam Dunkels <adam@sics.se>
- *
- * $Id: timer.h,v 1.3 2006/06/11 21:46:39 adam Exp $
- */
-#ifndef __TIMER_H__
-#define __TIMER_H__
-
-#include "clock.h"
-
-/**
- * A timer.
- *
- * This structure is used for declaring a timer. The timer must be set
- * with timer_set() before it can be used.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-struct timer {
-  clock_time_t start;
-  clock_time_t interval;
-};
-
-void timer_set(struct timer *t, clock_time_t interval);
-void timer_reset(struct timer *t);
-void timer_restart(struct timer *t);
-int timer_expired(struct timer *t);
-
-#endif /* __TIMER_H__ */
-
-/** @} */
-
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip-split.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip-split.c
deleted file mode 100644
index 5222a05b6..000000000
--- a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip-split.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,151 +0,0 @@
-/*
- * Copyright (c) 2004, Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
- * All rights reserved.
- *
- * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
- * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
- * are met:
- * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
- *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
- * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
- *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
- *    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
- * 3. Neither the name of the Institute nor the names of its contributors
- *    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
- *    without specific prior written permission.
- *
- * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INSTITUTE AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
- * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
- * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
- * ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE INSTITUTE OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
- * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
- * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
- * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
- * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
- * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
- * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
- * SUCH DAMAGE.
- *
- * This file is part of the Contiki operating system.
- *
- * Author: Adam Dunkels <adam@sics.se>
- *
- * $Id: uip-split.c,v 1.2 2008/10/14 13:39:12 julienabeille Exp $
- */
-
-#include "uip-split.h"
-
-
-#define BUF ((struct uip_tcpip_hdr *)&uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN])
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-void
-uip_split_output(void)
-{
-#if UIP_TCP
-  u16_t tcplen, len1, len2;
-
-  /* We only try to split maximum sized TCP segments. */
-  if(BUF->proto == UIP_PROTO_TCP  && uip_len == UIP_BUFSIZE) {
-
-    tcplen = uip_len - UIP_TCPIP_HLEN - UIP_LLH_LEN;
-    /* Split the segment in two. If the original packet length was
-       odd, we make the second packet one byte larger. */
-    len1 = len2 = tcplen / 2;
-    if(len1 + len2 < tcplen) {
-      ++len2;
-    }
-
-    /* Create the first packet. This is done by altering the length
-       field of the IP header and updating the checksums. */
-    uip_len = len1 + UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN;
-#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
-    /* For IPv6, the IP length field does not include the IPv6 IP header
-       length. */
-    BUF->len[0] = ((uip_len - UIP_IPH_LEN) >> 8);
-    BUF->len[1] = ((uip_len - UIP_IPH_LEN) & 0xff);
-#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-    BUF->len[0] = (uip_len - UIP_LLH_LEN) >> 8;
-    BUF->len[1] = (uip_len - UIP_LLH_LEN) & 0xff;
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-
-    /* Recalculate the TCP checksum. */
-    BUF->tcpchksum = 0;
-    BUF->tcpchksum = ~(uip_tcpchksum());
-
-#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6
-    /* Recalculate the IP checksum. */
-    BUF->ipchksum = 0;
-    BUF->ipchksum = ~(uip_ipchksum());
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-
-    /* Transmit the first packet. */
-#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
-    tcpip_ipv6_output();
-#else
-	if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_Device)
-	  RNDIS_Device_SendPacket(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Device, uip_buf, uip_len);
-	else
-	  RNDIS_Host_SendPacket(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Host, uip_buf, uip_len);
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-
-    /* Now, create the second packet. To do this, it is not enough to
-       just alter the length field, but we must also update the TCP
-       sequence number and point the uip_appdata to a new place in
-       memory. This place is determined by the length of the first
-       packet (len1). */
-    uip_len = len2 + UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN;
-#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
-    /* For IPv6, the IP length field does not include the IPv6 IP header
-       length. */
-    BUF->len[0] = ((uip_len - UIP_IPH_LEN) >> 8);
-    BUF->len[1] = ((uip_len - UIP_IPH_LEN) & 0xff);
-#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-    BUF->len[0] = (uip_len  - UIP_LLH_LEN) >> 8;
-    BUF->len[1] = (uip_len - UIP_LLH_LEN) & 0xff;
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-
-    memcpy(uip_appdata, (u8_t *)uip_appdata + len1, len2);
-
-    uip_add32(BUF->seqno, len1);
-    BUF->seqno[0] = uip_acc32[0];
-    BUF->seqno[1] = uip_acc32[1];
-    BUF->seqno[2] = uip_acc32[2];
-    BUF->seqno[3] = uip_acc32[3];
-
-    /* Recalculate the TCP checksum. */
-    BUF->tcpchksum = 0;
-    BUF->tcpchksum = ~(uip_tcpchksum());
-
-#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6
-    /* Recalculate the IP checksum. */
-    BUF->ipchksum = 0;
-    BUF->ipchksum = ~(uip_ipchksum());
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-
-    /* Transmit the second packet. */
-#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
-    tcpip_ipv6_output();
-#else
-	if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_Device)
-	  RNDIS_Device_SendPacket(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Device, uip_buf, uip_len);
-	else
-	  RNDIS_Host_SendPacket(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Host, uip_buf, uip_len);
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-    return;
-  }
-#endif /* UIP_TCP */
-
-  /*    uip_fw_output();*/
-#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
-	tcpip_ipv6_output();
-#else
-	if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_Device)
-	  RNDIS_Device_SendPacket(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Device, uip_buf, uip_len);
-	else
-	  RNDIS_Host_SendPacket(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Host, uip_buf, uip_len);
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-}
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip-split.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip-split.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 0c768ce40..000000000
--- a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip-split.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,104 +0,0 @@
-/*
- * Copyright (c) 2004, Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
- * All rights reserved.
- *
- * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
- * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
- * are met:
- * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
- *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
- * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
- *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
- *    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
- * 3. Neither the name of the Institute nor the names of its contributors
- *    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
- *    without specific prior written permission.
- *
- * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INSTITUTE AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
- * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
- * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
- * ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE INSTITUTE OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
- * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
- * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
- * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
- * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
- * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
- * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
- * SUCH DAMAGE.
- *
- * This file is part of the Contiki operating system.
- *
- * Author: Adam Dunkels <adam@sics.se>
- *
- * $Id: uip-split.h,v 1.1 2006/06/17 22:41:19 adamdunkels Exp $
- */
-/**
- * \addtogroup uip
- * @{
- */
-
-/**
- * \defgroup uipsplit uIP TCP throughput booster hack
- * @{
- *
- * The basic uIP TCP implementation only allows each TCP connection to
- * have a single TCP segment in flight at any given time. Because of
- * the delayed ACK algorithm employed by most TCP receivers, uIP's
- * limit on the amount of in-flight TCP segments seriously reduces the
- * maximum achievable throughput for sending data from uIP.
- *
- * The uip-split module is a hack which tries to remedy this
- * situation. By splitting maximum sized outgoing TCP segments into
- * two, the delayed ACK algorithm is not invoked at TCP
- * receivers. This improves the throughput when sending data from uIP
- * by orders of magnitude.
- *
- * The uip-split module uses the uip-fw module (uIP IP packet
- * forwarding) for sending packets. Therefore, the uip-fw module must
- * be set up with the appropriate network interfaces for this module
- * to work.
- */
-
-
-/**
- * \file
- * Module for splitting outbound TCP segments in two to avoid the
- * delayed ACK throughput degradation.
- * \author
- * Adam Dunkels <adam@sics.se>
- *
- */
-
-#ifndef __UIP_SPLIT_H__
-#define __UIP_SPLIT_H__
-
-#include <string.h>
-#include <uip.h>
-
-#include "../../USBHostMode.h"
-
-#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-
-/**
- * Handle outgoing packets.
- *
- * This function inspects an outgoing packet in the uip_buf buffer and
- * sends it out using the uip_fw_output() function. If the packet is a
- * full-sized TCP segment it will be split into two segments and
- * transmitted separately. This function should be called instead of
- * the actual device driver output function, or the uip_fw_output()
- * function.
- *
- * The headers of the outgoing packet is assumed to be in the uip_buf
- * buffer and the payload is assumed to be wherever uip_appdata
- * points. The length of the outgoing packet is assumed to be in the
- * uip_len variable.
- *
- */
-void uip_split_output(void);
-void uip_add32(u8_t *op32, u16_t op16);
-#endif /* __UIP_SPLIT_H__ */
-
-/** @} */
-/** @} */
-
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip.c
deleted file mode 100644
index fead75775..000000000
--- a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1941 +0,0 @@
-#define DEBUG_PRINTF(...) /*printf(__VA_ARGS__)*/
-
-/**
- * \addtogroup uip
- * @{
- */
-
-/**
- * \file
- * The uIP TCP/IP stack code.
- * \author Adam Dunkels <adam@dunkels.com>
- */
-
-/*
- * Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Adam Dunkels.
- * All rights reserved.
- *
- * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
- * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
- * are met:
- * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
- *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
- * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
- *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
- *    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
- * 3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote
- *    products derived from this software without specific prior
- *    written permission.
- *
- * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS
- * OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
- * WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
- * ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY
- * DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
- * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
- * GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
- * INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
- * WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
- * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
- * SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
- *
- * This file is part of the uIP TCP/IP stack.
- *
- * $Id: uip.c,v 1.15 2008/10/15 08:08:32 adamdunkels Exp $
- *
- */
-
-/*
- * uIP is a small implementation of the IP, UDP and TCP protocols (as
- * well as some basic ICMP stuff). The implementation couples the IP,
- * UDP, TCP and the application layers very tightly. To keep the size
- * of the compiled code down, this code frequently uses the goto
- * statement. While it would be possible to break the uip_process()
- * function into many smaller functions, this would increase the code
- * size because of the overhead of parameter passing and the fact that
- * the optimizer would not be as efficient.
- *
- * The principle is that we have a small buffer, called the uip_buf,
- * in which the device driver puts an incoming packet. The TCP/IP
- * stack parses the headers in the packet, and calls the
- * application. If the remote host has sent data to the application,
- * this data is present in the uip_buf and the application read the
- * data from there. It is up to the application to put this data into
- * a byte stream if needed. The application will not be fed with data
- * that is out of sequence.
- *
- * If the application whishes to send data to the peer, it should put
- * its data into the uip_buf. The uip_appdata pointer points to the
- * first available byte. The TCP/IP stack will calculate the
- * checksums, and fill in the necessary header fields and finally send
- * the packet back to the peer.
-*/
-
-#include "uip.h"
-#include "uipopt.h"
-#include "uip_arp.h"
-
-#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6 /* If UIP_CONF_IPV6 is defined, we compile the
-		      uip6.c file instead of this one. Therefore
-		      this #ifndef removes the entire compilation
-		      output of the uip.c file */
-
-
-#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
-#include "net/uip-neighbor.h"
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-
-#include <string.h>
-
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Variable definitions. */
-
-
-/* The IP address of this host. If it is defined to be fixed (by
-   setting UIP_FIXEDADDR to 1 in uipopt.h), the address is set
-   here. Otherwise, the address */
-#if UIP_FIXEDADDR > 0
-const uip_ipaddr_t uip_hostaddr =
-  { UIP_IPADDR0, UIP_IPADDR1, UIP_IPADDR2, UIP_IPADDR3 };
-const uip_ipaddr_t uip_draddr =
-  { UIP_DRIPADDR0, UIP_DRIPADDR1, UIP_DRIPADDR2, UIP_DRIPADDR3 };
-const uip_ipaddr_t uip_netmask =
-  { UIP_NETMASK0, UIP_NETMASK1, UIP_NETMASK2, UIP_NETMASK3 };
-#else
-uip_ipaddr_t uip_hostaddr, uip_draddr, uip_netmask;
-#endif /* UIP_FIXEDADDR */
-
-const uip_ipaddr_t uip_broadcast_addr =
-#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
-  { { 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff,
-      0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff } };
-#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-  { { 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff } };
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-const uip_ipaddr_t uip_all_zeroes_addr = { { 0x0, /* rest is 0 */ } };
-
-#if UIP_FIXEDETHADDR
-const struct uip_eth_addr uip_ethaddr = {{UIP_ETHADDR0,
-					  UIP_ETHADDR1,
-					  UIP_ETHADDR2,
-					  UIP_ETHADDR3,
-					  UIP_ETHADDR4,
-					  UIP_ETHADDR5}};
-#else
-struct uip_eth_addr uip_ethaddr = {{0,0,0,0,0,0}};
-#endif
-
-#ifndef UIP_CONF_EXTERNAL_BUFFER
-u8_t uip_buf[UIP_BUFSIZE + 2];   /* The packet buffer that contains
-				    incoming packets. */
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_EXTERNAL_BUFFER */
-
-void *uip_appdata;               /* The uip_appdata pointer points to
-				    application data. */
-void *uip_sappdata;              /* The uip_appdata pointer points to
-				    the application data which is to
-				    be sent. */
-#if UIP_URGDATA > 0
-void *uip_urgdata;               /* The uip_urgdata pointer points to
-   				    urgent data (out-of-band data), if
-   				    present. */
-u16_t uip_urglen, uip_surglen;
-#endif /* UIP_URGDATA > 0 */
-
-u16_t uip_len, uip_slen;
-                             /* The uip_len is either 8 or 16 bits,
-				depending on the maximum packet
-				size. */
-
-u8_t uip_flags;     /* The uip_flags variable is used for
-				communication between the TCP/IP stack
-				and the application program. */
-struct uip_conn *uip_conn;   /* uip_conn always points to the current
-				connection. */
-
-struct uip_conn uip_conns[UIP_CONNS];
-                             /* The uip_conns array holds all TCP
-				connections. */
-u16_t uip_listenports[UIP_LISTENPORTS];
-                             /* The uip_listenports list all currently
-				listening ports. */
-#if UIP_UDP
-struct uip_udp_conn *uip_udp_conn;
-struct uip_udp_conn uip_udp_conns[UIP_UDP_CONNS];
-#endif /* UIP_UDP */
-
-static u16_t ipid;           /* Ths ipid variable is an increasing
-				number that is used for the IP ID
-				field. */
-
-void uip_setipid(u16_t id) { ipid = id; }
-
-static u8_t iss[4];          /* The iss variable is used for the TCP
-				initial sequence number. */
-
-#if UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN
-static u16_t lastport;       /* Keeps track of the last port used for
-				a new connection. */
-#endif /* UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN */
-
-/* Temporary variables. */
-u8_t uip_acc32[4];
-static u8_t c, opt;
-static u16_t tmp16;
-
-/* Structures and definitions. */
-#define TCP_FIN 0x01
-#define TCP_SYN 0x02
-#define TCP_RST 0x04
-#define TCP_PSH 0x08
-#define TCP_ACK 0x10
-#define TCP_URG 0x20
-#define TCP_CTL 0x3f
-
-#define TCP_OPT_END     0   /* End of TCP options list */
-#define TCP_OPT_NOOP    1   /* "No-operation" TCP option */
-#define TCP_OPT_MSS     2   /* Maximum segment size TCP option */
-
-#define TCP_OPT_MSS_LEN 4   /* Length of TCP MSS option. */
-
-#define ICMP_ECHO_REPLY 0
-#define ICMP_ECHO       8
-
-#define ICMP_DEST_UNREACHABLE        3
-#define ICMP_PORT_UNREACHABLE        3
-
-#define ICMP6_ECHO_REPLY             129
-#define ICMP6_ECHO                   128
-#define ICMP6_NEIGHBOR_SOLICITATION  135
-#define ICMP6_NEIGHBOR_ADVERTISEMENT 136
-
-#define ICMP6_FLAG_S (1 << 6)
-
-#define ICMP6_OPTION_SOURCE_LINK_ADDRESS 1
-#define ICMP6_OPTION_TARGET_LINK_ADDRESS 2
-
-
-/* Macros. */
-#define BUF ((struct uip_tcpip_hdr *)&uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN])
-#define FBUF ((struct uip_tcpip_hdr *)&uip_reassbuf[0])
-#define ICMPBUF ((struct uip_icmpip_hdr *)&uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN])
-#define UDPBUF ((struct uip_udpip_hdr *)&uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN])
-
-
-#if UIP_STATISTICS == 1
-struct uip_stats uip_stat;
-#define UIP_STAT(s) s
-#else
-#define UIP_STAT(s)
-#endif /* UIP_STATISTICS == 1 */
-
-#if UIP_LOGGING == 1
-#include <stdio.h>
-void uip_log(char *msg);
-#define UIP_LOG(m) uip_log(m)
-#else
-#define UIP_LOG(m)
-#endif /* UIP_LOGGING == 1 */
-
-#if ! UIP_ARCH_ADD32
-void
-uip_add32(u8_t *op32, u16_t op16)
-{
-  uip_acc32[3] = op32[3] + (op16 & 0xff);
-  uip_acc32[2] = op32[2] + (op16 >> 8);
-  uip_acc32[1] = op32[1];
-  uip_acc32[0] = op32[0];
-
-  if(uip_acc32[2] < (op16 >> 8)) {
-    ++uip_acc32[1];
-    if(uip_acc32[1] == 0) {
-      ++uip_acc32[0];
-    }
-  }
-
-
-  if(uip_acc32[3] < (op16 & 0xff)) {
-    ++uip_acc32[2];
-    if(uip_acc32[2] == 0) {
-      ++uip_acc32[1];
-      if(uip_acc32[1] == 0) {
-	++uip_acc32[0];
-      }
-    }
-  }
-}
-
-#endif /* UIP_ARCH_ADD32 */
-
-#if ! UIP_ARCH_CHKSUM
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-static u16_t
-chksum(u16_t sum, const u8_t *data, u16_t len)
-{
-  u16_t t;
-  const u8_t *dataptr;
-  const u8_t *last_byte;
-
-  dataptr = data;
-  last_byte = data + len - 1;
-
-  while(dataptr < last_byte) {	/* At least two more bytes */
-    t = (dataptr[0] << 8) + dataptr[1];
-    sum += t;
-    if(sum < t) {
-      sum++;		/* carry */
-    }
-    dataptr += 2;
-  }
-
-  if(dataptr == last_byte) {
-    t = (dataptr[0] << 8) + 0;
-    sum += t;
-    if(sum < t) {
-      sum++;		/* carry */
-    }
-  }
-
-  /* Return sum in host byte order. */
-  return sum;
-}
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-u16_t
-uip_chksum(u16_t *data, u16_t len)
-{
-  return htons(chksum(0, (u8_t *)data, len));
-}
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#ifndef UIP_ARCH_IPCHKSUM
-u16_t
-uip_ipchksum(void)
-{
-  u16_t sum;
-
-  sum = chksum(0, &uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN], UIP_IPH_LEN);
-  DEBUG_PRINTF("uip_ipchksum: sum 0x%04x\n", sum);
-  return (sum == 0) ? 0xffff : htons(sum);
-}
-#endif
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-static u16_t
-upper_layer_chksum(u8_t proto)
-{
-  u16_t upper_layer_len;
-  u16_t sum;
-
-#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
-  upper_layer_len = (((u16_t)(BUF->len[0]) << 8) + BUF->len[1]);
-#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-  upper_layer_len = (((u16_t)(BUF->len[0]) << 8) + BUF->len[1]) - UIP_IPH_LEN;
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-
-  /* First sum pseudo-header. */
-
-  /* IP protocol and length fields. This addition cannot carry. */
-  sum = upper_layer_len + proto;
-  /* Sum IP source and destination addresses. */
-  sum = chksum(sum, (u8_t *)&BUF->srcipaddr, 2 * sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t));
-
-  /* Sum TCP header and data. */
-  sum = chksum(sum, &uip_buf[UIP_IPH_LEN + UIP_LLH_LEN],
-	       upper_layer_len);
-
-  return (sum == 0) ? 0xffff : htons(sum);
-}
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
-u16_t
-uip_icmp6chksum(void)
-{
-  return upper_layer_chksum(UIP_PROTO_ICMP6);
-
-}
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-u16_t
-uip_tcpchksum(void)
-{
-  return upper_layer_chksum(UIP_PROTO_TCP);
-}
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#if UIP_UDP_CHECKSUMS
-u16_t
-uip_udpchksum(void)
-{
-  return upper_layer_chksum(UIP_PROTO_UDP);
-}
-#endif /* UIP_UDP_CHECKSUMS */
-#endif /* UIP_ARCH_CHKSUM */
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-void
-uip_init(void)
-{
-  for(c = 0; c < UIP_LISTENPORTS; ++c) {
-    uip_listenports[c] = 0;
-  }
-  for(c = 0; c < UIP_CONNS; ++c) {
-    uip_conns[c].tcpstateflags = UIP_CLOSED;
-  }
-#if UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN
-  lastport = 1024;
-#endif /* UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN */
-
-#if UIP_UDP
-  for(c = 0; c < UIP_UDP_CONNS; ++c) {
-    uip_udp_conns[c].lport = 0;
-  }
-#endif /* UIP_UDP */
-
-
-  /* IPv4 initialization. */
-#if UIP_FIXEDADDR == 0
-  /*  uip_hostaddr[0] = uip_hostaddr[1] = 0;*/
-#endif /* UIP_FIXEDADDR */
-
-}
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#if UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN
-struct uip_conn *
-uip_connect(uip_ipaddr_t *ripaddr, u16_t rport)
-{
-  register struct uip_conn *conn, *cconn;
-
-  /* Find an unused local port. */
- again:
-  ++lastport;
-
-  if(lastport >= 32000) {
-    lastport = 4096;
-  }
-
-  /* Check if this port is already in use, and if so try to find
-     another one. */
-  for(c = 0; c < UIP_CONNS; ++c) {
-    conn = &uip_conns[c];
-    if(conn->tcpstateflags != UIP_CLOSED &&
-       conn->lport == htons(lastport)) {
-      goto again;
-    }
-  }
-
-  conn = 0;
-  for(c = 0; c < UIP_CONNS; ++c) {
-    cconn = &uip_conns[c];
-    if(cconn->tcpstateflags == UIP_CLOSED) {
-      conn = cconn;
-      break;
-    }
-    if(cconn->tcpstateflags == UIP_TIME_WAIT) {
-      if(conn == 0 ||
-	 cconn->timer > conn->timer) {
-	conn = cconn;
-      }
-    }
-  }
-
-  if(conn == 0) {
-    return 0;
-  }
-
-  conn->tcpstateflags = UIP_SYN_SENT;
-
-  conn->snd_nxt[0] = iss[0];
-  conn->snd_nxt[1] = iss[1];
-  conn->snd_nxt[2] = iss[2];
-  conn->snd_nxt[3] = iss[3];
-
-  conn->initialmss = conn->mss = UIP_TCP_MSS;
-
-  conn->len = 1;   /* TCP length of the SYN is one. */
-  conn->nrtx = 0;
-  conn->timer = 1; /* Send the SYN next time around. */
-  conn->rto = UIP_RTO;
-  conn->sa = 0;
-  conn->sv = 16;   /* Initial value of the RTT variance. */
-  conn->lport = htons(lastport);
-  conn->rport = rport;
-  uip_ipaddr_copy(&conn->ripaddr, ripaddr);
-
-  return conn;
-}
-#endif /* UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN */
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#if UIP_UDP
-struct uip_udp_conn *
-uip_udp_new(const uip_ipaddr_t *ripaddr, u16_t rport)
-{
-  register struct uip_udp_conn *conn;
-
-  /* Find an unused local port. */
- again:
-  ++lastport;
-
-  if(lastport >= 32000) {
-    lastport = 4096;
-  }
-
-  for(c = 0; c < UIP_UDP_CONNS; ++c) {
-    if(uip_udp_conns[c].lport == htons(lastport)) {
-      goto again;
-    }
-  }
-
-
-  conn = 0;
-  for(c = 0; c < UIP_UDP_CONNS; ++c) {
-    if(uip_udp_conns[c].lport == 0) {
-      conn = &uip_udp_conns[c];
-      break;
-    }
-  }
-
-  if(conn == 0) {
-    return 0;
-  }
-
-  conn->lport = HTONS(lastport);
-  conn->rport = rport;
-  if(ripaddr == NULL) {
-    memset(&conn->ripaddr, 0, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t));
-  } else {
-    uip_ipaddr_copy(&conn->ripaddr, ripaddr);
-  }
-  conn->ttl = UIP_TTL;
-
-  return conn;
-}
-#endif /* UIP_UDP */
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-void
-uip_unlisten(u16_t port)
-{
-  for(c = 0; c < UIP_LISTENPORTS; ++c) {
-    if(uip_listenports[c] == port) {
-      uip_listenports[c] = 0;
-      return;
-    }
-  }
-}
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-void
-uip_listen(u16_t port)
-{
-  for(c = 0; c < UIP_LISTENPORTS; ++c) {
-    if(uip_listenports[c] == 0) {
-      uip_listenports[c] = port;
-      return;
-    }
-  }
-}
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* XXX: IP fragment reassembly: not well-tested. */
-
-#if UIP_REASSEMBLY && !UIP_CONF_IPV6
-#define UIP_REASS_BUFSIZE (UIP_BUFSIZE - UIP_LLH_LEN)
-static u8_t uip_reassbuf[UIP_REASS_BUFSIZE];
-static u8_t uip_reassbitmap[UIP_REASS_BUFSIZE / (8 * 8)];
-static const u8_t bitmap_bits[8] = {0xff, 0x7f, 0x3f, 0x1f,
-				    0x0f, 0x07, 0x03, 0x01};
-static u16_t uip_reasslen;
-static u8_t uip_reassflags;
-#define UIP_REASS_FLAG_LASTFRAG 0x01
-static u8_t uip_reasstmr;
-
-#define IP_MF   0x20
-
-static u8_t
-uip_reass(void)
-{
-  u16_t offset, len;
-  u16_t i;
-
-  /* If ip_reasstmr is zero, no packet is present in the buffer, so we
-     write the IP header of the fragment into the reassembly
-     buffer. The timer is updated with the maximum age. */
-  if(uip_reasstmr == 0) {
-    memcpy(uip_reassbuf, &BUF->vhl, UIP_IPH_LEN);
-    uip_reasstmr = UIP_REASS_MAXAGE;
-    uip_reassflags = 0;
-    /* Clear the bitmap. */
-    memset(uip_reassbitmap, 0, sizeof(uip_reassbitmap));
-  }
-
-  /* Check if the incoming fragment matches the one currently present
-     in the reasembly buffer. If so, we proceed with copying the
-     fragment into the buffer. */
-  if(BUF->srcipaddr[0] == FBUF->srcipaddr[0] &&
-     BUF->srcipaddr[1] == FBUF->srcipaddr[1] &&
-     BUF->destipaddr[0] == FBUF->destipaddr[0] &&
-     BUF->destipaddr[1] == FBUF->destipaddr[1] &&
-     BUF->ipid[0] == FBUF->ipid[0] &&
-     BUF->ipid[1] == FBUF->ipid[1]) {
-
-    len = (BUF->len[0] << 8) + BUF->len[1] - (BUF->vhl & 0x0f) * 4;
-    offset = (((BUF->ipoffset[0] & 0x3f) << 8) + BUF->ipoffset[1]) * 8;
-
-    /* If the offset or the offset + fragment length overflows the
-       reassembly buffer, we discard the entire packet. */
-    if(offset > UIP_REASS_BUFSIZE ||
-       offset + len > UIP_REASS_BUFSIZE) {
-      uip_reasstmr = 0;
-      goto nullreturn;
-    }
-
-    /* Copy the fragment into the reassembly buffer, at the right
-       offset. */
-    memcpy(&uip_reassbuf[UIP_IPH_LEN + offset],
-	   (char *)BUF + (int)((BUF->vhl & 0x0f) * 4),
-	   len);
-
-    /* Update the bitmap. */
-    if(offset / (8 * 8) == (offset + len) / (8 * 8)) {
-      /* If the two endpoints are in the same byte, we only update
-	 that byte. */
-
-      uip_reassbitmap[offset / (8 * 8)] |=
-	     bitmap_bits[(offset / 8 ) & 7] &
-	     ~bitmap_bits[((offset + len) / 8 ) & 7];
-    } else {
-      /* If the two endpoints are in different bytes, we update the
-	 bytes in the endpoints and fill the stuff in-between with
-	 0xff. */
-      uip_reassbitmap[offset / (8 * 8)] |=
-	bitmap_bits[(offset / 8 ) & 7];
-      for(i = 1 + offset / (8 * 8); i < (offset + len) / (8 * 8); ++i) {
-	uip_reassbitmap[i] = 0xff;
-      }
-      uip_reassbitmap[(offset + len) / (8 * 8)] |=
-	~bitmap_bits[((offset + len) / 8 ) & 7];
-    }
-
-    /* If this fragment has the More Fragments flag set to zero, we
-       know that this is the last fragment, so we can calculate the
-       size of the entire packet. We also set the
-       IP_REASS_FLAG_LASTFRAG flag to indicate that we have received
-       the final fragment. */
-
-    if((BUF->ipoffset[0] & IP_MF) == 0) {
-      uip_reassflags |= UIP_REASS_FLAG_LASTFRAG;
-      uip_reasslen = offset + len;
-    }
-
-    /* Finally, we check if we have a full packet in the buffer. We do
-       this by checking if we have the last fragment and if all bits
-       in the bitmap are set. */
-    if(uip_reassflags & UIP_REASS_FLAG_LASTFRAG) {
-      /* Check all bytes up to and including all but the last byte in
-	 the bitmap. */
-      for(i = 0; i < uip_reasslen / (8 * 8) - 1; ++i) {
-	if(uip_reassbitmap[i] != 0xff) {
-	  goto nullreturn;
-	}
-      }
-      /* Check the last byte in the bitmap. It should contain just the
-	 right amount of bits. */
-      if(uip_reassbitmap[uip_reasslen / (8 * 8)] !=
-	 (u8_t)~bitmap_bits[uip_reasslen / 8 & 7]) {
-	goto nullreturn;
-      }
-
-      /* If we have come this far, we have a full packet in the
-	 buffer, so we allocate a pbuf and copy the packet into it. We
-	 also reset the timer. */
-      uip_reasstmr = 0;
-      memcpy(BUF, FBUF, uip_reasslen);
-
-      /* Pretend to be a "normal" (i.e., not fragmented) IP packet
-	 from now on. */
-      BUF->ipoffset[0] = BUF->ipoffset[1] = 0;
-      BUF->len[0] = uip_reasslen >> 8;
-      BUF->len[1] = uip_reasslen & 0xff;
-      BUF->ipchksum = 0;
-      BUF->ipchksum = ~(uip_ipchksum());
-
-      return uip_reasslen;
-    }
-  }
-
- nullreturn:
-  return 0;
-}
-#endif /* UIP_REASSEMBLY */
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-static void
-uip_add_rcv_nxt(u16_t n)
-{
-  uip_add32(uip_conn->rcv_nxt, n);
-  uip_conn->rcv_nxt[0] = uip_acc32[0];
-  uip_conn->rcv_nxt[1] = uip_acc32[1];
-  uip_conn->rcv_nxt[2] = uip_acc32[2];
-  uip_conn->rcv_nxt[3] = uip_acc32[3];
-}
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-void
-uip_process(u8_t flag)
-{
-  register struct uip_conn *uip_connr = uip_conn;
-
-#if UIP_UDP
-  if(flag == UIP_UDP_SEND_CONN) {
-    goto udp_send;
-  }
-#endif /* UIP_UDP */
-
-  uip_sappdata = uip_appdata = &uip_buf[UIP_IPTCPH_LEN + UIP_LLH_LEN];
-
-  /* Check if we were invoked because of a poll request for a
-     particular connection. */
-  if(flag == UIP_POLL_REQUEST) {
-    if((uip_connr->tcpstateflags & UIP_TS_MASK) == UIP_ESTABLISHED &&
-       !uip_outstanding(uip_connr)) {
-	uip_len = uip_slen = 0;
-	uip_flags = UIP_POLL;
-	UIP_APPCALL();
-	goto appsend;
-    }
-    goto drop;
-
-    /* Check if we were invoked because of the periodic timer firing. */
-  } else if(flag == UIP_TIMER) {
-#if UIP_REASSEMBLY
-    if(uip_reasstmr != 0) {
-      --uip_reasstmr;
-    }
-#endif /* UIP_REASSEMBLY */
-    /* Increase the initial sequence number. */
-    if(++iss[3] == 0) {
-      if(++iss[2] == 0) {
-	if(++iss[1] == 0) {
-	  ++iss[0];
-	}
-      }
-    }
-
-    /* Reset the length variables. */
-    uip_len = 0;
-    uip_slen = 0;
-
-    /* Check if the connection is in a state in which we simply wait
-       for the connection to time out. If so, we increase the
-       connection's timer and remove the connection if it times
-       out. */
-    if(uip_connr->tcpstateflags == UIP_TIME_WAIT ||
-       uip_connr->tcpstateflags == UIP_FIN_WAIT_2) {
-      ++(uip_connr->timer);
-      if(uip_connr->timer == UIP_TIME_WAIT_TIMEOUT) {
-	uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_CLOSED;
-      }
-    } else if(uip_connr->tcpstateflags != UIP_CLOSED) {
-      /* If the connection has outstanding data, we increase the
-	 connection's timer and see if it has reached the RTO value
-	 in which case we retransmit. */
-      if(uip_outstanding(uip_connr)) {
-	if(uip_connr->timer-- == 0) {
-	  if(uip_connr->nrtx == UIP_MAXRTX ||
-	     ((uip_connr->tcpstateflags == UIP_SYN_SENT ||
-	       uip_connr->tcpstateflags == UIP_SYN_RCVD) &&
-	      uip_connr->nrtx == UIP_MAXSYNRTX)) {
-	    uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_CLOSED;
-
-	    /* We call UIP_APPCALL() with uip_flags set to
-	       UIP_TIMEDOUT to inform the application that the
-	       connection has timed out. */
-	    uip_flags = UIP_TIMEDOUT;
-	    UIP_APPCALL();
-
-	    /* We also send a reset packet to the remote host. */
-	    BUF->flags = TCP_RST | TCP_ACK;
-	    goto tcp_send_nodata;
-	  }
-
-	  /* Exponential back-off. */
-	  uip_connr->timer = UIP_RTO << (uip_connr->nrtx > 4?
-					 4:
-					 uip_connr->nrtx);
-	  ++(uip_connr->nrtx);
-
-	  /* Ok, so we need to retransmit. We do this differently
-	     depending on which state we are in. In ESTABLISHED, we
-	     call upon the application so that it may prepare the
-	     data for the retransmit. In SYN_RCVD, we resend the
-	     SYNACK that we sent earlier and in LAST_ACK we have to
-	     retransmit our FINACK. */
-	  UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.tcp.rexmit);
-	  switch(uip_connr->tcpstateflags & UIP_TS_MASK) {
-	  case UIP_SYN_RCVD:
-	    /* In the SYN_RCVD state, we should retransmit our
-               SYNACK. */
-	    goto tcp_send_synack;
-
-#if UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN
-	  case UIP_SYN_SENT:
-	    /* In the SYN_SENT state, we retransmit out SYN. */
-	    BUF->flags = 0;
-	    goto tcp_send_syn;
-#endif /* UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN */
-
-	  case UIP_ESTABLISHED:
-	    /* In the ESTABLISHED state, we call upon the application
-               to do the actual retransmit after which we jump into
-               the code for sending out the packet (the apprexmit
-               label). */
-	    uip_flags = UIP_REXMIT;
-	    UIP_APPCALL();
-	    goto apprexmit;
-
-	  case UIP_FIN_WAIT_1:
-	  case UIP_CLOSING:
-	  case UIP_LAST_ACK:
-	    /* In all these states we should retransmit a FINACK. */
-	    goto tcp_send_finack;
-
-	  }
-	}
-      } else if((uip_connr->tcpstateflags & UIP_TS_MASK) == UIP_ESTABLISHED) {
-	/* If there was no need for a retransmission, we poll the
-           application for new data. */
-	uip_len = uip_slen = 0;
-	uip_flags = UIP_POLL;
-	UIP_APPCALL();
-	goto appsend;
-      }
-    }
-    goto drop;
-  }
-#if UIP_UDP
-  if(flag == UIP_UDP_TIMER) {
-    if(uip_udp_conn->lport != 0) {
-      uip_conn = NULL;
-      uip_sappdata = uip_appdata = &uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_IPUDPH_LEN];
-      uip_len = uip_slen = 0;
-      uip_flags = UIP_POLL;
-      UIP_UDP_APPCALL();
-      goto udp_send;
-    } else {
-      goto drop;
-    }
-  }
-#endif
-
-  /* This is where the input processing starts. */
-  UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.recv);
-
-  /* Start of IP input header processing code. */
-
-#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
-  /* Check validity of the IP header. */
-  if((BUF->vtc & 0xf0) != 0x60)  { /* IP version and header length. */
-    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.drop);
-    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.vhlerr);
-    UIP_LOG("ipv6: invalid version.");
-    goto drop;
-  }
-#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-  /* Check validity of the IP header. */
-  if(BUF->vhl != 0x45)  { /* IP version and header length. */
-    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.drop);
-    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.vhlerr);
-    UIP_LOG("ip: invalid version or header length.");
-    goto drop;
-  }
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-
-  /* Check the size of the packet. If the size reported to us in
-     uip_len is smaller the size reported in the IP header, we assume
-     that the packet has been corrupted in transit. If the size of
-     uip_len is larger than the size reported in the IP packet header,
-     the packet has been padded and we set uip_len to the correct
-     value.. */
-
-  if((BUF->len[0] << 8) + BUF->len[1] <= uip_len) {
-    uip_len = (BUF->len[0] << 8) + BUF->len[1];
-#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
-    uip_len += 40; /* The length reported in the IPv6 header is the
-		      length of the payload that follows the
-		      header. However, uIP uses the uip_len variable
-		      for holding the size of the entire packet,
-		      including the IP header. For IPv4 this is not a
-		      problem as the length field in the IPv4 header
-		      contains the length of the entire packet. But
-		      for IPv6 we need to add the size of the IPv6
-		      header (40 bytes). */
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-  } else {
-    UIP_LOG("ip: packet shorter than reported in IP header.");
-    goto drop;
-  }
-
-#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6
-  /* Check the fragment flag. */
-  if((BUF->ipoffset[0] & 0x3f) != 0 ||
-     BUF->ipoffset[1] != 0) {
-#if UIP_REASSEMBLY
-    uip_len = uip_reass();
-    if(uip_len == 0) {
-      goto drop;
-    }
-#else /* UIP_REASSEMBLY */
-    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.drop);
-    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.fragerr);
-    UIP_LOG("ip: fragment dropped.");
-    goto drop;
-#endif /* UIP_REASSEMBLY */
-  }
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-
-  if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&uip_hostaddr, &uip_all_zeroes_addr)) {
-    /* If we are configured to use ping IP address configuration and
-       hasn't been assigned an IP address yet, we accept all ICMP
-       packets. */
-#if UIP_PINGADDRCONF && !UIP_CONF_IPV6
-    if(BUF->proto == UIP_PROTO_ICMP) {
-      UIP_LOG("ip: possible ping config packet received.");
-      goto icmp_input;
-    } else {
-      UIP_LOG("ip: packet dropped since no address assigned.");
-      goto drop;
-    }
-#endif /* UIP_PINGADDRCONF */
-
-  } else {
-    /* If IP broadcast support is configured, we check for a broadcast
-       UDP packet, which may be destined to us. */
-#if UIP_BROADCAST
-    DEBUG_PRINTF("UDP IP checksum 0x%04x\n", uip_ipchksum());
-    if(BUF->proto == UIP_PROTO_UDP &&
-       uip_ipaddr_cmp(&BUF->destipaddr, &uip_broadcast_addr))
-	{
-		if (uip_ipaddr_cmp(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_all_zeroes_addr))
-		  uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_broadcast_addr);
-
-		goto udp_input;
-    }
-#endif /* UIP_BROADCAST */
-
-    /* Check if the packet is destined for our IP address. */
-#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6
-    if(!uip_ipaddr_cmp(&BUF->destipaddr, &uip_hostaddr)) {
-      UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.drop);
-      goto drop;
-    }
-#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-    /* For IPv6, packet reception is a little trickier as we need to
-       make sure that we listen to certain multicast addresses (all
-       hosts multicast address, and the solicited-node multicast
-       address) as well. However, we will cheat here and accept all
-       multicast packets that are sent to the ff02::/16 addresses. */
-    if(!uip_ipaddr_cmp(&BUF->destipaddr, &uip_hostaddr) &&
-       BUF->destipaddr.u16[0] != HTONS(0xff02)) {
-      UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.drop);
-      goto drop;
-    }
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-  }
-
-#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6
-  if(uip_ipchksum() != 0xffff) { /* Compute and check the IP header
-				    checksum. */
-    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.drop);
-    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.chkerr);
-    UIP_LOG("ip: bad checksum.");
-    goto drop;
-  }
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-
-  if(BUF->proto == UIP_PROTO_TCP) { /* Check for TCP packet. If so,
-				       proceed with TCP input
-				       processing. */
-    goto tcp_input;
-  }
-
-#if UIP_UDP
-  if(BUF->proto == UIP_PROTO_UDP) {
-    goto udp_input;
-  }
-#endif /* UIP_UDP */
-
-#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6
-  /* ICMPv4 processing code follows. */
-  if(BUF->proto != UIP_PROTO_ICMP) { /* We only allow ICMP packets from
-					here. */
-    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.drop);
-    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.protoerr);
-    UIP_LOG("ip: neither tcp nor icmp.");
-    goto drop;
-  }
-
-#if UIP_PINGADDRCONF
- icmp_input:
-#endif /* UIP_PINGADDRCONF */
-  UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.icmp.recv);
-
-  /* ICMP echo (i.e., ping) processing. This is simple, we only change
-     the ICMP type from ECHO to ECHO_REPLY and adjust the ICMP
-     checksum before we return the packet. */
-  if(ICMPBUF->type != ICMP_ECHO) {
-    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.icmp.drop);
-    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.icmp.typeerr);
-    UIP_LOG("icmp: not icmp echo.");
-    goto drop;
-  }
-
-  /* If we are configured to use ping IP address assignment, we use
-     the destination IP address of this ping packet and assign it to
-     yourself. */
-#if UIP_PINGADDRCONF
-  if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&uip_hostaddr, &uip_all_zeroes_addr)) {
-    uip_hostaddr = BUF->destipaddr;
-  }
-#endif /* UIP_PINGADDRCONF */
-
-  ICMPBUF->type = ICMP_ECHO_REPLY;
-
-  if(ICMPBUF->icmpchksum >= HTONS(0xffff - (ICMP_ECHO << 8))) {
-    ICMPBUF->icmpchksum += HTONS(ICMP_ECHO << 8) + 1;
-  } else {
-    ICMPBUF->icmpchksum += HTONS(ICMP_ECHO << 8);
-  }
-
-  /* Swap IP addresses. */
-  uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->destipaddr, &BUF->srcipaddr);
-  uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_hostaddr);
-
-  UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.icmp.sent);
-  BUF->ttl = UIP_TTL;
-  goto ip_send_nolen;
-
-  /* End of IPv4 input header processing code. */
-#else /* !UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-
-  /* This is IPv6 ICMPv6 processing code. */
-  DEBUG_PRINTF("icmp6_input: length %d\n", uip_len);
-
-  if(BUF->proto != UIP_PROTO_ICMP6) { /* We only allow ICMPv6 packets from
-					 here. */
-    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.drop);
-    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.protoerr);
-    UIP_LOG("ip: neither tcp nor icmp6.");
-    goto drop;
-  }
-
-  UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.icmp.recv);
-
-  /* If we get a neighbor solicitation for our address we should send
-     a neighbor advertisement message back. */
-  if(ICMPBUF->type == ICMP6_NEIGHBOR_SOLICITATION) {
-    if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&ICMPBUF->icmp6data, &uip_hostaddr)) {
-
-      if(ICMPBUF->options[0] == ICMP6_OPTION_SOURCE_LINK_ADDRESS) {
-	/* Save the sender's address in our neighbor list. */
-	uip_neighbor_add(&ICMPBUF->srcipaddr, &(ICMPBUF->options[2]));
-      }
-
-      /* We should now send a neighbor advertisement back to where the
-	 neighbor solicitation came from. */
-      ICMPBUF->type = ICMP6_NEIGHBOR_ADVERTISEMENT;
-      ICMPBUF->flags = ICMP6_FLAG_S; /* Solicited flag. */
-
-      ICMPBUF->reserved1 = ICMPBUF->reserved2 = ICMPBUF->reserved3 = 0;
-
-      uip_ipaddr_copy(&ICMPBUF->destipaddr, &ICMPBUF->srcipaddr);
-      uip_ipaddr_copy(&ICMPBUF->srcipaddr, &uip_hostaddr);
-      ICMPBUF->options[0] = ICMP6_OPTION_TARGET_LINK_ADDRESS;
-      ICMPBUF->options[1] = 1;  /* Options length, 1 = 8 bytes. */
-      memcpy(&(ICMPBUF->options[2]), &uip_ethaddr, sizeof(uip_ethaddr));
-      ICMPBUF->icmpchksum = 0;
-      ICMPBUF->icmpchksum = ~uip_icmp6chksum();
-
-      goto send;
-
-    }
-    goto drop;
-  } else if(ICMPBUF->type == ICMP6_ECHO) {
-    /* ICMP echo (i.e., ping) processing. This is simple, we only
-       change the ICMP type from ECHO to ECHO_REPLY and update the
-       ICMP checksum before we return the packet. */
-
-    ICMPBUF->type = ICMP6_ECHO_REPLY;
-
-    uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->destipaddr, &BUF->srcipaddr);
-    uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_hostaddr);
-    ICMPBUF->icmpchksum = 0;
-    ICMPBUF->icmpchksum = ~uip_icmp6chksum();
-
-    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.icmp.sent);
-    goto send;
-  } else {
-    DEBUG_PRINTF("Unknown icmp6 message type %d\n", ICMPBUF->type);
-    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.icmp.drop);
-    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.icmp.typeerr);
-    UIP_LOG("icmp: unknown ICMP message.");
-    goto drop;
-  }
-
-  /* End of IPv6 ICMP processing. */
-
-#endif /* !UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-
-#if UIP_UDP
-  /* UDP input processing. */
- udp_input:
-  /* UDP processing is really just a hack. We don't do anything to the
-     UDP/IP headers, but let the UDP application do all the hard
-     work. If the application sets uip_slen, it has a packet to
-     send. */
-#if UIP_UDP_CHECKSUMS
-  uip_len = uip_len - UIP_IPUDPH_LEN;
-  uip_appdata = &uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_IPUDPH_LEN];
-  if(UDPBUF->udpchksum != 0 && uip_udpchksum() != 0xffff) {
-    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.udp.drop);
-    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.udp.chkerr);
-    UIP_LOG("udp: bad checksum.");
-    goto drop;
-  }
-#else /* UIP_UDP_CHECKSUMS */
-  uip_len = uip_len - UIP_IPUDPH_LEN;
-#endif /* UIP_UDP_CHECKSUMS */
-
-  /* Demultiplex this UDP packet between the UDP "connections". */
-  for(uip_udp_conn = &uip_udp_conns[0];
-      uip_udp_conn < &uip_udp_conns[UIP_UDP_CONNS];
-      ++uip_udp_conn) {
-    /* If the local UDP port is non-zero, the connection is considered
-       to be used. If so, the local port number is checked against the
-       destination port number in the received packet. If the two port
-       numbers match, the remote port number is checked if the
-       connection is bound to a remote port. Finally, if the
-       connection is bound to a remote IP address, the source IP
-       address of the packet is checked. */
-    if(uip_udp_conn->lport != 0 &&
-       UDPBUF->destport == uip_udp_conn->lport &&
-       (uip_udp_conn->rport == 0 ||
-        UDPBUF->srcport == uip_udp_conn->rport) &&
-       (uip_ipaddr_cmp(&uip_udp_conn->ripaddr, &uip_all_zeroes_addr) ||
-	uip_ipaddr_cmp(&uip_udp_conn->ripaddr, &uip_broadcast_addr) ||
-	uip_ipaddr_cmp(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_udp_conn->ripaddr))) {
-      goto udp_found;
-    }
-  }
-  UIP_LOG("udp: no matching connection found");
-#if UIP_CONF_ICMP_DEST_UNREACH && !UIP_CONF_IPV6
-  /* Copy fields from packet header into payload of this ICMP packet. */
-  memcpy(&(ICMPBUF->payload[0]), ICMPBUF, UIP_IPH_LEN + 8);
-
-  /* Set the ICMP type and code. */
-  ICMPBUF->type = ICMP_DEST_UNREACHABLE;
-  ICMPBUF->icode = ICMP_PORT_UNREACHABLE;
-
-  /* Calculate the ICMP checksum. */
-  ICMPBUF->icmpchksum = 0;
-  ICMPBUF->icmpchksum = ~uip_chksum((u16_t *)&(ICMPBUF->type), 36);
-
-  /* Set the IP destination address to be the source address of the
-     original packet. */
-  uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->destipaddr, &BUF->srcipaddr);
-
-  /* Set our IP address as the source address. */
-  uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_hostaddr);
-
-  /* The size of the ICMP destination unreachable packet is 36 + the
-     size of the IP header (20) = 56. */
-  uip_len = 36 + UIP_IPH_LEN;
-  ICMPBUF->len[0] = 0;
-  ICMPBUF->len[1] = (u8_t)uip_len;
-  ICMPBUF->ttl = UIP_TTL;
-  ICMPBUF->proto = UIP_PROTO_ICMP;
-
-  goto ip_send_nolen;
-#else /* UIP_CONF_ICMP_DEST_UNREACH */
-  goto drop;
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_ICMP_DEST_UNREACH */
-
- udp_found:
-  uip_conn = NULL;
-  uip_flags = UIP_NEWDATA;
-  uip_sappdata = uip_appdata = &uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_IPUDPH_LEN];
-  uip_slen = 0;
-  UIP_UDP_APPCALL();
-
- udp_send:
-  if(uip_slen == 0) {
-    goto drop;
-  }
-  uip_len = uip_slen + UIP_IPUDPH_LEN;
-
-#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
-  /* For IPv6, the IP length field does not include the IPv6 IP header
-     length. */
-  BUF->len[0] = ((uip_len - UIP_IPH_LEN) >> 8);
-  BUF->len[1] = ((uip_len - UIP_IPH_LEN) & 0xff);
-#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-  BUF->len[0] = (uip_len >> 8);
-  BUF->len[1] = (uip_len & 0xff);
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-
-  BUF->ttl = uip_udp_conn->ttl;
-  BUF->proto = UIP_PROTO_UDP;
-
-  UDPBUF->udplen = HTONS(uip_slen + UIP_UDPH_LEN);
-  UDPBUF->udpchksum = 0;
-
-  BUF->srcport  = uip_udp_conn->lport;
-  BUF->destport = uip_udp_conn->rport;
-
-  uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_hostaddr);
-  uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->destipaddr, &uip_udp_conn->ripaddr);
-
-  uip_appdata = &uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_IPTCPH_LEN];
-
-#if UIP_UDP_CHECKSUMS
-  /* Calculate UDP checksum. */
-  UDPBUF->udpchksum = ~(uip_udpchksum());
-  if(UDPBUF->udpchksum == 0) {
-    UDPBUF->udpchksum = 0xffff;
-  }
-#endif /* UIP_UDP_CHECKSUMS */
-
-  goto ip_send_nolen;
-#endif /* UIP_UDP */
-
-  /* TCP input processing. */
- tcp_input:
-  UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.tcp.recv);
-
-  /* Start of TCP input header processing code. */
-
-  if(uip_tcpchksum() != 0xffff) {   /* Compute and check the TCP
-				       checksum. */
-    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.tcp.drop);
-    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.tcp.chkerr);
-    UIP_LOG("tcp: bad checksum.");
-    goto drop;
-  }
-
-  /* Demultiplex this segment. */
-  /* First check any active connections. */
-  for(uip_connr = &uip_conns[0]; uip_connr <= &uip_conns[UIP_CONNS - 1];
-      ++uip_connr) {
-    if(uip_connr->tcpstateflags != UIP_CLOSED &&
-       BUF->destport == uip_connr->lport &&
-       BUF->srcport == uip_connr->rport &&
-       uip_ipaddr_cmp(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_connr->ripaddr)) {
-      goto found;
-    }
-  }
-
-  /* If we didn't find and active connection that expected the packet,
-     either this packet is an old duplicate, or this is a SYN packet
-     destined for a connection in LISTEN. If the SYN flag isn't set,
-     it is an old packet and we send a RST. */
-  if((BUF->flags & TCP_CTL) != TCP_SYN) {
-    goto reset;
-  }
-
-  tmp16 = BUF->destport;
-  /* Next, check listening connections. */
-  for(c = 0; c < UIP_LISTENPORTS; ++c) {
-    if(tmp16 == uip_listenports[c]) {
-      goto found_listen;
-    }
-  }
-
-  /* No matching connection found, so we send a RST packet. */
-  UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.tcp.synrst);
-
- reset:
-  /* We do not send resets in response to resets. */
-  if(BUF->flags & TCP_RST) {
-    goto drop;
-  }
-
-  UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.tcp.rst);
-
-  BUF->flags = TCP_RST | TCP_ACK;
-  uip_len = UIP_IPTCPH_LEN;
-  BUF->tcpoffset = 5 << 4;
-
-  /* Flip the seqno and ackno fields in the TCP header. */
-  c = BUF->seqno[3];
-  BUF->seqno[3] = BUF->ackno[3];
-  BUF->ackno[3] = c;
-
-  c = BUF->seqno[2];
-  BUF->seqno[2] = BUF->ackno[2];
-  BUF->ackno[2] = c;
-
-  c = BUF->seqno[1];
-  BUF->seqno[1] = BUF->ackno[1];
-  BUF->ackno[1] = c;
-
-  c = BUF->seqno[0];
-  BUF->seqno[0] = BUF->ackno[0];
-  BUF->ackno[0] = c;
-
-  /* We also have to increase the sequence number we are
-     acknowledging. If the least significant byte overflowed, we need
-     to propagate the carry to the other bytes as well. */
-  if(++BUF->ackno[3] == 0) {
-    if(++BUF->ackno[2] == 0) {
-      if(++BUF->ackno[1] == 0) {
-	++BUF->ackno[0];
-      }
-    }
-  }
-
-  /* Swap port numbers. */
-  tmp16 = BUF->srcport;
-  BUF->srcport = BUF->destport;
-  BUF->destport = tmp16;
-
-  /* Swap IP addresses. */
-  uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->destipaddr, &BUF->srcipaddr);
-  uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_hostaddr);
-
-  /* And send out the RST packet! */
-  goto tcp_send_noconn;
-
-  /* This label will be jumped to if we matched the incoming packet
-     with a connection in LISTEN. In that case, we should create a new
-     connection and send a SYNACK in return. */
- found_listen:
-  /* First we check if there are any connections available. Unused
-     connections are kept in the same table as used connections, but
-     unused ones have the tcpstate set to CLOSED. Also, connections in
-     TIME_WAIT are kept track of and we'll use the oldest one if no
-     CLOSED connections are found. Thanks to Eddie C. Dost for a very
-     nice algorithm for the TIME_WAIT search. */
-  uip_connr = 0;
-  for(c = 0; c < UIP_CONNS; ++c) {
-    if(uip_conns[c].tcpstateflags == UIP_CLOSED) {
-      uip_connr = &uip_conns[c];
-      break;
-    }
-    if(uip_conns[c].tcpstateflags == UIP_TIME_WAIT) {
-      if(uip_connr == 0 ||
-	 uip_conns[c].timer > uip_connr->timer) {
-	uip_connr = &uip_conns[c];
-      }
-    }
-  }
-
-  if(uip_connr == 0) {
-    /* All connections are used already, we drop packet and hope that
-       the remote end will retransmit the packet at a time when we
-       have more spare connections. */
-    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.tcp.syndrop);
-    UIP_LOG("tcp: found no unused connections.");
-    goto drop;
-  }
-  uip_conn = uip_connr;
-
-  /* Fill in the necessary fields for the new connection. */
-  uip_connr->rto = uip_connr->timer = UIP_RTO;
-  uip_connr->sa = 0;
-  uip_connr->sv = 4;
-  uip_connr->nrtx = 0;
-  uip_connr->lport = BUF->destport;
-  uip_connr->rport = BUF->srcport;
-  uip_ipaddr_copy(&uip_connr->ripaddr, &BUF->srcipaddr);
-  uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_SYN_RCVD;
-
-  uip_connr->snd_nxt[0] = iss[0];
-  uip_connr->snd_nxt[1] = iss[1];
-  uip_connr->snd_nxt[2] = iss[2];
-  uip_connr->snd_nxt[3] = iss[3];
-  uip_connr->len = 1;
-
-  /* rcv_nxt should be the seqno from the incoming packet + 1. */
-  uip_connr->rcv_nxt[3] = BUF->seqno[3];
-  uip_connr->rcv_nxt[2] = BUF->seqno[2];
-  uip_connr->rcv_nxt[1] = BUF->seqno[1];
-  uip_connr->rcv_nxt[0] = BUF->seqno[0];
-  uip_add_rcv_nxt(1);
-
-  /* Parse the TCP MSS option, if present. */
-  if((BUF->tcpoffset & 0xf0) > 0x50) {
-    for(c = 0; c < ((BUF->tcpoffset >> 4) - 5) << 2 ;) {
-      opt = uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + c];
-      if(opt == TCP_OPT_END) {
-	/* End of options. */
-	break;
-      } else if(opt == TCP_OPT_NOOP) {
-	++c;
-	/* NOP option. */
-      } else if(opt == TCP_OPT_MSS &&
-		uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 1 + c] == TCP_OPT_MSS_LEN) {
-	/* An MSS option with the right option length. */
-	tmp16 = ((u16_t)uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 2 + c] << 8) |
-	  (u16_t)uip_buf[UIP_IPTCPH_LEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 3 + c];
-	uip_connr->initialmss = uip_connr->mss =
-	  tmp16 > UIP_TCP_MSS? UIP_TCP_MSS: tmp16;
-
-	/* And we are done processing options. */
-	break;
-      } else {
-	/* All other options have a length field, so that we easily
-	   can skip past them. */
-	if(uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 1 + c] == 0) {
-	  /* If the length field is zero, the options are malformed
-	     and we don't process them further. */
-	  break;
-	}
-	c += uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 1 + c];
-      }
-    }
-  }
-
-  /* Our response will be a SYNACK. */
-#if UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN
- tcp_send_synack:
-  BUF->flags = TCP_ACK;
-
- tcp_send_syn:
-  BUF->flags |= TCP_SYN;
-#else /* UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN */
- tcp_send_synack:
-  BUF->flags = TCP_SYN | TCP_ACK;
-#endif /* UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN */
-
-  /* We send out the TCP Maximum Segment Size option with our
-     SYNACK. */
-  BUF->optdata[0] = TCP_OPT_MSS;
-  BUF->optdata[1] = TCP_OPT_MSS_LEN;
-  BUF->optdata[2] = (UIP_TCP_MSS) / 256;
-  BUF->optdata[3] = (UIP_TCP_MSS) & 255;
-  uip_len = UIP_IPTCPH_LEN + TCP_OPT_MSS_LEN;
-  BUF->tcpoffset = ((UIP_TCPH_LEN + TCP_OPT_MSS_LEN) / 4) << 4;
-  goto tcp_send;
-
-  /* This label will be jumped to if we found an active connection. */
- found:
-  uip_conn = uip_connr;
-  uip_flags = 0;
-  /* We do a very naive form of TCP reset processing; we just accept
-     any RST and kill our connection. We should in fact check if the
-     sequence number of this reset is within our advertised window
-     before we accept the reset. */
-  if(BUF->flags & TCP_RST) {
-    uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_CLOSED;
-    UIP_LOG("tcp: got reset, aborting connection.");
-    uip_flags = UIP_ABORT;
-    UIP_APPCALL();
-    goto drop;
-  }
-  /* Calculate the length of the data, if the application has sent
-     any data to us. */
-  c = (BUF->tcpoffset >> 4) << 2;
-  /* uip_len will contain the length of the actual TCP data. This is
-     calculated by subtracing the length of the TCP header (in
-     c) and the length of the IP header (20 bytes). */
-  uip_len = uip_len - c - UIP_IPH_LEN;
-
-  /* First, check if the sequence number of the incoming packet is
-     what we're expecting next. If not, we send out an ACK with the
-     correct numbers in. */
-  if(!(((uip_connr->tcpstateflags & UIP_TS_MASK) == UIP_SYN_SENT) &&
-       ((BUF->flags & TCP_CTL) == (TCP_SYN | TCP_ACK)))) {
-    if((uip_len > 0 || ((BUF->flags & (TCP_SYN | TCP_FIN)) != 0)) &&
-       (BUF->seqno[0] != uip_connr->rcv_nxt[0] ||
-	BUF->seqno[1] != uip_connr->rcv_nxt[1] ||
-	BUF->seqno[2] != uip_connr->rcv_nxt[2] ||
-	BUF->seqno[3] != uip_connr->rcv_nxt[3])) {
-      goto tcp_send_ack;
-    }
-  }
-
-  /* Next, check if the incoming segment acknowledges any outstanding
-     data. If so, we update the sequence number, reset the length of
-     the outstanding data, calculate RTT estimations, and reset the
-     retransmission timer. */
-  if((BUF->flags & TCP_ACK) && uip_outstanding(uip_connr)) {
-    uip_add32(uip_connr->snd_nxt, uip_connr->len);
-
-    if(BUF->ackno[0] == uip_acc32[0] &&
-       BUF->ackno[1] == uip_acc32[1] &&
-       BUF->ackno[2] == uip_acc32[2] &&
-       BUF->ackno[3] == uip_acc32[3]) {
-      /* Update sequence number. */
-      uip_connr->snd_nxt[0] = uip_acc32[0];
-      uip_connr->snd_nxt[1] = uip_acc32[1];
-      uip_connr->snd_nxt[2] = uip_acc32[2];
-      uip_connr->snd_nxt[3] = uip_acc32[3];
-
-      /* Do RTT estimation, unless we have done retransmissions. */
-      if(uip_connr->nrtx == 0) {
-	signed char m;
-	m = uip_connr->rto - uip_connr->timer;
-	/* This is taken directly from VJs original code in his paper */
-	m = m - (uip_connr->sa >> 3);
-	uip_connr->sa += m;
-	if(m < 0) {
-	  m = -m;
-	}
-	m = m - (uip_connr->sv >> 2);
-	uip_connr->sv += m;
-	uip_connr->rto = (uip_connr->sa >> 3) + uip_connr->sv;
-
-      }
-      /* Set the acknowledged flag. */
-      uip_flags = UIP_ACKDATA;
-      /* Reset the retransmission timer. */
-      uip_connr->timer = uip_connr->rto;
-
-      /* Reset length of outstanding data. */
-      uip_connr->len = 0;
-    }
-
-  }
-
-  /* Do different things depending on in what state the connection is. */
-  switch(uip_connr->tcpstateflags & UIP_TS_MASK) {
-    /* CLOSED and LISTEN are not handled here. CLOSE_WAIT is not
-	implemented, since we force the application to close when the
-	peer sends a FIN (hence the application goes directly from
-	ESTABLISHED to LAST_ACK). */
-  case UIP_SYN_RCVD:
-    /* In SYN_RCVD we have sent out a SYNACK in response to a SYN, and
-       we are waiting for an ACK that acknowledges the data we sent
-       out the last time. Therefore, we want to have the UIP_ACKDATA
-       flag set. If so, we enter the ESTABLISHED state. */
-    if(uip_flags & UIP_ACKDATA) {
-      uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_ESTABLISHED;
-      uip_flags = UIP_CONNECTED;
-      uip_connr->len = 0;
-      if(uip_len > 0) {
-        uip_flags |= UIP_NEWDATA;
-        uip_add_rcv_nxt(uip_len);
-      }
-      uip_slen = 0;
-      UIP_APPCALL();
-      goto appsend;
-    }
-    goto drop;
-#if UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN
-  case UIP_SYN_SENT:
-    /* In SYN_SENT, we wait for a SYNACK that is sent in response to
-       our SYN. The rcv_nxt is set to sequence number in the SYNACK
-       plus one, and we send an ACK. We move into the ESTABLISHED
-       state. */
-    if((uip_flags & UIP_ACKDATA) &&
-       (BUF->flags & TCP_CTL) == (TCP_SYN | TCP_ACK)) {
-
-      /* Parse the TCP MSS option, if present. */
-      if((BUF->tcpoffset & 0xf0) > 0x50) {
-	for(c = 0; c < ((BUF->tcpoffset >> 4) - 5) << 2 ;) {
-	  opt = uip_buf[UIP_IPTCPH_LEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + c];
-	  if(opt == TCP_OPT_END) {
-	    /* End of options. */
-	    break;
-	  } else if(opt == TCP_OPT_NOOP) {
-	    ++c;
-	    /* NOP option. */
-	  } else if(opt == TCP_OPT_MSS &&
-		    uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 1 + c] == TCP_OPT_MSS_LEN) {
-	    /* An MSS option with the right option length. */
-	    tmp16 = (uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 2 + c] << 8) |
-	      uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 3 + c];
-	    uip_connr->initialmss =
-	      uip_connr->mss = tmp16 > UIP_TCP_MSS? UIP_TCP_MSS: tmp16;
-
-	    /* And we are done processing options. */
-	    break;
-	  } else {
-	    /* All other options have a length field, so that we easily
-	       can skip past them. */
-	    if(uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 1 + c] == 0) {
-	      /* If the length field is zero, the options are malformed
-		 and we don't process them further. */
-	      break;
-	    }
-	    c += uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 1 + c];
-	  }
-	}
-      }
-      uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_ESTABLISHED;
-      uip_connr->rcv_nxt[0] = BUF->seqno[0];
-      uip_connr->rcv_nxt[1] = BUF->seqno[1];
-      uip_connr->rcv_nxt[2] = BUF->seqno[2];
-      uip_connr->rcv_nxt[3] = BUF->seqno[3];
-      uip_add_rcv_nxt(1);
-      uip_flags = UIP_CONNECTED | UIP_NEWDATA;
-      uip_connr->len = 0;
-      uip_len = 0;
-      uip_slen = 0;
-      UIP_APPCALL();
-      goto appsend;
-    }
-    /* Inform the application that the connection failed */
-    uip_flags = UIP_ABORT;
-    UIP_APPCALL();
-    /* The connection is closed after we send the RST */
-    uip_conn->tcpstateflags = UIP_CLOSED;
-    goto reset;
-#endif /* UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN */
-
-  case UIP_ESTABLISHED:
-    /* In the ESTABLISHED state, we call upon the application to feed
-    data into the uip_buf. If the UIP_ACKDATA flag is set, the
-    application should put new data into the buffer, otherwise we are
-    retransmitting an old segment, and the application should put that
-    data into the buffer.
-
-    If the incoming packet is a FIN, we should close the connection on
-    this side as well, and we send out a FIN and enter the LAST_ACK
-    state. We require that there is no outstanding data; otherwise the
-    sequence numbers will be screwed up. */
-
-    if(BUF->flags & TCP_FIN && !(uip_connr->tcpstateflags & UIP_STOPPED)) {
-      if(uip_outstanding(uip_connr)) {
-	goto drop;
-      }
-      uip_add_rcv_nxt(1 + uip_len);
-      uip_flags |= UIP_CLOSE;
-      if(uip_len > 0) {
-	uip_flags |= UIP_NEWDATA;
-      }
-      UIP_APPCALL();
-      uip_connr->len = 1;
-      uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_LAST_ACK;
-      uip_connr->nrtx = 0;
-    tcp_send_finack:
-      BUF->flags = TCP_FIN | TCP_ACK;
-      goto tcp_send_nodata;
-    }
-
-    /* Check the URG flag. If this is set, the segment carries urgent
-       data that we must pass to the application. */
-    if((BUF->flags & TCP_URG) != 0) {
-#if UIP_URGDATA > 0
-      uip_urglen = (BUF->urgp[0] << 8) | BUF->urgp[1];
-      if(uip_urglen > uip_len) {
-	/* There is more urgent data in the next segment to come. */
-	uip_urglen = uip_len;
-      }
-      uip_add_rcv_nxt(uip_urglen);
-      uip_len -= uip_urglen;
-      uip_urgdata = uip_appdata;
-      uip_appdata += uip_urglen;
-    } else {
-      uip_urglen = 0;
-#else /* UIP_URGDATA > 0 */
-      uip_appdata = ((char *)uip_appdata) + ((BUF->urgp[0] << 8) | BUF->urgp[1]);
-      uip_len -= (BUF->urgp[0] << 8) | BUF->urgp[1];
-#endif /* UIP_URGDATA > 0 */
-    }
-
-    /* If uip_len > 0 we have TCP data in the packet, and we flag this
-       by setting the UIP_NEWDATA flag and update the sequence number
-       we acknowledge. If the application has stopped the dataflow
-       using uip_stop(), we must not accept any data packets from the
-       remote host. */
-    if(uip_len > 0 && !(uip_connr->tcpstateflags & UIP_STOPPED)) {
-      uip_flags |= UIP_NEWDATA;
-      uip_add_rcv_nxt(uip_len);
-    }
-
-    /* Check if the available buffer space advertised by the other end
-       is smaller than the initial MSS for this connection. If so, we
-       set the current MSS to the window size to ensure that the
-       application does not send more data than the other end can
-       handle.
-
-       If the remote host advertises a zero window, we set the MSS to
-       the initial MSS so that the application will send an entire MSS
-       of data. This data will not be acknowledged by the receiver,
-       and the application will retransmit it. This is called the
-       "persistent timer" and uses the retransmission mechanism.
-    */
-    tmp16 = ((u16_t)BUF->wnd[0] << 8) + (u16_t)BUF->wnd[1];
-    if(tmp16 > uip_connr->initialmss ||
-       tmp16 == 0) {
-      tmp16 = uip_connr->initialmss;
-    }
-    uip_connr->mss = tmp16;
-
-    /* If this packet constitutes an ACK for outstanding data (flagged
-       by the UIP_ACKDATA flag, we should call the application since it
-       might want to send more data. If the incoming packet had data
-       from the peer (as flagged by the UIP_NEWDATA flag), the
-       application must also be notified.
-
-       When the application is called, the global variable uip_len
-       contains the length of the incoming data. The application can
-       access the incoming data through the global pointer
-       uip_appdata, which usually points UIP_IPTCPH_LEN + UIP_LLH_LEN
-       bytes into the uip_buf array.
-
-       If the application wishes to send any data, this data should be
-       put into the uip_appdata and the length of the data should be
-       put into uip_len. If the application don't have any data to
-       send, uip_len must be set to 0. */
-    if(uip_flags & (UIP_NEWDATA | UIP_ACKDATA)) {
-      uip_slen = 0;
-      UIP_APPCALL();
-
-    appsend:
-
-      if(uip_flags & UIP_ABORT) {
-	uip_slen = 0;
-	uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_CLOSED;
-	BUF->flags = TCP_RST | TCP_ACK;
-	goto tcp_send_nodata;
-      }
-
-      if(uip_flags & UIP_CLOSE) {
-	uip_slen = 0;
-	uip_connr->len = 1;
-	uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_FIN_WAIT_1;
-	uip_connr->nrtx = 0;
-	BUF->flags = TCP_FIN | TCP_ACK;
-	goto tcp_send_nodata;
-      }
-
-      /* If uip_slen > 0, the application has data to be sent. */
-      if(uip_slen > 0) {
-
-	/* If the connection has acknowledged data, the contents of
-	   the ->len variable should be discarded. */
-	if((uip_flags & UIP_ACKDATA) != 0) {
-	  uip_connr->len = 0;
-	}
-
-	/* If the ->len variable is non-zero the connection has
-	   already data in transit and cannot send anymore right
-	   now. */
-	if(uip_connr->len == 0) {
-
-	  /* The application cannot send more than what is allowed by
-	     the mss (the minumum of the MSS and the available
-	     window). */
-	  if(uip_slen > uip_connr->mss) {
-	    uip_slen = uip_connr->mss;
-	  }
-
-	  /* Remember how much data we send out now so that we know
-	     when everything has been acknowledged. */
-	  uip_connr->len = uip_slen;
-	} else {
-
-	  /* If the application already had unacknowledged data, we
-	     make sure that the application does not send (i.e.,
-	     retransmit) out more than it previously sent out. */
-	  uip_slen = uip_connr->len;
-	}
-      }
-      uip_connr->nrtx = 0;
-    apprexmit:
-      uip_appdata = uip_sappdata;
-
-      /* If the application has data to be sent, or if the incoming
-         packet had new data in it, we must send out a packet. */
-      if(uip_slen > 0 && uip_connr->len > 0) {
-	/* Add the length of the IP and TCP headers. */
-	uip_len = uip_connr->len + UIP_TCPIP_HLEN;
-	/* We always set the ACK flag in response packets. */
-	BUF->flags = TCP_ACK | TCP_PSH;
-	/* Send the packet. */
-	goto tcp_send_noopts;
-      }
-      /* If there is no data to send, just send out a pure ACK if
-	 there is newdata. */
-      if(uip_flags & UIP_NEWDATA) {
-	uip_len = UIP_TCPIP_HLEN;
-	BUF->flags = TCP_ACK;
-	goto tcp_send_noopts;
-      }
-    }
-    goto drop;
-  case UIP_LAST_ACK:
-    /* We can close this connection if the peer has acknowledged our
-       FIN. This is indicated by the UIP_ACKDATA flag. */
-    if(uip_flags & UIP_ACKDATA) {
-      uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_CLOSED;
-      uip_flags = UIP_CLOSE;
-      UIP_APPCALL();
-    }
-    break;
-
-  case UIP_FIN_WAIT_1:
-    /* The application has closed the connection, but the remote host
-       hasn't closed its end yet. Thus we do nothing but wait for a
-       FIN from the other side. */
-    if(uip_len > 0) {
-      uip_add_rcv_nxt(uip_len);
-    }
-    if(BUF->flags & TCP_FIN) {
-      if(uip_flags & UIP_ACKDATA) {
-	uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_TIME_WAIT;
-	uip_connr->timer = 0;
-	uip_connr->len = 0;
-      } else {
-	uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_CLOSING;
-      }
-      uip_add_rcv_nxt(1);
-      uip_flags = UIP_CLOSE;
-      UIP_APPCALL();
-      goto tcp_send_ack;
-    } else if(uip_flags & UIP_ACKDATA) {
-      uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_FIN_WAIT_2;
-      uip_connr->len = 0;
-      goto drop;
-    }
-    if(uip_len > 0) {
-      goto tcp_send_ack;
-    }
-    goto drop;
-
-  case UIP_FIN_WAIT_2:
-    if(uip_len > 0) {
-      uip_add_rcv_nxt(uip_len);
-    }
-    if(BUF->flags & TCP_FIN) {
-      uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_TIME_WAIT;
-      uip_connr->timer = 0;
-      uip_add_rcv_nxt(1);
-      uip_flags = UIP_CLOSE;
-      UIP_APPCALL();
-      goto tcp_send_ack;
-    }
-    if(uip_len > 0) {
-      goto tcp_send_ack;
-    }
-    goto drop;
-
-  case UIP_TIME_WAIT:
-    goto tcp_send_ack;
-
-  case UIP_CLOSING:
-    if(uip_flags & UIP_ACKDATA) {
-      uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_TIME_WAIT;
-      uip_connr->timer = 0;
-    }
-  }
-  goto drop;
-
-  /* We jump here when we are ready to send the packet, and just want
-     to set the appropriate TCP sequence numbers in the TCP header. */
- tcp_send_ack:
-  BUF->flags = TCP_ACK;
-
- tcp_send_nodata:
-  uip_len = UIP_IPTCPH_LEN;
-
- tcp_send_noopts:
-  BUF->tcpoffset = (UIP_TCPH_LEN / 4) << 4;
-
-  /* We're done with the input processing. We are now ready to send a
-     reply. Our job is to fill in all the fields of the TCP and IP
-     headers before calculating the checksum and finally send the
-     packet. */
- tcp_send:
-  BUF->ackno[0] = uip_connr->rcv_nxt[0];
-  BUF->ackno[1] = uip_connr->rcv_nxt[1];
-  BUF->ackno[2] = uip_connr->rcv_nxt[2];
-  BUF->ackno[3] = uip_connr->rcv_nxt[3];
-
-  BUF->seqno[0] = uip_connr->snd_nxt[0];
-  BUF->seqno[1] = uip_connr->snd_nxt[1];
-  BUF->seqno[2] = uip_connr->snd_nxt[2];
-  BUF->seqno[3] = uip_connr->snd_nxt[3];
-
-  BUF->proto = UIP_PROTO_TCP;
-
-  BUF->srcport  = uip_connr->lport;
-  BUF->destport = uip_connr->rport;
-
-  uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_hostaddr);
-  uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->destipaddr, &uip_connr->ripaddr);
-
-  if(uip_connr->tcpstateflags & UIP_STOPPED) {
-    /* If the connection has issued uip_stop(), we advertise a zero
-       window so that the remote host will stop sending data. */
-    BUF->wnd[0] = BUF->wnd[1] = 0;
-  } else {
-    BUF->wnd[0] = ((UIP_RECEIVE_WINDOW) >> 8);
-    BUF->wnd[1] = ((UIP_RECEIVE_WINDOW) & 0xff);
-  }
-
- tcp_send_noconn:
-  BUF->ttl = UIP_TTL;
-#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
-  /* For IPv6, the IP length field does not include the IPv6 IP header
-     length. */
-  BUF->len[0] = ((uip_len - UIP_IPH_LEN) >> 8);
-  BUF->len[1] = ((uip_len - UIP_IPH_LEN) & 0xff);
-#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-  BUF->len[0] = (uip_len >> 8);
-  BUF->len[1] = (uip_len & 0xff);
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-
-  BUF->urgp[0] = BUF->urgp[1] = 0;
-
-  /* Calculate TCP checksum. */
-  BUF->tcpchksum = 0;
-  BUF->tcpchksum = ~(uip_tcpchksum());
-
- ip_send_nolen:
-#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
-  BUF->vtc = 0x60;
-  BUF->tcflow = 0x00;
-  BUF->flow = 0x00;
-#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-  BUF->vhl = 0x45;
-  BUF->tos = 0;
-  BUF->ipoffset[0] = BUF->ipoffset[1] = 0;
-  ++ipid;
-  BUF->ipid[0] = ipid >> 8;
-  BUF->ipid[1] = ipid & 0xff;
-  /* Calculate IP checksum. */
-  BUF->ipchksum = 0;
-  BUF->ipchksum = ~(uip_ipchksum());
-  DEBUG_PRINTF("uip ip_send_nolen: checksum 0x%04x\n", uip_ipchksum());
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-  UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.tcp.sent);
-#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
- send:
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-  DEBUG_PRINTF("Sending packet with length %d (%d)\n", uip_len,
-	       (BUF->len[0] << 8) | BUF->len[1]);
-
-  UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.sent);
-  /* Return and let the caller do the actual transmission. */
-  uip_flags = 0;
-  return;
-
- drop:
-  uip_len = 0;
-  uip_flags = 0;
-  return;
-}
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-u16_t
-htons(u16_t val)
-{
-  return HTONS(val);
-}
-
-u32_t
-htonl(u32_t val)
-{
-  return HTONL(val);
-}
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-void
-uip_send(const void *data, int len)
-{
-  int copylen;
-#define MIN(a,b) ((a) < (b)? (a): (b))
-  copylen = MIN(len, UIP_BUFSIZE - UIP_LLH_LEN - UIP_TCPIP_HLEN -
-		(int)((char *)uip_sappdata - (char *)&uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_TCPIP_HLEN]));
-  if(copylen > 0) {
-    uip_slen = copylen;
-    if(data != uip_sappdata) {
-      memcpy(uip_sappdata, (data), uip_slen);
-    }
-  }
-}
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/** @} */
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 7b87a2c77..000000000
--- a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,2130 +0,0 @@
-
-/**
- * \addtogroup uip
- * @{
- */
-
-/**
- * \file
- * Header file for the uIP TCP/IP stack.
- * \author  Adam Dunkels <adam@dunkels.com>
- * \author  Julien Abeille <jabeille@cisco.com> (IPv6 related code)
- * \author  Mathilde Durvy <mdurvy@cisco.com> (IPv6 related code)
- *
- * The uIP TCP/IP stack header file contains definitions for a number
- * of C macros that are used by uIP programs as well as internal uIP
- * structures, TCP/IP header structures and function declarations.
- *
- */
-
-/*
- * Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Adam Dunkels.
- * All rights reserved.
- *
- * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
- * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
- * are met:
- * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
- *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
- * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
- *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
- *    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
- * 3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote
- *    products derived from this software without specific prior
- *    written permission.
- *
- * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS
- * OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
- * WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
- * ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY
- * DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
- * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
- * GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
- * INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
- * WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
- * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
- * SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
- *
- * This file is part of the uIP TCP/IP stack.
- *
- * $Id: uip.h,v 1.24 2009/04/06 13:18:50 nvt-se Exp $
- *
- */
-
-#ifndef __UIP_H__
-#define __UIP_H__
-
-#include "uipopt.h"
-
-/**
- * Representation of an IP address.
- *
- */
-#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
-typedef union uip_ip6addr_t {
-  u8_t  u8[16];			/* Initialiser, must come first!!! */
-  u16_t u16[8];
-} uip_ip6addr_t;
-
-typedef uip_ip6addr_t uip_ipaddr_t;
-#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-typedef union uip_ip4addr_t {
-  u8_t  u8[4];			/* Initialiser, must come first!!! */
-  u16_t u16[2];
-#if 0
-  u32_t u32;
-#endif
-} uip_ip4addr_t;
-typedef uip_ip4addr_t uip_ipaddr_t;
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-
-
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-/** \brief 16 bit 802.15.4 address */
-struct uip_802154_shortaddr {
-  u8_t addr[2];
-};
-/** \brief 64 bit 802.15.4 address */
-struct uip_802154_longaddr {
-  u8_t addr[8];
-};
-
-/** \brief 802.11 address */
-struct uip_80211_addr {
-  u8_t addr[6];
-};
-
-/** \brief 802.3 address */
-struct uip_eth_addr {
-  u8_t addr[6];
-};
-
-#if UIP_CONF_LL_802154
-/** \brief 802.15.4 address */
-typedef struct uip_802154_longaddr uip_lladdr_t;
-#define UIP_802154_SHORTADDR_LEN 2
-#define UIP_802154_LONGADDR_LEN  8
-#define UIP_LLADDR_LEN UIP_802154_LONGADDR_LEN
-#else /*UIP_CONF_LL_802154*/
-#if UIP_CONF_LL_80211
-/** \brief 802.11 address */
-typedef struct uip_80211_addr uip_lladdr_t;
-#define UIP_LLADDR_LEN 6
-#else /*UIP_CONF_LL_80211*/
-/** \brief Ethernet address */
-typedef struct uip_eth_addr uip_lladdr_t;
-#define UIP_LLADDR_LEN 6
-#endif /*UIP_CONF_LL_80211*/
-#endif /*UIP_CONF_LL_802154*/
-
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* First, the functions that should be called from the
- * system. Initialization, the periodic timer, and incoming packets are
- * handled by the following three functions.
- */
-/**
- * \defgroup uipconffunc uIP configuration functions
- * @{
- *
- * The uIP configuration functions are used for setting run-time
- * parameters in uIP such as IP addresses.
- */
-
-/**
- * Set the IP address of this host.
- *
- * The IP address is represented as a 4-byte array where the first
- * octet of the IP address is put in the first member of the 4-byte
- * array.
- *
- * Example:
- \code
-
- uip_ipaddr_t addr;
-
- uip_ipaddr(&addr, 192,168,1,2);
- uip_sethostaddr(&addr);
-
- \endcode
- * \param addr A pointer to an IP address of type uip_ipaddr_t;
- *
- * \sa uip_ipaddr()
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_sethostaddr(addr) uip_ipaddr_copy(&uip_hostaddr, (addr))
-
-/**
- * Get the IP address of this host.
- *
- * The IP address is represented as a 4-byte array where the first
- * octet of the IP address is put in the first member of the 4-byte
- * array.
- *
- * Example:
- \code
- uip_ipaddr_t hostaddr;
-
- uip_gethostaddr(&hostaddr);
- \endcode
- * \param addr A pointer to a uip_ipaddr_t variable that will be
- * filled in with the currently configured IP address.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_gethostaddr(addr) uip_ipaddr_copy((addr), &uip_hostaddr)
-
-/**
- * Set the default router's IP address.
- *
- * \param addr A pointer to a uip_ipaddr_t variable containing the IP
- * address of the default router.
- *
- * \sa uip_ipaddr()
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_setdraddr(addr) uip_ipaddr_copy(&uip_draddr, (addr))
-
-/**
- * Set the netmask.
- *
- * \param addr A pointer to a uip_ipaddr_t variable containing the IP
- * address of the netmask.
- *
- * \sa uip_ipaddr()
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_setnetmask(addr) uip_ipaddr_copy(&uip_netmask, (addr))
-
-
-/**
- * Get the default router's IP address.
- *
- * \param addr A pointer to a uip_ipaddr_t variable that will be
- * filled in with the IP address of the default router.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_getdraddr(addr) uip_ipaddr_copy((addr), &uip_draddr)
-
-/**
- * Get the netmask.
- *
- * \param addr A pointer to a uip_ipaddr_t variable that will be
- * filled in with the value of the netmask.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_getnetmask(addr) uip_ipaddr_copy((addr), &uip_netmask)
-
-/** @} */
-
-/**
- * \defgroup uipinit uIP initialization functions
- * @{
- *
- * The uIP initialization functions are used for booting uIP.
- */
-
-/**
- * uIP initialization function.
- *
- * This function should be called at boot up to initialize the uIP
- * TCP/IP stack.
- */
-void uip_init(void);
-
-/**
- * uIP initialization function.
- *
- * This function may be used at boot time to set the initial ip_id.
- */
-void uip_setipid(u16_t id);
-
-/** @} */
-
-/**
- * \defgroup uipdevfunc uIP device driver functions
- * @{
- *
- * These functions are used by a network device driver for interacting
- * with uIP.
- */
-
-/**
- * Process an incoming packet.
- *
- * This function should be called when the device driver has received
- * a packet from the network. The packet from the device driver must
- * be present in the uip_buf buffer, and the length of the packet
- * should be placed in the uip_len variable.
- *
- * When the function returns, there may be an outbound packet placed
- * in the uip_buf packet buffer. If so, the uip_len variable is set to
- * the length of the packet. If no packet is to be sent out, the
- * uip_len variable is set to 0.
- *
- * The usual way of calling the function is presented by the source
- * code below.
- \code
- uip_len = devicedriver_poll();
- if(uip_len > 0) {
- uip_input();
- if(uip_len > 0) {
- devicedriver_send();
- }
- }
- \endcode
- *
- * \note If you are writing a uIP device driver that needs ARP
- * (Address Resolution Protocol), e.g., when running uIP over
- * Ethernet, you will need to call the uIP ARP code before calling
- * this function:
- \code
- #define BUF ((struct uip_eth_hdr *)&uip_buf[0])
- uip_len = ethernet_devicedrver_poll();
- if(uip_len > 0) {
- if(BUF->type == HTONS(UIP_ETHTYPE_IP)) {
- uip_arp_ipin();
- uip_input();
- if(uip_len > 0) {
- uip_arp_out();
- ethernet_devicedriver_send();
- }
- } else if(BUF->type == HTONS(UIP_ETHTYPE_ARP)) {
- uip_arp_arpin();
- if(uip_len > 0) {
- ethernet_devicedriver_send();
- }
- }
- \endcode
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_input()        uip_process(UIP_DATA)
-
-
-/**
- * Periodic processing for a connection identified by its number.
- *
- * This function does the necessary periodic processing (timers,
- * polling) for a uIP TCP connection, and should be called when the
- * periodic uIP timer goes off. It should be called for every
- * connection, regardless of whether they are open of closed.
- *
- * When the function returns, it may have an outbound packet waiting
- * for service in the uIP packet buffer, and if so the uip_len
- * variable is set to a value larger than zero. The device driver
- * should be called to send out the packet.
- *
- * The usual way of calling the function is through a for() loop like
- * this:
- \code
- for(i = 0; i < UIP_CONNS; ++i) {
- uip_periodic(i);
- if(uip_len > 0) {
- devicedriver_send();
- }
- }
- \endcode
- *
- * \note If you are writing a uIP device driver that needs ARP
- * (Address Resolution Protocol), e.g., when running uIP over
- * Ethernet, you will need to call the uip_arp_out() function before
- * calling the device driver:
- \code
- for(i = 0; i < UIP_CONNS; ++i) {
- uip_periodic(i);
- if(uip_len > 0) {
- uip_arp_out();
- ethernet_devicedriver_send();
- }
- }
- \endcode
- *
- * \param conn The number of the connection which is to be periodically polled.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#if UIP_TCP
-#define uip_periodic(conn) do { uip_conn = &uip_conns[conn];    \
-    uip_process(UIP_TIMER); } while (0)
-
-/**
- *
- *
- */
-#define uip_conn_active(conn) (uip_conns[conn].tcpstateflags != UIP_CLOSED)
-
-/**
- * Perform periodic processing for a connection identified by a pointer
- * to its structure.
- *
- * Same as uip_periodic() but takes a pointer to the actual uip_conn
- * struct instead of an integer as its argument. This function can be
- * used to force periodic processing of a specific connection.
- *
- * \param conn A pointer to the uip_conn struct for the connection to
- * be processed.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_periodic_conn(conn) do { uip_conn = conn;   \
-    uip_process(UIP_TIMER); } while (0)
-
-/**
- * Request that a particular connection should be polled.
- *
- * Similar to uip_periodic_conn() but does not perform any timer
- * processing. The application is polled for new data.
- *
- * \param conn A pointer to the uip_conn struct for the connection to
- * be processed.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_poll_conn(conn) do { uip_conn = conn;       \
-    uip_process(UIP_POLL_REQUEST); } while (0)
-
-#endif /* UIP_TCP */
-
-#if UIP_UDP
-/**
- * Periodic processing for a UDP connection identified by its number.
- *
- * This function is essentially the same as uip_periodic(), but for
- * UDP connections. It is called in a similar fashion as the
- * uip_periodic() function:
- \code
- for(i = 0; i < UIP_UDP_CONNS; i++) {
- uip_udp_periodic(i);
- if(uip_len > 0) {
- devicedriver_send();
- }
- }
- \endcode
- *
- * \note As for the uip_periodic() function, special care has to be
- * taken when using uIP together with ARP and Ethernet:
- \code
- for(i = 0; i < UIP_UDP_CONNS; i++) {
- uip_udp_periodic(i);
- if(uip_len > 0) {
- uip_arp_out();
- ethernet_devicedriver_send();
- }
- }
- \endcode
- *
- * \param conn The number of the UDP connection to be processed.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_udp_periodic(conn) do { uip_udp_conn = &uip_udp_conns[conn]; \
-    uip_process(UIP_UDP_TIMER); } while(0)
-
-/**
- * Periodic processing for a UDP connection identified by a pointer to
- * its structure.
- *
- * Same as uip_udp_periodic() but takes a pointer to the actual
- * uip_conn struct instead of an integer as its argument. This
- * function can be used to force periodic processing of a specific
- * connection.
- *
- * \param conn A pointer to the uip_udp_conn struct for the connection
- * to be processed.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_udp_periodic_conn(conn) do { uip_udp_conn = conn;   \
-    uip_process(UIP_UDP_TIMER); } while(0)
-#endif /* UIP_UDP */
-
-/** \brief Abandon the reassembly of the current packet */
-void uip_reass_over(void);
-
-/**
- * The uIP packet buffer.
- *
- * The uip_buf array is used to hold incoming and outgoing
- * packets. The device driver should place incoming data into this
- * buffer. When sending data, the device driver should read the link
- * level headers and the TCP/IP headers from this buffer. The size of
- * the link level headers is configured by the UIP_LLH_LEN define.
- *
- * \note The application data need not be placed in this buffer, so
- * the device driver must read it from the place pointed to by the
- * uip_appdata pointer as illustrated by the following example:
- \code
- void
- devicedriver_send(void)
- {
- hwsend(&uip_buf[0], UIP_LLH_LEN);
- if(uip_len <= UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_TCPIP_HLEN) {
- hwsend(&uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN], uip_len - UIP_LLH_LEN);
- } else {
- hwsend(&uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN], UIP_TCPIP_HLEN);
- hwsend(uip_appdata, uip_len - UIP_TCPIP_HLEN - UIP_LLH_LEN);
- }
- }
- \endcode
-*/
-extern u8_t uip_buf[UIP_BUFSIZE+2];
-
-
-
-/** @} */
-
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* Functions that are used by the uIP application program. Opening and
- * closing connections, sending and receiving data, etc. is all
- * handled by the functions below.
- */
-/**
- * \defgroup uipappfunc uIP application functions
- * @{
- *
- * Functions used by an application running of top of uIP.
- */
-
-/**
- * Start listening to the specified port.
- *
- * \note Since this function expects the port number in network byte
- * order, a conversion using HTONS() or htons() is necessary.
- *
- \code
- uip_listen(HTONS(80));
- \endcode
- *
- * \param port A 16-bit port number in network byte order.
- */
-void uip_listen(u16_t port);
-
-/**
- * Stop listening to the specified port.
- *
- * \note Since this function expects the port number in network byte
- * order, a conversion using HTONS() or htons() is necessary.
- *
- \code
- uip_unlisten(HTONS(80));
- \endcode
- *
- * \param port A 16-bit port number in network byte order.
- */
-void uip_unlisten(u16_t port);
-
-/**
- * Connect to a remote host using TCP.
- *
- * This function is used to start a new connection to the specified
- * port on the specified host. It allocates a new connection identifier,
- * sets the connection to the SYN_SENT state and sets the
- * retransmission timer to 0. This will cause a TCP SYN segment to be
- * sent out the next time this connection is periodically processed,
- * which usually is done within 0.5 seconds after the call to
- * uip_connect().
- *
- * \note This function is available only if support for active open
- * has been configured by defining UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN to 1 in uipopt.h.
- *
- * \note Since this function requires the port number to be in network
- * byte order, a conversion using HTONS() or htons() is necessary.
- *
- \code
- uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr;
-
- uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr, 192,168,1,2);
- uip_connect(&ipaddr, HTONS(80));
- \endcode
- *
- * \param ripaddr The IP address of the remote host.
- *
- * \param port A 16-bit port number in network byte order.
- *
- * \return A pointer to the uIP connection identifier for the new connection,
- * or NULL if no connection could be allocated.
- *
- */
-struct uip_conn *uip_connect(uip_ipaddr_t *ripaddr, u16_t port);
-
-
-
-/**
- * \internal
- *
- * Check if a connection has outstanding (i.e., unacknowledged) data.
- *
- * \param conn A pointer to the uip_conn structure for the connection.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_outstanding(conn) ((conn)->len)
-
-/**
- * Send data on the current connection.
- *
- * This function is used to send out a single segment of TCP
- * data. Only applications that have been invoked by uIP for event
- * processing can send data.
- *
- * The amount of data that actually is sent out after a call to this
- * function is determined by the maximum amount of data TCP allows. uIP
- * will automatically crop the data so that only the appropriate
- * amount of data is sent. The function uip_mss() can be used to query
- * uIP for the amount of data that actually will be sent.
- *
- * \note This function does not guarantee that the sent data will
- * arrive at the destination. If the data is lost in the network, the
- * application will be invoked with the uip_rexmit() event being
- * set. The application will then have to resend the data using this
- * function.
- *
- * \param data A pointer to the data which is to be sent.
- *
- * \param len The maximum amount of data bytes to be sent.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-void uip_send(const void *data, int len);
-
-/**
- * The length of any incoming data that is currently available (if available)
- * in the uip_appdata buffer.
- *
- * The test function uip_data() must first be used to check if there
- * is any data available at all.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-/*void uip_datalen(void);*/
-#define uip_datalen()       uip_len
-
-/**
- * The length of any out-of-band data (urgent data) that has arrived
- * on the connection.
- *
- * \note The configuration parameter UIP_URGDATA must be set for this
- * function to be enabled.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_urgdatalen()    uip_urglen
-
-/**
- * Close the current connection.
- *
- * This function will close the current connection in a nice way.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_close()         (uip_flags = UIP_CLOSE)
-
-/**
- * Abort the current connection.
- *
- * This function will abort (reset) the current connection, and is
- * usually used when an error has occurred that prevents using the
- * uip_close() function.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_abort()         (uip_flags = UIP_ABORT)
-
-/**
- * Tell the sending host to stop sending data.
- *
- * This function will close our receiver's window so that we stop
- * receiving data for the current connection.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_stop()          (uip_conn->tcpstateflags |= UIP_STOPPED)
-
-/**
- * Find out if the current connection has been previously stopped with
- * uip_stop().
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_stopped(conn)   ((conn)->tcpstateflags & UIP_STOPPED)
-
-/**
- * Restart the current connection, if is has previously been stopped
- * with uip_stop().
- *
- * This function will open the receiver's window again so that we
- * start receiving data for the current connection.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_restart()         do { uip_flags |= UIP_NEWDATA;    \
-    uip_conn->tcpstateflags &= ~UIP_STOPPED;                    \
-  } while(0)
-
-
-/* uIP tests that can be made to determine in what state the current
-   connection is, and what the application function should do. */
-
-/**
- * Is the current connection a UDP connection?
- *
- * This function checks whether the current connection is a UDP connection.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- *
- */
-#define uip_udpconnection() (uip_conn == NULL)
-
-/**
- * Is new incoming data available?
- *
- * Will reduce to non-zero if there is new data for the application
- * present at the uip_appdata pointer. The size of the data is
- * available through the uip_len variable.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_newdata()   (uip_flags & UIP_NEWDATA)
-
-/**
- * Has previously sent data been acknowledged?
- *
- * Will reduce to non-zero if the previously sent data has been
- * acknowledged by the remote host. This means that the application
- * can send new data.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_acked()   (uip_flags & UIP_ACKDATA)
-
-/**
- * Has the connection just been connected?
- *
- * Reduces to non-zero if the current connection has been connected to
- * a remote host. This will happen both if the connection has been
- * actively opened (with uip_connect()) or passively opened (with
- * uip_listen()).
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_connected() (uip_flags & UIP_CONNECTED)
-
-/**
- * Has the connection been closed by the other end?
- *
- * Is non-zero if the connection has been closed by the remote
- * host. The application may then do the necessary clean-ups.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_closed()    (uip_flags & UIP_CLOSE)
-
-/**
- * Has the connection been aborted by the other end?
- *
- * Non-zero if the current connection has been aborted (reset) by the
- * remote host.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_aborted()    (uip_flags & UIP_ABORT)
-
-/**
- * Has the connection timed out?
- *
- * Non-zero if the current connection has been aborted due to too many
- * retransmissions.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_timedout()    (uip_flags & UIP_TIMEDOUT)
-
-/**
- * Do we need to retransmit previously data?
- *
- * Reduces to non-zero if the previously sent data has been lost in
- * the network, and the application should retransmit it. The
- * application should send the exact same data as it did the last
- * time, using the uip_send() function.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_rexmit()     (uip_flags & UIP_REXMIT)
-
-/**
- * Is the connection being polled by uIP?
- *
- * Is non-zero if the reason the application is invoked is that the
- * current connection has been idle for a while and should be
- * polled.
- *
- * The polling event can be used for sending data without having to
- * wait for the remote host to send data.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_poll()       (uip_flags & UIP_POLL)
-
-/**
- * Get the initial maximum segment size (MSS) of the current
- * connection.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_initialmss()             (uip_conn->initialmss)
-
-/**
- * Get the current maximum segment size that can be sent on the current
- * connection.
- *
- * The current maximum segment size that can be sent on the
- * connection is computed from the receiver's window and the MSS of
- * the connection (which also is available by calling
- * uip_initialmss()).
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_mss()             (uip_conn->mss)
-
-/**
- * Set up a new UDP connection.
- *
- * This function sets up a new UDP connection. The function will
- * automatically allocate an unused local port for the new
- * connection. However, another port can be chosen by using the
- * uip_udp_bind() call, after the uip_udp_new() function has been
- * called.
- *
- * Example:
- \code
- uip_ipaddr_t addr;
- struct uip_udp_conn *c;
-
- uip_ipaddr(&addr, 192,168,2,1);
- c = uip_udp_new(&addr, HTONS(12345));
- if(c != NULL) {
- uip_udp_bind(c, HTONS(12344));
- }
- \endcode
- * \param ripaddr The IP address of the remote host.
- *
- * \param rport The remote port number in network byte order.
- *
- * \return The uip_udp_conn structure for the new connection or NULL
- * if no connection could be allocated.
- */
-struct uip_udp_conn *uip_udp_new(const uip_ipaddr_t *ripaddr, u16_t rport);
-
-/**
- * Removed a UDP connection.
- *
- * \param conn A pointer to the uip_udp_conn structure for the connection.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_udp_remove(conn) (conn)->lport = 0
-
-/**
- * Bind a UDP connection to a local port.
- *
- * \param conn A pointer to the uip_udp_conn structure for the
- * connection.
- *
- * \param port The local port number, in network byte order.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_udp_bind(conn, port) (conn)->lport = port
-
-/**
- * Send a UDP datagram of length len on the current connection.
- *
- * This function can only be called in response to a UDP event (poll
- * or newdata). The data must be present in the uip_buf buffer, at the
- * place pointed to by the uip_appdata pointer.
- *
- * \param len The length of the data in the uip_buf buffer.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_udp_send(len) uip_send((char *)uip_appdata, len)
-
-/** @} */
-
-/* uIP convenience and converting functions. */
-
-/**
- * \defgroup uipconvfunc uIP conversion functions
- * @{
- *
- * These functions can be used for converting between different data
- * formats used by uIP.
- */
-
-/**
- * Convert an IP address to four bytes separated by commas.
- *
- * Example:
- \code
- uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr;
- printf("ipaddr=%d.%d.%d.%d\n", uip_ipaddr_to_quad(&ipaddr));
- \endcode
- *
- * \param a A pointer to a uip_ipaddr_t.
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_ipaddr_to_quad(a) (a)->u8[0],(a)->u8[1],(a)->u8[2],(a)->u8[3]
-
-/**
- * Construct an IP address from four bytes.
- *
- * This function constructs an IP address of the type that uIP handles
- * internally from four bytes. The function is handy for specifying IP
- * addresses to use with e.g. the uip_connect() function.
- *
- * Example:
- \code
- uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr;
- struct uip_conn *c;
-
- uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr, 192,168,1,2);
- c = uip_connect(&ipaddr, HTONS(80));
- \endcode
- *
- * \param addr A pointer to a uip_ipaddr_t variable that will be
- * filled in with the IP address.
- *
- * \param addr0 The first octet of the IP address.
- * \param addr1 The second octet of the IP address.
- * \param addr2 The third octet of the IP address.
- * \param addr3 The forth octet of the IP address.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_ipaddr(addr, addr0,addr1,addr2,addr3) do {  \
-    (addr)->u8[0] = addr0;                              \
-    (addr)->u8[1] = addr1;                              \
-    (addr)->u8[2] = addr2;                              \
-    (addr)->u8[3] = addr3;                              \
-  } while(0)
-
-/**
- * Construct an IPv6 address from eight 16-bit words.
- *
- * This function constructs an IPv6 address.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_ip6addr(addr, addr0,addr1,addr2,addr3,addr4,addr5,addr6,addr7) do { \
-    (addr)->u16[0] = HTONS(addr0);                                      \
-    (addr)->u16[1] = HTONS(addr1);                                      \
-    (addr)->u16[2] = HTONS(addr2);                                      \
-    (addr)->u16[3] = HTONS(addr3);                                      \
-    (addr)->u16[4] = HTONS(addr4);                                      \
-    (addr)->u16[5] = HTONS(addr5);                                      \
-    (addr)->u16[6] = HTONS(addr6);                                      \
-    (addr)->u16[7] = HTONS(addr7);                                      \
-  } while(0)
-
-/**
- * Construct an IPv6 address from sixteen 8-bit words.
- *
- * This function constructs an IPv6 address.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_ip6addr_u8(addr, addr0,addr1,addr2,addr3,addr4,addr5,addr6,addr7,addr8,addr9,addr10,addr11,addr12,addr13,addr14,addr15) do { \
-    (addr)->u8[0] = addr0;                                       \
-    (addr)->u8[1] = addr1;                                       \
-    (addr)->u8[2] = addr2;                                       \
-    (addr)->u8[3] = addr3;                                       \
-    (addr)->u8[4] = addr4;                                       \
-    (addr)->u8[5] = addr5;                                       \
-    (addr)->u8[6] = addr6;                                       \
-    (addr)->u8[7] = addr7;                                       \
-    (addr)->u8[8] = addr8;                                       \
-    (addr)->u8[9] = addr9;                                       \
-    (addr)->u8[10] = addr10;                                     \
-    (addr)->u8[11] = addr11;                                     \
-    (addr)->u8[12] = addr12;                                     \
-    (addr)->u8[13] = addr13;                                     \
-    (addr)->u8[14] = addr14;                                     \
-    (addr)->u8[15] = addr15;                                     \
-  } while(0)
-
-
-/**
- * Copy an IP address to another IP address.
- *
- * Copies an IP address from one place to another.
- *
- * Example:
- \code
- uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr1, ipaddr2;
-
- uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr1, 192,16,1,2);
- uip_ipaddr_copy(&ipaddr2, &ipaddr1);
- \endcode
- *
- * \param dest The destination for the copy.
- * \param src The source from where to copy.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#ifndef uip_ipaddr_copy
-#define uip_ipaddr_copy(dest, src) (*(dest) = *(src))
-#endif
-
-/**
- * Compare two IP addresses
- *
- * Compares two IP addresses.
- *
- * Example:
- \code
- uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr1, ipaddr2;
-
- uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr1, 192,16,1,2);
- if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&ipaddr2, &ipaddr1)) {
- printf("They are the same");
- }
- \endcode
- *
- * \param addr1 The first IP address.
- * \param addr2 The second IP address.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6
-#define uip_ipaddr_cmp(addr1, addr2) ((addr1)->u16[0] == (addr2)->u16[0] && \
-				      (addr1)->u16[1] == (addr2)->u16[1])
-#else /* !UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-#define uip_ipaddr_cmp(addr1, addr2) (memcmp(addr1, addr2, sizeof(uip_ip6addr_t)) == 0)
-#endif /* !UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-
-/**
- * Compare two IP addresses with netmasks
- *
- * Compares two IP addresses with netmasks. The masks are used to mask
- * out the bits that are to be compared.
- *
- * Example:
- \code
- uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr1, ipaddr2, mask;
-
- uip_ipaddr(&mask, 255,255,255,0);
- uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr1, 192,16,1,2);
- uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr2, 192,16,1,3);
- if(uip_ipaddr_maskcmp(&ipaddr1, &ipaddr2, &mask)) {
- printf("They are the same");
- }
- \endcode
- *
- * \param addr1 The first IP address.
- * \param addr2 The second IP address.
- * \param mask The netmask.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6
-#define uip_ipaddr_maskcmp(addr1, addr2, mask)          \
-  (((((u16_t *)addr1)[0] & ((u16_t *)mask)[0]) ==       \
-    (((u16_t *)addr2)[0] & ((u16_t *)mask)[0])) &&      \
-   ((((u16_t *)addr1)[1] & ((u16_t *)mask)[1]) ==       \
-    (((u16_t *)addr2)[1] & ((u16_t *)mask)[1])))
-#else
-#define uip_ipaddr_prefixcmp(addr1, addr2, length) (memcmp(addr1, addr2, length>>3) == 0)
-#endif
-
-
-/**
- * Check if an address is a broadcast address for a network.
- *
- * Checks if an address is the broadcast address for a network. The
- * network is defined by an IP address that is on the network and the
- * network's netmask.
- *
- * \param addr The IP address.
- * \param netaddr The network's IP address.
- * \param netmask The network's netmask.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-/*#define uip_ipaddr_isbroadcast(addr, netaddr, netmask)
-  ((uip_ipaddr_t *)(addr)).u16 & ((uip_ipaddr_t *)(addr)).u16*/
-
-
-
-/**
- * Mask out the network part of an IP address.
- *
- * Masks out the network part of an IP address, given the address and
- * the netmask.
- *
- * Example:
- \code
- uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr1, ipaddr2, netmask;
-
- uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr1, 192,16,1,2);
- uip_ipaddr(&netmask, 255,255,255,0);
- uip_ipaddr_mask(&ipaddr2, &ipaddr1, &netmask);
- \endcode
- *
- * In the example above, the variable "ipaddr2" will contain the IP
- * address 192.168.1.0.
- *
- * \param dest Where the result is to be placed.
- * \param src The IP address.
- * \param mask The netmask.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_ipaddr_mask(dest, src, mask) do {                           \
-    ((u16_t *)dest)[0] = ((u16_t *)src)[0] & ((u16_t *)mask)[0];        \
-    ((u16_t *)dest)[1] = ((u16_t *)src)[1] & ((u16_t *)mask)[1];        \
-  } while(0)
-
-/**
- * Pick the first octet of an IP address.
- *
- * Picks out the first octet of an IP address.
- *
- * Example:
- \code
- uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr;
- u8_t octet;
-
- uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr, 1,2,3,4);
- octet = uip_ipaddr1(&ipaddr);
- \endcode
- *
- * In the example above, the variable "octet" will contain the value 1.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_ipaddr1(addr) ((addr)->u8[0])
-
-/**
- * Pick the second octet of an IP address.
- *
- * Picks out the second octet of an IP address.
- *
- * Example:
- \code
- uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr;
- u8_t octet;
-
- uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr, 1,2,3,4);
- octet = uip_ipaddr2(&ipaddr);
- \endcode
- *
- * In the example above, the variable "octet" will contain the value 2.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_ipaddr2(addr) ((addr)->u8[1])
-
-/**
- * Pick the third octet of an IP address.
- *
- * Picks out the third octet of an IP address.
- *
- * Example:
- \code
- uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr;
- u8_t octet;
-
- uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr, 1,2,3,4);
- octet = uip_ipaddr3(&ipaddr);
- \endcode
- *
- * In the example above, the variable "octet" will contain the value 3.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_ipaddr3(addr) ((addr)->u8[2])
-
-/**
- * Pick the fourth octet of an IP address.
- *
- * Picks out the fourth octet of an IP address.
- *
- * Example:
- \code
- uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr;
- u8_t octet;
-
- uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr, 1,2,3,4);
- octet = uip_ipaddr4(&ipaddr);
- \endcode
- *
- * In the example above, the variable "octet" will contain the value 4.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_ipaddr4(addr) ((addr)->u8[3])
-
-/**
- * Convert 16-bit quantity from host byte order to network byte order.
- *
- * This macro is primarily used for converting constants from host
- * byte order to network byte order. For converting variables to
- * network byte order, use the htons() function instead.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#ifndef HTONS
-#   if UIP_BYTE_ORDER == UIP_BIG_ENDIAN
-#      define HTONS(n) (n)
-#      define HTONL(n) (n)
-#   else /* UIP_BYTE_ORDER == UIP_BIG_ENDIAN */
-#      define HTONS(n) (u16_t)((((u16_t) (n)) << 8) | (((u16_t) (n)) >> 8))
-#      define HTONL(n) (((u32_t)HTONS(n) << 16) | HTONS((u32_t)(n) >> 16))
-#   endif /* UIP_BYTE_ORDER == UIP_BIG_ENDIAN */
-#else
-#error "HTONS already defined!"
-#endif /* HTONS */
-
-/**
- * Convert 16-bit quantity from host byte order to network byte order.
- *
- * This function is primarily used for converting variables from host
- * byte order to network byte order. For converting constants to
- * network byte order, use the HTONS() macro instead.
- */
-#ifndef htons
-u16_t htons(u16_t val);
-#endif /* htons */
-#ifndef ntohs
-#define ntohs htons
-#endif
-
-#ifndef htonl
-u32_t htonl(u32_t val);
-#endif /* htonl */
-#ifndef ntohl
-#define ntohl htonl
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
-
-/**
- * Pointer to the application data in the packet buffer.
- *
- * This pointer points to the application data when the application is
- * called. If the application wishes to send data, the application may
- * use this space to write the data into before calling uip_send().
- */
-extern void *uip_appdata;
-
-#if UIP_URGDATA > 0
-/* u8_t *uip_urgdata:
- *
- * This pointer points to any urgent data that has been received. Only
- * present if compiled with support for urgent data (UIP_URGDATA).
- */
-extern void *uip_urgdata;
-#endif /* UIP_URGDATA > 0 */
-
-
-/**
- * \defgroup uipdrivervars Variables used in uIP device drivers
- * @{
- *
- * uIP has a few global variables that are used in device drivers for
- * uIP.
- */
-
-/**
- * The length of the packet in the uip_buf buffer.
- *
- * The global variable uip_len holds the length of the packet in the
- * uip_buf buffer.
- *
- * When the network device driver calls the uIP input function,
- * uip_len should be set to the length of the packet in the uip_buf
- * buffer.
- *
- * When sending packets, the device driver should use the contents of
- * the uip_len variable to determine the length of the outgoing
- * packet.
- *
- */
-extern u16_t uip_len;
-
-/**
- * The length of the extension headers
- */
-extern u8_t uip_ext_len;
-/** @} */
-
-#if UIP_URGDATA > 0
-extern u16_t uip_urglen, uip_surglen;
-#endif /* UIP_URGDATA > 0 */
-
-
-/**
- * Representation of a uIP TCP connection.
- *
- * The uip_conn structure is used for identifying a connection. All
- * but one field in the structure are to be considered read-only by an
- * application. The only exception is the appstate field whose purpose
- * is to let the application store application-specific state (e.g.,
- * file pointers) for the connection. The type of this field is
- * configured in the "uipopt.h" header file.
- */
-struct uip_conn {
-  uip_ipaddr_t ripaddr;   /**< The IP address of the remote host. */
-
-  u16_t lport;        /**< The local TCP port, in network byte order. */
-  u16_t rport;        /**< The local remote TCP port, in network byte
-			 order. */
-
-  u8_t rcv_nxt[4];    /**< The sequence number that we expect to
-			 receive next. */
-  u8_t snd_nxt[4];    /**< The sequence number that was last sent by
-                         us. */
-  u16_t len;          /**< Length of the data that was previously sent. */
-  u16_t mss;          /**< Current maximum segment size for the
-			 connection. */
-  u16_t initialmss;   /**< Initial maximum segment size for the
-			 connection. */
-  u8_t sa;            /**< Retransmission time-out calculation state
-			 variable. */
-  u8_t sv;            /**< Retransmission time-out calculation state
-			 variable. */
-  u8_t rto;           /**< Retransmission time-out. */
-  u8_t tcpstateflags; /**< TCP state and flags. */
-  u8_t timer;         /**< The retransmission timer. */
-  u8_t nrtx;          /**< The number of retransmissions for the last
-			 segment sent. */
-
-  /** The application state. */
-  uip_tcp_appstate_t appstate;
-};
-
-
-/**
- * Pointer to the current TCP connection.
- *
- * The uip_conn pointer can be used to access the current TCP
- * connection.
- */
-
-extern struct uip_conn *uip_conn;
-#if UIP_TCP
-/* The array containing all uIP connections. */
-extern struct uip_conn uip_conns[UIP_CONNS];
-#endif
-
-/**
- * \addtogroup uiparch
- * @{
- */
-
-/**
- * 4-byte array used for the 32-bit sequence number calculations.
- */
-extern u8_t uip_acc32[4];
-/** @} */
-
-/**
- * Representation of a uIP UDP connection.
- */
-struct uip_udp_conn {
-  uip_ipaddr_t ripaddr;   /**< The IP address of the remote peer. */
-  u16_t lport;        /**< The local port number in network byte order. */
-  u16_t rport;        /**< The remote port number in network byte order. */
-  u8_t  ttl;          /**< Default time-to-live. */
-
-  /** The application state. */
-  uip_udp_appstate_t appstate;
-};
-
-/**
- * The current UDP connection.
- */
-extern struct uip_udp_conn *uip_udp_conn;
-extern struct uip_udp_conn uip_udp_conns[UIP_UDP_CONNS];
-
-struct uip_router {
-  int (*activate)(void);
-  int (*deactivate)(void);
-  uip_ipaddr_t *(*lookup)(uip_ipaddr_t *destipaddr, uip_ipaddr_t *nexthop);
-};
-
-#if UIP_CONF_ROUTER
-extern const struct uip_router *uip_router;
-
-/**
- * uIP routing driver registration function.
- */
-void uip_router_register(const struct uip_router *router);
-#endif /*UIP_CONF_ROUTER*/
-
-#if UIP_CONF_ICMP6
-struct uip_icmp6_conn {
-  uip_icmp6_appstate_t appstate;
-};
-extern struct uip_icmp6_conn uip_icmp6_conns;
-#endif /*UIP_CONF_ICMP6*/
-
-/**
- * The uIP TCP/IP statistics.
- *
- * This is the variable in which the uIP TCP/IP statistics are gathered.
- */
-#if UIP_STATISTICS == 1
-extern struct uip_stats uip_stat;
-#define UIP_STAT(s) s
-#else
-#define UIP_STAT(s)
-#endif /* UIP_STATISTICS == 1 */
-
-/**
- * The structure holding the TCP/IP statistics that are gathered if
- * UIP_STATISTICS is set to 1.
- *
- */
-struct uip_stats {
-  struct {
-    uip_stats_t recv;     /**< Number of received packets at the IP
-			     layer. */
-    uip_stats_t sent;     /**< Number of sent packets at the IP
-			     layer. */
-    uip_stats_t forwarded;/**< Number of forwarded packets at the IP
-			     layer. */
-    uip_stats_t drop;     /**< Number of dropped packets at the IP
-			     layer. */
-    uip_stats_t vhlerr;   /**< Number of packets dropped due to wrong
-			     IP version or header length. */
-    uip_stats_t hblenerr; /**< Number of packets dropped due to wrong
-			     IP length, high byte. */
-    uip_stats_t lblenerr; /**< Number of packets dropped due to wrong
-			     IP length, low byte. */
-    uip_stats_t fragerr;  /**< Number of packets dropped since they
-			     were IP fragments. */
-    uip_stats_t chkerr;   /**< Number of packets dropped due to IP
-			     checksum errors. */
-    uip_stats_t protoerr; /**< Number of packets dropped since they
-			     were neither ICMP, UDP nor TCP. */
-  } ip;                   /**< IP statistics. */
-  struct {
-    uip_stats_t recv;     /**< Number of received ICMP packets. */
-    uip_stats_t sent;     /**< Number of sent ICMP packets. */
-    uip_stats_t drop;     /**< Number of dropped ICMP packets. */
-    uip_stats_t typeerr;  /**< Number of ICMP packets with a wrong
-			     type. */
-    uip_stats_t chkerr;   /**< Number of ICMP packets with a bad
-			     checksum. */
-  } icmp;                 /**< ICMP statistics. */
-#if UIP_TCP
-  struct {
-    uip_stats_t recv;     /**< Number of received TCP segments. */
-    uip_stats_t sent;     /**< Number of sent TCP segments. */
-    uip_stats_t drop;     /**< Number of dropped TCP segments. */
-    uip_stats_t chkerr;   /**< Number of TCP segments with a bad
-			     checksum. */
-    uip_stats_t ackerr;   /**< Number of TCP segments with a bad ACK
-			     number. */
-    uip_stats_t rst;      /**< Number of received TCP RST (reset) segments. */
-    uip_stats_t rexmit;   /**< Number of retransmitted TCP segments. */
-    uip_stats_t syndrop;  /**< Number of dropped SYNs due to too few
-			     connections was available. */
-    uip_stats_t synrst;   /**< Number of SYNs for closed ports,
-			     triggering a RST. */
-  } tcp;                  /**< TCP statistics. */
-#endif
-#if UIP_UDP
-  struct {
-    uip_stats_t drop;     /**< Number of dropped UDP segments. */
-    uip_stats_t recv;     /**< Number of received UDP segments. */
-    uip_stats_t sent;     /**< Number of sent UDP segments. */
-    uip_stats_t chkerr;   /**< Number of UDP segments with a bad
-			     checksum. */
-  } udp;                  /**< UDP statistics. */
-#endif /* UIP_UDP */
-#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
-  struct {
-    uip_stats_t drop;     /**< Number of dropped ND6 packets. */
-    uip_stats_t recv;     /**< Number of received ND6 packets */
-    uip_stats_t sent;     /**< Number of sent ND6 packets */
-  } nd6;
-#endif /*UIP_CONF_IPV6*/
-};
-
-
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/* All the stuff below this point is internal to uIP and should not be
- * used directly by an application or by a device driver.
- */
-/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-
-
-/* u8_t uip_flags:
- *
- * When the application is called, uip_flags will contain the flags
- * that are defined in this file. Please read below for more
- * information.
- */
-extern u8_t uip_flags;
-
-/* The following flags may be set in the global variable uip_flags
-   before calling the application callback. The UIP_ACKDATA,
-   UIP_NEWDATA, and UIP_CLOSE flags may both be set at the same time,
-   whereas the others are mutually exclusive. Note that these flags
-   should *NOT* be accessed directly, but only through the uIP
-   functions/macros. */
-
-#define UIP_ACKDATA   1     /* Signifies that the outstanding data was
-			       acked and the application should send
-			       out new data instead of retransmitting
-			       the last data. */
-#define UIP_NEWDATA   2     /* Flags the fact that the peer has sent
-			       us new data. */
-#define UIP_REXMIT    4     /* Tells the application to retransmit the
-			       data that was last sent. */
-#define UIP_POLL      8     /* Used for polling the application, to
-			       check if the application has data that
-			       it wants to send. */
-#define UIP_CLOSE     16    /* The remote host has closed the
-			       connection, thus the connection has
-			       gone away. Or the application signals
-			       that it wants to close the
-			       connection. */
-#define UIP_ABORT     32    /* The remote host has aborted the
-			       connection, thus the connection has
-			       gone away. Or the application signals
-			       that it wants to abort the
-			       connection. */
-#define UIP_CONNECTED 64    /* We have got a connection from a remote
-                               host and have set up a new connection
-                               for it, or an active connection has
-                               been successfully established. */
-
-#define UIP_TIMEDOUT  128   /* The connection has been aborted due to
-			       too many retransmissions. */
-
-
-/**
- * \brief process the options within a hop by hop or destination option header
- * \retval 0: nothing to send,
- * \retval 1: drop pkt
- * \retval 2: ICMP error message to send
-*/
-/*static u8_t
-uip_ext_hdr_options_process(); */
-
-/* uip_process(flag):
- *
- * The actual uIP function which does all the work.
- */
-void uip_process(u8_t flag);
-
-  /* The following flags are passed as an argument to the uip_process()
-   function. They are used to distinguish between the two cases where
-   uip_process() is called. It can be called either because we have
-   incoming data that should be processed, or because the periodic
-   timer has fired. These values are never used directly, but only in
-   the macros defined in this file. */
-
-#define UIP_DATA          1     /* Tells uIP that there is incoming
-				   data in the uip_buf buffer. The
-				   length of the data is stored in the
-				   global variable uip_len. */
-#define UIP_TIMER         2     /* Tells uIP that the periodic timer
-				   has fired. */
-#define UIP_POLL_REQUEST  3     /* Tells uIP that a connection should
-				   be polled. */
-#define UIP_UDP_SEND_CONN 4     /* Tells uIP that a UDP datagram
-				   should be constructed in the
-				   uip_buf buffer. */
-#if UIP_UDP
-#define UIP_UDP_TIMER     5
-#endif /* UIP_UDP */
-
-/* The TCP states used in the uip_conn->tcpstateflags. */
-#define UIP_CLOSED      0
-#define UIP_SYN_RCVD    1
-#define UIP_SYN_SENT    2
-#define UIP_ESTABLISHED 3
-#define UIP_FIN_WAIT_1  4
-#define UIP_FIN_WAIT_2  5
-#define UIP_CLOSING     6
-#define UIP_TIME_WAIT   7
-#define UIP_LAST_ACK    8
-#define UIP_TS_MASK     15
-
-#define UIP_STOPPED      16
-
-/* The TCP and IP headers. */
-struct uip_tcpip_hdr {
-#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
-  /* IPv6 header. */
-  u8_t vtc,
-    tcflow;
-  u16_t flow;
-  u8_t len[2];
-  u8_t proto, ttl;
-  uip_ip6addr_t srcipaddr, destipaddr;
-#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-  /* IPv4 header. */
-  u8_t vhl,
-    tos,
-    len[2],
-    ipid[2],
-    ipoffset[2],
-    ttl,
-    proto;
-  u16_t ipchksum;
-  uip_ipaddr_t srcipaddr, destipaddr;
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-
-  /* TCP header. */
-  u16_t srcport,
-    destport;
-  u8_t seqno[4],
-    ackno[4],
-    tcpoffset,
-    flags,
-    wnd[2];
-  u16_t tcpchksum;
-  u8_t urgp[2];
-  u8_t optdata[4];
-};
-
-/* The ICMP and IP headers. */
-struct uip_icmpip_hdr {
-#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
-  /* IPv6 header. */
-  u8_t vtc,
-    tcf;
-  u16_t flow;
-  u8_t len[2];
-  u8_t proto, ttl;
-  uip_ip6addr_t srcipaddr, destipaddr;
-#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-  /* IPv4 header. */
-  u8_t vhl,
-    tos,
-    len[2],
-    ipid[2],
-    ipoffset[2],
-    ttl,
-    proto;
-  u16_t ipchksum;
-  uip_ipaddr_t srcipaddr, destipaddr;
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-
-  /* ICMP header. */
-  u8_t type, icode;
-  u16_t icmpchksum;
-#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6
-  u16_t id, seqno;
-  u8_t payload[1];
-#endif /* !UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-};
-
-
-/* The UDP and IP headers. */
-struct uip_udpip_hdr {
-#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
-  /* IPv6 header. */
-  u8_t vtc,
-    tcf;
-  u16_t flow;
-  u8_t len[2];
-  u8_t proto, ttl;
-  uip_ip6addr_t srcipaddr, destipaddr;
-#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-  /* IP header. */
-  u8_t vhl,
-    tos,
-    len[2],
-    ipid[2],
-    ipoffset[2],
-    ttl,
-    proto;
-  u16_t ipchksum;
-  uip_ipaddr_t srcipaddr, destipaddr;
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-
-  /* UDP header. */
-  u16_t srcport,
-    destport;
-  u16_t udplen;
-  u16_t udpchksum;
-};
-
-/*
- * In IPv6 the length of the L3 headers before the transport header is
- * not fixed, due to the possibility to include extension option headers
- * after the IP header. hence we split here L3 and L4 headers
- */
-/* The IP header */
-struct uip_ip_hdr {
-#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
-  /* IPV6 header */
-  u8_t vtc;
-  u8_t tcflow;
-  u16_t flow;
-  u8_t len[2];
-  u8_t proto, ttl;
-  uip_ip6addr_t srcipaddr, destipaddr;
-#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-  /* IPV4 header */
-  u8_t vhl,
-    tos,
-    len[2],
-    ipid[2],
-    ipoffset[2],
-    ttl,
-    proto;
-  u16_t ipchksum;
-  uip_ipaddr_t srcipaddr, destipaddr;
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-};
-
-
-/*
- * IPv6 extension option headers: we are able to process
- * the 4 extension headers defined in RFC2460 (IPv6):
- * - Hop by hop option header, destination option header:
- *   These two are not used by any core IPv6 protocol, hence
- *   we just read them and go to the next. They convey options,
- *   the options defined in RFC2460 are Pad1 and PadN, which do
- *   some padding, and that we do not need to read (the length
- *   field in the header is enough)
- * - Routing header: this one is most notably used by MIPv6,
- *   which we do not implement, hence we just read it and go
- *   to the next
- * - Fragmentation header: we read this header and are able to
- *   reassemble packets
- *
- * We do not offer any means to send packets with extension headers
- *
- * We do not implement Authentication and ESP headers, which are
- * used in IPSec and defined in RFC4302,4303,4305,4385
- */
-/* common header part */
-struct uip_ext_hdr {
-  u8_t next;
-  u8_t len;
-};
-
-/* Hop by Hop option header */
-struct uip_hbho_hdr {
-  u8_t next;
-  u8_t len;
-};
-
-/* destination option header */
-struct uip_desto_hdr {
-  u8_t next;
-  u8_t len;
-};
-
-/* We do not define structures for PAD1 and PADN options */
-
-/*
- * routing header
- * the routing header as 4 common bytes, then routing header type
- * specific data there are several types of routing header. Type 0 was
- * deprecated as per RFC5095 most notable other type is 2, used in
- * RFC3775 (MIPv6) here we do not implement MIPv6, so we just need to
- * parse the 4 first bytes
- */
-struct uip_routing_hdr {
-  u8_t next;
-  u8_t len;
-  u8_t routing_type;
-  u8_t seg_left;
-};
-
-/* fragmentation header */
-struct uip_frag_hdr {
-  u8_t next;
-  u8_t res;
-  u16_t offsetresmore;
-  u32_t id;
-};
-
-/*
- * an option within the destination or hop by hop option headers
- * it contains type an length, which is true for all options but PAD1
- */
-struct uip_ext_hdr_opt {
-  u8_t type;
-  u8_t len;
-};
-
-/* PADN option */
-struct uip_ext_hdr_opt_padn {
-  u8_t opt_type;
-  u8_t opt_len;
-};
-
-/* TCP header */
-struct uip_tcp_hdr {
-  u16_t srcport;
-  u16_t destport;
-  u8_t seqno[4];
-  u8_t ackno[4];
-  u8_t tcpoffset;
-  u8_t flags;
-  u8_t  wnd[2];
-  u16_t tcpchksum;
-  u8_t urgp[2];
-  u8_t optdata[4];
-};
-
-/* The ICMP headers. */
-struct uip_icmp_hdr {
-  u8_t type, icode;
-  u16_t icmpchksum;
-#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6
-  u16_t id, seqno;
-#endif /* !UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-};
-
-
-/* The UDP headers. */
-struct uip_udp_hdr {
-  u16_t srcport;
-  u16_t destport;
-  u16_t udplen;
-  u16_t udpchksum;
-};
-
-
-/**
- * The buffer size available for user data in the \ref uip_buf buffer.
- *
- * This macro holds the available size for user data in the \ref
- * uip_buf buffer. The macro is intended to be used for checking
- * bounds of available user data.
- *
- * Example:
- \code
- snprintf(uip_appdata, UIP_APPDATA_SIZE, "%u\n", i);
- \endcode
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define UIP_APPDATA_SIZE (UIP_BUFSIZE - UIP_LLH_LEN - UIP_TCPIP_HLEN)
-#define UIP_APPDATA_PTR (void *)&uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_TCPIP_HLEN]
-
-#define UIP_PROTO_ICMP  1
-#define UIP_PROTO_TCP   6
-#define UIP_PROTO_UDP   17
-#define UIP_PROTO_ICMP6 58
-
-
-#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
-/** @{ */
-/** \brief  extension headers types */
-#define UIP_PROTO_HBHO        0
-#define UIP_PROTO_DESTO       60
-#define UIP_PROTO_ROUTING     43
-#define UIP_PROTO_FRAG        44
-#define UIP_PROTO_NONE        59
-/** @} */
-
-/** @{ */
-/** \brief  Destination and Hop By Hop extension headers option types */
-#define UIP_EXT_HDR_OPT_PAD1  0
-#define UIP_EXT_HDR_OPT_PADN  1
-/** @} */
-
-/** @{ */
-/**
- * \brief Bitmaps for extension header processing
- *
- * When processing extension headers, we should record somehow which one we
- * see, because you cannot have twice the same header, except for destination
- * We store all this in one u8_t bitmap one bit for each header expected. The
- * order in the bitmap is the order recommended in RFC2460
- */
-#define UIP_EXT_HDR_BITMAP_HBHO 0x01
-#define UIP_EXT_HDR_BITMAP_DESTO1 0x02
-#define UIP_EXT_HDR_BITMAP_ROUTING 0x04
-#define UIP_EXT_HDR_BITMAP_FRAG 0x08
-#define UIP_EXT_HDR_BITMAP_AH 0x10
-#define UIP_EXT_HDR_BITMAP_ESP 0x20
-#define UIP_EXT_HDR_BITMAP_DESTO2 0x40
-/** @} */
-
-
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-
-
-/* Header sizes. */
-#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
-#define UIP_IPH_LEN    40
-#define UIP_FRAGH_LEN  8
-#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-#define UIP_IPH_LEN    20    /* Size of IP header */
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
-
-#define UIP_UDPH_LEN    8    /* Size of UDP header */
-#define UIP_TCPH_LEN   20    /* Size of TCP header */
-#ifdef UIP_IPH_LEN
-#define UIP_ICMPH_LEN   4    /* Size of ICMP header */
-#endif
-#define UIP_IPUDPH_LEN (UIP_UDPH_LEN + UIP_IPH_LEN)    /* Size of IP +
-                        * UDP
-							   * header */
-#define UIP_IPTCPH_LEN (UIP_TCPH_LEN + UIP_IPH_LEN)    /* Size of IP +
-							   * TCP
-							   * header */
-#define UIP_TCPIP_HLEN UIP_IPTCPH_LEN
-#define UIP_IPICMPH_LEN (UIP_IPH_LEN + UIP_ICMPH_LEN) /* size of ICMP
-                                                         + IP header */
-#define UIP_LLIPH_LEN (UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_IPH_LEN)    /* size of L2
-                                                        + IP header */
-#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
-/**
- * The sums below are quite used in ND. When used for uip_buf, we
- * include link layer length when used for uip_len, we do not, hence
- * we need values with and without LLH_LEN we do not use capital
- * letters as these values are variable
- */
-#define uip_l2_l3_hdr_len (UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_IPH_LEN + uip_ext_len)
-#define uip_l2_l3_icmp_hdr_len (UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_IPH_LEN + uip_ext_len + UIP_ICMPH_LEN)
-#define uip_l3_hdr_len (UIP_IPH_LEN + uip_ext_len)
-#define uip_l3_icmp_hdr_len (UIP_IPH_LEN + uip_ext_len + UIP_ICMPH_LEN)
-#endif /*UIP_CONF_IPV6*/
-
-
-#if UIP_FIXEDADDR
-extern const uip_ipaddr_t uip_hostaddr, uip_netmask, uip_draddr;
-#else /* UIP_FIXEDADDR */
-extern uip_ipaddr_t uip_hostaddr, uip_netmask, uip_draddr;
-#endif /* UIP_FIXEDADDR */
-extern const uip_ipaddr_t uip_broadcast_addr;
-extern const uip_ipaddr_t uip_all_zeroes_addr;
-
-#if UIP_FIXEDETHADDR
-extern const uip_lladdr_t uip_lladdr;
-#else
-extern uip_lladdr_t uip_lladdr;
-#endif
-
-
-
-
-#ifdef UIP_CONF_IPV6
-/**
- * \brief Is IPv6 address a the unspecified address
- * a is of type uip_ipaddr_t
- */
-#define uip_is_addr_unspecified(a)               \
-  ((((a)->u16[0]) == 0) &&                       \
-   (((a)->u16[1]) == 0) &&                       \
-   (((a)->u16[2]) == 0) &&                       \
-   (((a)->u16[3]) == 0) &&                       \
-   (((a)->u16[4]) == 0) &&                       \
-   (((a)->u16[5]) == 0) &&                       \
-   (((a)->u16[6]) == 0) &&                       \
-   (((a)->u16[7]) == 0))
-
-/** \brief Is IPv6 address a the link local all-nodes multicast address */
-#define uip_is_addr_linklocal_allnodes_mcast(a)     \
-  ((((a)->u8[0]) == 0xff) &&                        \
-   (((a)->u8[1]) == 0x02) &&                        \
-   (((a)->u16[1]) == 0) &&                          \
-   (((a)->u16[2]) == 0) &&                          \
-   (((a)->u16[3]) == 0) &&                          \
-   (((a)->u16[4]) == 0) &&                          \
-   (((a)->u16[5]) == 0) &&                          \
-   (((a)->u16[6]) == 0) &&                          \
-   (((a)->u8[14]) == 0) &&                          \
-   (((a)->u8[15]) == 0x01))
-
-/** \brief set IP address a to unspecified */
-#define uip_create_unspecified(a) uip_ip6addr(a, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0)
-
-/** \brief set IP address a to the link local all-nodes multicast address */
-#define uip_create_linklocal_allnodes_mcast(a) uip_ip6addr(a, 0xff02, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0x0001)
-
-/** \brief set IP address a to the link local all-routers multicast address */
-#define uip_create_linklocal_allrouters_mcast(a) uip_ip6addr(a, 0xff02, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0x0002)
-
-/**
- * \brief  is addr (a) a solicited node multicast address, see RFC3513
- *  a is of type uip_ipaddr_t*
- */
-#define uip_is_addr_solicited_node(a)           \
-  ((((a)->u8[0]) == 0xFF) &&                     \
-  (((a)->u8[1]) == 0x02) &&                     \
-  (((a)->u16[1]) == 0) &&                       \
-  (((a)->u16[2]) == 0) &&                       \
-  (((a)->u16[3]) == 0) &&                       \
-  (((a)->u16[4]) == 0) &&                       \
-  (((a)->u16[5]) == 1) &&                       \
-  (((a)->u8[12]) == 0xFF))
-
-/**
- * \briefput in b the solicited node address corresponding to address a
- * both a and b are of type uip_ipaddr_t*
- * */
-#define uip_create_solicited_node(a, b)    \
-  (((b)->u8[0]) = 0xFF);                        \
-  (((b)->u8[1]) = 0x02);                        \
-  (((b)->u16[1]) = 0);                          \
-  (((b)->u16[2]) = 0);                          \
-  (((b)->u16[3]) = 0);                          \
-  (((b)->u16[4]) = 0);                          \
-  (((b)->u8[10]) = 0);                          \
-  (((b)->u8[11]) = 0x01);                       \
-  (((b)->u8[12]) = 0xFF);                       \
-  (((b)->u8[13]) = ((a)->u8[13]));              \
-  (((b)->u16[7]) = ((a)->u16[7]))
-
-/**
- * \brief is addr (a) a link local unicast address, see RFC3513
- *  i.e. is (a) on prefix FE80::/10
- *  a is of type uip_ipaddr_t*
- */
-#define uip_is_addr_link_local(a) \
-  ((((a)->u8[0]) == 0xFE) && \
-  (((a)->u8[1]) == 0x80))
-
-/**
- * \brief was addr (a) forged based on the mac address m
- * a type is uip_ipaddr_t
- * m type is uiplladdr_t
- */
-#if UIP_CONF_LL_802154
-#define uip_is_addr_mac_addr_based(a, m) \
-  ((((a)->u8[8])  == (((m)->addr[0]) ^ 0x02)) &&   \
-   (((a)->u8[9])  == (m)->addr[1]) &&            \
-   (((a)->u8[10]) == (m)->addr[2]) &&            \
-   (((a)->u8[11]) == (m)->addr[3]) &&            \
-   (((a)->u8[12]) == (m)->addr[4]) &&            \
-   (((a)->u8[13]) == (m)->addr[5]) &&            \
-   (((a)->u8[14]) == (m)->addr[6]) &&            \
-   (((a)->u8[15]) == (m)->addr[7]))
-#else
-
-#define uip_is_addr_mac_addr_based(a, m) \
-  ((((a)->u8[8])  == (((m)->addr[0]) | 0x02)) &&   \
-   (((a)->u8[9])  == (m)->addr[1]) &&            \
-   (((a)->u8[10]) == (m)->addr[2]) &&            \
-   (((a)->u8[11]) == 0xff) &&            \
-   (((a)->u8[12]) == 0xfe) &&            \
-   (((a)->u8[13]) == (m)->addr[3]) &&            \
-   (((a)->u8[14]) == (m)->addr[4]) &&            \
-   (((a)->u8[15]) == (m)->addr[5]))
-
-#endif /*UIP_CONF_LL_802154*/
-
-/**
- * \brief is address a multicast address, see RFC 3513
- * a is of type uip_ipaddr_t*
- * */
-#define uip_is_addr_mcast(a)                    \
-  (((a)->u8[0]) == 0xFF)
-
-/**
- * \brief is group-id of multicast address a
- * the all nodes group-id
- */
-#define uip_is_mcast_group_id_all_nodes(a) \
-  ((((a)->u16[1])  == 0) &&                 \
-   (((a)->u16[2])  == 0) &&                 \
-   (((a)->u16[3])  == 0) &&                 \
-   (((a)->u16[4])  == 0) &&                 \
-   (((a)->u16[5])  == 0) &&                 \
-   (((a)->u16[6])  == 0) &&                 \
-   (((a)->u8[14])  == 0) &&                 \
-   (((a)->u8[15])  == 1))
-
-/**
- * \brief is group-id of multicast address a
- * the all routers group-id
- */
-#define uip_is_mcast_group_id_all_routers(a) \
-  ((((a)->u16[1])  == 0) &&                 \
-   (((a)->u16[2])  == 0) &&                 \
-   (((a)->u16[3])  == 0) &&                 \
-   (((a)->u16[4])  == 0) &&                 \
-   (((a)->u16[5])  == 0) &&                 \
-   (((a)->u16[6])  == 0) &&                 \
-   (((a)->u8[14])  == 0) &&                 \
-   (((a)->u8[15])  == 2))
-
-
-#endif /*UIP_CONF_IPV6*/
-
-/**
- * Calculate the Internet checksum over a buffer.
- *
- * The Internet checksum is the one's complement of the one's
- * complement sum of all 16-bit words in the buffer.
- *
- * See RFC1071.
- *
- * \param buf A pointer to the buffer over which the checksum is to be
- * computed.
- *
- * \param len The length of the buffer over which the checksum is to
- * be computed.
- *
- * \return The Internet checksum of the buffer.
- */
-u16_t uip_chksum(u16_t *buf, u16_t len);
-
-/**
- * Calculate the IP header checksum of the packet header in uip_buf.
- *
- * The IP header checksum is the Internet checksum of the 20 bytes of
- * the IP header.
- *
- * \return The IP header checksum of the IP header in the uip_buf
- * buffer.
- */
-u16_t uip_ipchksum(void);
-
-/**
- * Calculate the TCP checksum of the packet in uip_buf and uip_appdata.
- *
- * The TCP checksum is the Internet checksum of data contents of the
- * TCP segment, and a pseudo-header as defined in RFC793.
- *
- * \return The TCP checksum of the TCP segment in uip_buf and pointed
- * to by uip_appdata.
- */
-u16_t uip_tcpchksum(void);
-
-/**
- * Calculate the UDP checksum of the packet in uip_buf and uip_appdata.
- *
- * The UDP checksum is the Internet checksum of data contents of the
- * UDP segment, and a pseudo-header as defined in RFC768.
- *
- * \return The UDP checksum of the UDP segment in uip_buf and pointed
- * to by uip_appdata.
- */
-u16_t uip_udpchksum(void);
-
-/**
- * Calculate the ICMP checksum of the packet in uip_buf.
- *
- * \return The ICMP checksum of the ICMP packet in uip_buf
- */
-u16_t uip_icmp6chksum(void);
-
-
-#endif /* __UIP_H__ */
-
-
-/** @} */
-
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip_arp.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip_arp.c
deleted file mode 100644
index fcb783b14..000000000
--- a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip_arp.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,432 +0,0 @@
-/**
- * \addtogroup uip
- * @{
- */
-
-/**
- * \defgroup uiparp uIP Address Resolution Protocol
- * @{
- *
- * The Address Resolution Protocol ARP is used for mapping between IP
- * addresses and link level addresses such as the Ethernet MAC
- * addresses. ARP uses broadcast queries to ask for the link level
- * address of a known IP address and the host which is configured with
- * the IP address for which the query was meant, will respond with its
- * link level address.
- *
- * \note This ARP implementation only supports Ethernet.
- */
-
-/**
- * \file
- * Implementation of the ARP Address Resolution Protocol.
- * \author Adam Dunkels <adam@dunkels.com>
- *
- */
-
-/*
- * Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Adam Dunkels.
- * All rights reserved.
- *
- * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
- * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
- * are met:
- * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
- *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
- * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
- *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
- *    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
- * 3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote
- *    products derived from this software without specific prior
- *    written permission.
- *
- * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS
- * OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
- * WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
- * ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY
- * DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
- * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
- * GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
- * INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
- * WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
- * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
- * SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
- *
- * This file is part of the uIP TCP/IP stack.
- *
- * $Id: uip_arp.c,v 1.5 2008/02/07 01:35:00 adamdunkels Exp $
- *
- */
-
-
-#include "uip_arp.h"
-
-#include <string.h>
-
-struct arp_hdr {
-  struct uip_eth_hdr ethhdr;
-  u16_t hwtype;
-  u16_t protocol;
-  u8_t hwlen;
-  u8_t protolen;
-  u16_t opcode;
-  struct uip_eth_addr shwaddr;
-  uip_ipaddr_t sipaddr;
-  struct uip_eth_addr dhwaddr;
-  uip_ipaddr_t dipaddr;
-};
-
-struct ethip_hdr {
-  struct uip_eth_hdr ethhdr;
-  /* IP header. */
-  u8_t vhl,
-    tos,
-    len[2],
-    ipid[2],
-    ipoffset[2],
-    ttl,
-    proto;
-  u16_t ipchksum;
-  uip_ipaddr_t srcipaddr, destipaddr;
-};
-
-#define ARP_REQUEST 1
-#define ARP_REPLY   2
-
-#define ARP_HWTYPE_ETH 1
-
-struct arp_entry {
-  uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr;
-  struct uip_eth_addr ethaddr;
-  u8_t time;
-};
-
-static const struct uip_eth_addr broadcast_ethaddr =
-  {{0xff,0xff,0xff,0xff,0xff,0xff}};
-static const u16_t broadcast_ipaddr[2] = {0xffff,0xffff};
-
-static struct arp_entry arp_table[UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE];
-static uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr;
-static u8_t i, c;
-
-static u8_t arptime;
-static u8_t tmpage;
-
-#define BUF   ((struct arp_hdr *)&uip_buf[0])
-#define IPBUF ((struct ethip_hdr *)&uip_buf[0])
-
-#define DEBUG 0
-#if DEBUG
-#include <stdio.h>
-#define PRINTF(...) printf(__VA_ARGS__)
-#else
-#define PRINTF(...)
-#endif
-
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/**
- * Initialize the ARP module.
- *
- */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-void
-uip_arp_init(void)
-{
-  for(i = 0; i < UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE; ++i) {
-    memset(&arp_table[i].ipaddr, 0, 4);
-  }
-}
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/**
- * Periodic ARP processing function.
- *
- * This function performs periodic timer processing in the ARP module
- * and should be called at regular intervals. The recommended interval
- * is 10 seconds between the calls.
- *
- */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-void
-uip_arp_timer(void)
-{
-  struct arp_entry *tabptr = NULL;
-
-  ++arptime;
-  for(i = 0; i < UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE; ++i) {
-    tabptr = &arp_table[i];
-    if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&tabptr->ipaddr, &uip_all_zeroes_addr) &&
-       arptime - tabptr->time >= UIP_ARP_MAXAGE) {
-      memset(&tabptr->ipaddr, 0, 4);
-    }
-  }
-
-}
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-static void
-uip_arp_update(uip_ipaddr_t *ipaddr, struct uip_eth_addr *ethaddr)
-{
-  register struct arp_entry *tabptr = NULL;
-  /* Walk through the ARP mapping table and try to find an entry to
-     update. If none is found, the IP -> MAC address mapping is
-     inserted in the ARP table. */
-  for(i = 0; i < UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE; ++i) {
-
-    tabptr = &arp_table[i];
-    /* Only check those entries that are actually in use. */
-    if(!uip_ipaddr_cmp(&tabptr->ipaddr, &uip_all_zeroes_addr)) {
-
-      /* Check if the source IP address of the incoming packet matches
-         the IP address in this ARP table entry. */
-      if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(ipaddr, &tabptr->ipaddr)) {
-
-	/* An old entry found, update this and return. */
-	memcpy(tabptr->ethaddr.addr, ethaddr->addr, 6);
-	tabptr->time = arptime;
-
-	return;
-      }
-    }
-  }
-
-  /* If we get here, no existing ARP table entry was found, so we
-     create one. */
-
-  /* First, we try to find an unused entry in the ARP table. */
-  for(i = 0; i < UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE; ++i) {
-    tabptr = &arp_table[i];
-    if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&tabptr->ipaddr, &uip_all_zeroes_addr)) {
-      break;
-    }
-  }
-
-  /* If no unused entry is found, we try to find the oldest entry and
-     throw it away. */
-  if(i == UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE) {
-    tmpage = 0;
-    c = 0;
-    for(i = 0; i < UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE; ++i) {
-      tabptr = &arp_table[i];
-      if(arptime - tabptr->time > tmpage) {
-	tmpage = arptime - tabptr->time;
-	c = i;
-      }
-    }
-    i = c;
-    tabptr = &arp_table[i];
-  }
-
-  /* Now, i is the ARP table entry which we will fill with the new
-     information. */
-  uip_ipaddr_copy(&tabptr->ipaddr, ipaddr);
-  memcpy(tabptr->ethaddr.addr, ethaddr->addr, 6);
-  tabptr->time = arptime;
-}
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/**
- * ARP processing for incoming IP packets
- *
- * This function should be called by the device driver when an IP
- * packet has been received. The function will check if the address is
- * in the ARP cache, and if so the ARP cache entry will be
- * refreshed. If no ARP cache entry was found, a new one is created.
- *
- * This function expects an IP packet with a prepended Ethernet header
- * in the uip_buf[] buffer, and the length of the packet in the global
- * variable uip_len.
- */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-#if 0
-void
-uip_arp_ipin(void)
-{
-  uip_len -= sizeof(struct uip_eth_hdr);
-
-  /* Only insert/update an entry if the source IP address of the
-     incoming IP packet comes from a host on the local network. */
-  if((IPBUF->srcipaddr[0] & uip_netmask[0]) !=
-     (uip_hostaddr[0] & uip_netmask[0])) {
-    return;
-  }
-  if((IPBUF->srcipaddr[1] & uip_netmask[1]) !=
-     (uip_hostaddr[1] & uip_netmask[1])) {
-    return;
-  }
-  uip_arp_update(IPBUF->srcipaddr, &(IPBUF->ethhdr.src));
-
-  return;
-}
-#endif /* 0 */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/**
- * ARP processing for incoming ARP packets.
- *
- * This function should be called by the device driver when an ARP
- * packet has been received. The function will act differently
- * depending on the ARP packet type: if it is a reply for a request
- * that we previously sent out, the ARP cache will be filled in with
- * the values from the ARP reply. If the incoming ARP packet is an ARP
- * request for our IP address, an ARP reply packet is created and put
- * into the uip_buf[] buffer.
- *
- * When the function returns, the value of the global variable uip_len
- * indicates whether the device driver should send out a packet or
- * not. If uip_len is zero, no packet should be sent. If uip_len is
- * non-zero, it contains the length of the outbound packet that is
- * present in the uip_buf[] buffer.
- *
- * This function expects an ARP packet with a prepended Ethernet
- * header in the uip_buf[] buffer, and the length of the packet in the
- * global variable uip_len.
- */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-void
-uip_arp_arpin(void)
-{
-  if(uip_len < sizeof(struct arp_hdr)) {
-    uip_len = 0;
-    return;
-  }
-  uip_len = 0;
-
-  switch(BUF->opcode) {
-  case HTONS(ARP_REQUEST):
-    /* ARP request. If it asked for our address, we send out a
-       reply. */
-    /*    if(BUF->dipaddr[0] == uip_hostaddr[0] &&
-	  BUF->dipaddr[1] == uip_hostaddr[1]) {*/
-    PRINTF("uip_arp_arpin: request for %d.%d.%d.%d (we are %d.%d.%d.%d)\n",
-	   BUF->dipaddr.u8[0], BUF->dipaddr.u8[1],
-	   BUF->dipaddr.u8[2], BUF->dipaddr.u8[3],
-	   uip_hostaddr.u8[0], uip_hostaddr.u8[1],
-	   uip_hostaddr.u8[2], uip_hostaddr.u8[3]);
-    if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&BUF->dipaddr, &uip_hostaddr)) {
-      /* First, we register the one who made the request in our ARP
-	 table, since it is likely that we will do more communication
-	 with this host in the future. */
-      uip_arp_update(&BUF->sipaddr, &BUF->shwaddr);
-
-      BUF->opcode = HTONS(ARP_REPLY);
-
-      memcpy(BUF->dhwaddr.addr, BUF->shwaddr.addr, 6);
-      memcpy(BUF->shwaddr.addr, uip_ethaddr.addr, 6);
-      memcpy(BUF->ethhdr.src.addr, uip_ethaddr.addr, 6);
-      memcpy(BUF->ethhdr.dest.addr, BUF->dhwaddr.addr, 6);
-
-      uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->dipaddr, &BUF->sipaddr);
-      uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->sipaddr, &uip_hostaddr);
-
-      BUF->ethhdr.type = HTONS(UIP_ETHTYPE_ARP);
-      uip_len = sizeof(struct arp_hdr);
-    }
-    break;
-  case HTONS(ARP_REPLY):
-    /* ARP reply. We insert or update the ARP table if it was meant
-       for us. */
-    if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&BUF->dipaddr, &uip_hostaddr)) {
-      uip_arp_update(&BUF->sipaddr, &BUF->shwaddr);
-    }
-    break;
-  }
-
-  return;
-}
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/**
- * Prepend Ethernet header to an outbound IP packet and see if we need
- * to send out an ARP request.
- *
- * This function should be called before sending out an IP packet. The
- * function checks the destination IP address of the IP packet to see
- * what Ethernet MAC address that should be used as a destination MAC
- * address on the Ethernet.
- *
- * If the destination IP address is in the local network (determined
- * by logical ANDing of netmask and our IP address), the function
- * checks the ARP cache to see if an entry for the destination IP
- * address is found. If so, an Ethernet header is prepended and the
- * function returns. If no ARP cache entry is found for the
- * destination IP address, the packet in the uip_buf[] is replaced by
- * an ARP request packet for the IP address. The IP packet is dropped
- * and it is assumed that they higher level protocols (e.g., TCP)
- * eventually will retransmit the dropped packet.
- *
- * If the destination IP address is not on the local network, the IP
- * address of the default router is used instead.
- *
- * When the function returns, a packet is present in the uip_buf[]
- * buffer, and the length of the packet is in the global variable
- * uip_len.
- */
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-void
-uip_arp_out(void)
-{
-  struct arp_entry *tabptr = NULL;
-
-  /* Find the destination IP address in the ARP table and construct
-     the Ethernet header. If the destination IP address isn't on the
-     local network, we use the default router's IP address instead.
-
-     If not ARP table entry is found, we overwrite the original IP
-     packet with an ARP request for the IP address. */
-
-  /* First check if destination is a local broadcast. */
-  if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&IPBUF->destipaddr, &uip_broadcast_addr)) {
-    memcpy(IPBUF->ethhdr.dest.addr, broadcast_ethaddr.addr, 6);
-  } else {
-    /* Check if the destination address is on the local network. */
-    if(!uip_ipaddr_maskcmp(&IPBUF->destipaddr, &uip_hostaddr, &uip_netmask)) {
-      /* Destination address was not on the local network, so we need to
-	 use the default router's IP address instead of the destination
-	 address when determining the MAC address. */
-      uip_ipaddr_copy(&ipaddr, &uip_draddr);
-    } else {
-      /* Else, we use the destination IP address. */
-      uip_ipaddr_copy(&ipaddr, &IPBUF->destipaddr);
-    }
-
-    for(i = 0; i < UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE; ++i) {
-      tabptr = &arp_table[i];
-      if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&ipaddr, &tabptr->ipaddr)) {
-	break;
-      }
-    }
-
-    if(i == UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE) {
-      /* The destination address was not in our ARP table, so we
-	 overwrite the IP packet with an ARP request. */
-
-      memset(BUF->ethhdr.dest.addr, 0xff, 6);
-      memset(BUF->dhwaddr.addr, 0x00, 6);
-      memcpy(BUF->ethhdr.src.addr, uip_ethaddr.addr, 6);
-      memcpy(BUF->shwaddr.addr, uip_ethaddr.addr, 6);
-
-      uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->dipaddr, &ipaddr);
-      uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->sipaddr, &uip_hostaddr);
-      BUF->opcode = HTONS(ARP_REQUEST); /* ARP request. */
-      BUF->hwtype = HTONS(ARP_HWTYPE_ETH);
-      BUF->protocol = HTONS(UIP_ETHTYPE_IP);
-      BUF->hwlen = 6;
-      BUF->protolen = 4;
-      BUF->ethhdr.type = HTONS(UIP_ETHTYPE_ARP);
-
-      uip_appdata = &uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN];
-
-      uip_len = sizeof(struct arp_hdr);
-      return;
-    }
-
-    /* Build an ethernet header. */
-    memcpy(IPBUF->ethhdr.dest.addr, tabptr->ethaddr.addr, 6);
-  }
-  memcpy(IPBUF->ethhdr.src.addr, uip_ethaddr.addr, 6);
-
-  IPBUF->ethhdr.type = HTONS(UIP_ETHTYPE_IP);
-
-  uip_len += sizeof(struct uip_eth_hdr);
-}
-/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-/** @} */
-/** @} */
-
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip_arp.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip_arp.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 4e78ce7b7..000000000
--- a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip_arp.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,146 +0,0 @@
-/**
- * \addtogroup uip
- * @{
- */
-
-/**
- * \addtogroup uiparp
- * @{
- */
-
-/**
- * \file
- * Macros and definitions for the ARP module.
- * \author Adam Dunkels <adam@dunkels.com>
- */
-
-
-/*
- * Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Adam Dunkels.
- * All rights reserved.
- *
- * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
- * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
- * are met:
- * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
- *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
- * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
- *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
- *    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
- * 3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote
- *    products derived from this software without specific prior
- *    written permission.
- *
- * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS
- * OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
- * WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
- * ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY
- * DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
- * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
- * GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
- * INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
- * WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
- * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
- * SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
- *
- * This file is part of the uIP TCP/IP stack.
- *
- * $Id: uip_arp.h,v 1.2 2006/08/26 23:58:45 oliverschmidt Exp $
- *
- */
-
-#ifndef __UIP_ARP_H__
-#define __UIP_ARP_H__
-
-#include "uip.h"
-
-
-extern struct uip_eth_addr uip_ethaddr;
-
-/**
- * The Ethernet header.
- */
-struct uip_eth_hdr {
-  struct uip_eth_addr dest;
-  struct uip_eth_addr src;
-  u16_t type;
-};
-
-#define UIP_ETHTYPE_ARP  0x0806
-#define UIP_ETHTYPE_IP   0x0800
-#define UIP_ETHTYPE_IPV6 0x86dd
-
-
-/* The uip_arp_init() function must be called before any of the other
-   ARP functions. */
-void uip_arp_init(void);
-
-/* The uip_arp_ipin() function should be called whenever an IP packet
-   arrives from the Ethernet. This function refreshes the ARP table or
-   inserts a new mapping if none exists. The function assumes that an
-   IP packet with an Ethernet header is present in the uip_buf buffer
-   and that the length of the packet is in the uip_len variable. */
-/*void uip_arp_ipin(void);*/
-#define uip_arp_ipin()
-
-/* The uip_arp_arpin() should be called when an ARP packet is received
-   by the Ethernet driver. This function also assumes that the
-   Ethernet frame is present in the uip_buf buffer. When the
-   uip_arp_arpin() function returns, the contents of the uip_buf
-   buffer should be sent out on the Ethernet if the uip_len variable
-   is > 0. */
-void uip_arp_arpin(void);
-
-/* The uip_arp_out() function should be called when an IP packet
-   should be sent out on the Ethernet. This function creates an
-   Ethernet header before the IP header in the uip_buf buffer. The
-   Ethernet header will have the correct Ethernet MAC destination
-   address filled in if an ARP table entry for the destination IP
-   address (or the IP address of the default router) is present. If no
-   such table entry is found, the IP packet is overwritten with an ARP
-   request and we rely on TCP to retransmit the packet that was
-   overwritten. In any case, the uip_len variable holds the length of
-   the Ethernet frame that should be transmitted. */
-void uip_arp_out(void);
-
-/* The uip_arp_timer() function should be called every ten seconds. It
-   is responsible for flushing old entries in the ARP table. */
-void uip_arp_timer(void);
-
-/** @} */
-
-/**
- * \addtogroup uipconffunc
- * @{
- */
-
-
-/**
- * Specifiy the Ethernet MAC address.
- *
- * The ARP code needs to know the MAC address of the Ethernet card in
- * order to be able to respond to ARP queries and to generate working
- * Ethernet headers.
- *
- * \note This macro only specifies the Ethernet MAC address to the ARP
- * code. It cannot be used to change the MAC address of the Ethernet
- * card.
- *
- * \param eaddr A pointer to a struct uip_eth_addr containing the
- * Ethernet MAC address of the Ethernet card.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define uip_setethaddr(eaddr) do {uip_ethaddr.addr[0] = eaddr.addr[0]; \
-                              uip_ethaddr.addr[1] = eaddr.addr[1];\
-                              uip_ethaddr.addr[2] = eaddr.addr[2];\
-                              uip_ethaddr.addr[3] = eaddr.addr[3];\
-                              uip_ethaddr.addr[4] = eaddr.addr[4];\
-                              uip_ethaddr.addr[5] = eaddr.addr[5];} while(0)
-
-/** @} */
-
-
-#endif /* __UIP_ARP_H__ */
-/** @} */
-
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uipopt.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uipopt.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 520c03f25..000000000
--- a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uipopt.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,740 +0,0 @@
-/**
- * \addtogroup uip
- * @{
- */
-
-/**
- * \defgroup uipopt Configuration options for uIP
- * @{
- *
- * uIP is configured using the per-project configuration file
- * "uipopt.h". This file contains all compile-time options for uIP and
- * should be tweaked to match each specific project. The uIP
- * distribution contains a documented example "uipopt.h" that can be
- * copied and modified for each project.
- */
-
-/**
- * \file
- * Configuration options for uIP.
- * \author Adam Dunkels <adam@dunkels.com>
- *
- * This file is used for tweaking various configuration options for
- * uIP. You should make a copy of this file into one of your project's
- * directories instead of editing this example "uipopt.h" file that
- * comes with the uIP distribution.
- */
-
-/*
- * Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Adam Dunkels.
- * All rights reserved.
- *
- * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
- * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
- * are met:
- * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
- *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
- * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
- *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
- *    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
- * 3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote
- *    products derived from this software without specific prior
- *    written permission.
- *
- * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS
- * OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
- * WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
- * ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY
- * DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
- * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
- * GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
- * INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
- * WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
- * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
- * SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
- *
- * This file is part of the uIP TCP/IP stack.
- *
- * $Id: uipopt.h,v 1.11 2009/04/10 00:37:48 adamdunkels Exp $
- *
- */
-
-#ifndef __UIPOPT_H__
-#define __UIPOPT_H__
-
-#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
-
-#ifndef UIP_LITTLE_ENDIAN
-#define UIP_LITTLE_ENDIAN  3412
-#endif /* UIP_LITTLE_ENDIAN */
-#ifndef UIP_BIG_ENDIAN
-#define UIP_BIG_ENDIAN     1234
-#endif /* UIP_BIG_ENDIAN */
-
-/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-/**
- * \defgroup uipoptstaticconf Static configuration options
- * @{
- *
- * These configuration options can be used for setting the IP address
- * settings statically, but only if UIP_FIXEDADDR is set to 1. The
- * configuration options for a specific node includes IP address,
- * netmask and default router as well as the Ethernet address. The
- * netmask, default router and Ethernet address are applicable only
- * if uIP should be run over Ethernet.
- *
- * This options are meaningful only for the IPv4 code.
- *
- * All of these should be changed to suit your project.
- */
-
-/**
- * Determines if uIP should use a fixed IP address or not.
- *
- * If uIP should use a fixed IP address, the settings are set in the
- * uipopt.h file. If not, the macros uip_sethostaddr(),
- * uip_setdraddr() and uip_setnetmask() should be used instead.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define UIP_FIXEDADDR    0
-
-/**
- * Ping IP address assignment.
- *
- * uIP uses a "ping" packets for setting its own IP address if this
- * option is set. If so, uIP will start with an empty IP address and
- * the destination IP address of the first incoming "ping" (ICMP echo)
- * packet will be used for setting the hosts IP address.
- *
- * \note This works only if UIP_FIXEDADDR is 0.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#ifdef UIP_CONF_PINGADDRCONF
-#define UIP_PINGADDRCONF UIP_CONF_PINGADDRCONF
-#else /* UIP_CONF_PINGADDRCONF */
-#define UIP_PINGADDRCONF 0
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_PINGADDRCONF */
-
-
-/**
- * Specifies if the uIP ARP module should be compiled with a fixed
- * Ethernet MAC address or not.
- *
- * If this configuration option is 0, the macro uip_setethaddr() can
- * be used to specify the Ethernet address at run-time.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#define UIP_FIXEDETHADDR 0
-
-/** @} */
-/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/**
- * \defgroup uipoptip IP configuration options
- * @{
- *
- */
-/**
- * The IP TTL (time to live) of IP packets sent by uIP.
- *
- * This should normally not be changed.
- */
-#define UIP_TTL         64
-
-/**
- * The maximum time an IP fragment should wait in the reassembly
- * buffer before it is dropped.
- *
- */
-#define UIP_REASS_MAXAGE 60 /*60s*/
-
-/**
- * Turn on support for IP packet reassembly.
- *
- * uIP supports reassembly of fragmented IP packets. This features
- * requires an additional amount of RAM to hold the reassembly buffer
- * and the reassembly code size is approximately 700 bytes.  The
- * reassembly buffer is of the same size as the uip_buf buffer
- * (configured by UIP_BUFSIZE).
- *
- * \note IP packet reassembly is not heavily tested.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#ifdef UIP_CONF_REASSEMBLY
-#define UIP_REASSEMBLY UIP_CONF_REASSEMBLY
-#else /* UIP_CONF_REASSEMBLY */
-#define UIP_REASSEMBLY 0
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_REASSEMBLY */
-/** @} */
-
-/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/**
- * \defgroup uipoptipv6 IPv6 configuration options
- * @{
- *
- */
-
-/** The maximum transmission unit at the IP Layer*/
-#define UIP_LINK_MTU 1280
-
-#ifndef UIP_CONF_IPV6
-/** Do we use IPv6 or not (default: no) */
-#define UIP_CONF_IPV6                 0
-#endif
-
-#ifndef UIP_CONF_IPV6_QUEUE_PKT
-/** Do we do per %neighbor queuing during address resolution (default: no) */
-#define UIP_CONF_IPV6_QUEUE_PKT       0
-#endif
-
-#ifndef UIP_CONF_IPV6_CHECKS
-/** Do we do IPv6 consistency checks (highly recommended, default: yes) */
-#define UIP_CONF_IPV6_CHECKS          1
-#endif
-
-#ifndef UIP_CONF_IPV6_REASSEMBLY
-/** Do we do IPv6 fragmentation (default: no) */
-#define UIP_CONF_IPV6_REASSEMBLY      0
-#endif
-
-#ifndef UIP_CONF_NETIF_MAX_ADDRESSES
-/** Default number of IPv6 addresses associated to the node's interface */
-#define UIP_CONF_NETIF_MAX_ADDRESSES  3
-#endif
-
-#ifndef UIP_CONF_ND6_MAX_PREFIXES
-/** Default number of IPv6 prefixes associated to the node's interface */
-#define UIP_CONF_ND6_MAX_PREFIXES     3
-#endif
-
-#ifndef UIP_CONF_ND6_MAX_NEIGHBORS
-/** Default number of neighbors that can be stored in the %neighbor cache */
-#define UIP_CONF_ND6_MAX_NEIGHBORS    4
-#endif
-
-#ifndef UIP_CONF_ND6_MAX_DEFROUTERS
-/** Minimum number of default routers */
-#define UIP_CONF_ND6_MAX_DEFROUTERS   2
-#endif
-/** @} */
-
-/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/**
- * \defgroup uipoptudp UDP configuration options
- * @{
- *
- * \note The UDP support in uIP is still not entirely complete; there
- * is no support for sending or receiving broadcast or multicast
- * packets, but it works well enough to support a number of vital
- * applications such as DNS queries, though
- */
-
-/**
- * Toggles whether UDP support should be compiled in or not.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#ifdef UIP_CONF_UDP
-#define UIP_UDP UIP_CONF_UDP
-#else /* UIP_CONF_UDP */
-#define UIP_UDP           1
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_UDP */
-
-/**
- * Toggles if UDP checksums should be used or not.
- *
- * \note Support for UDP checksums is currently not included in uIP,
- * so this option has no function.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#ifdef UIP_CONF_UDP_CHECKSUMS
-#define UIP_UDP_CHECKSUMS UIP_CONF_UDP_CHECKSUMS
-#else
-#define UIP_UDP_CHECKSUMS 0
-#endif
-
-/**
- * The maximum amount of concurrent UDP connections.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#ifdef UIP_CONF_UDP_CONNS
-#define UIP_UDP_CONNS UIP_CONF_UDP_CONNS
-#else /* UIP_CONF_UDP_CONNS */
-#define UIP_UDP_CONNS    10
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_UDP_CONNS */
-
-/**
- * The name of the function that should be called when UDP datagrams arrive.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-
-
-/** @} */
-/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/**
- * \defgroup uipopttcp TCP configuration options
- * @{
- */
-
-/**
- * Toggles whether TCP support should be compiled in or not.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#ifdef UIP_CONF_TCP
-#define UIP_TCP UIP_CONF_TCP
-#else /* UIP_CONF_TCP */
-#define UIP_TCP           1
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_TCP */
-
-/**
- * Determines if support for opening connections from uIP should be
- * compiled in.
- *
- * If the applications that are running on top of uIP for this project
- * do not need to open outgoing TCP connections, this configuration
- * option can be turned off to reduce the code size of uIP.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#ifndef UIP_CONF_ACTIVE_OPEN
-#define UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN 1
-#else /* UIP_CONF_ACTIVE_OPEN */
-#define UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN UIP_CONF_ACTIVE_OPEN
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_ACTIVE_OPEN */
-
-/**
- * The maximum number of simultaneously open TCP connections.
- *
- * Since the TCP connections are statically allocated, turning this
- * configuration knob down results in less RAM used. Each TCP
- * connection requires approximately 30 bytes of memory.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#ifndef UIP_CONF_MAX_CONNECTIONS
-#define UIP_CONNS       10
-#else /* UIP_CONF_MAX_CONNECTIONS */
-#define UIP_CONNS UIP_CONF_MAX_CONNECTIONS
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_MAX_CONNECTIONS */
-
-
-/**
- * The maximum number of simultaneously listening TCP ports.
- *
- * Each listening TCP port requires 2 bytes of memory.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#ifndef UIP_CONF_MAX_LISTENPORTS
-#define UIP_LISTENPORTS 20
-#else /* UIP_CONF_MAX_LISTENPORTS */
-#define UIP_LISTENPORTS UIP_CONF_MAX_LISTENPORTS
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_MAX_LISTENPORTS */
-
-/**
- * Determines if support for TCP urgent data notification should be
- * compiled in.
- *
- * Urgent data (out-of-band data) is a rarely used TCP feature that
- * very seldom would be required.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#if !defined(UIP_URGDATA)
-#define UIP_URGDATA      0
-#endif
-
-/**
- * The initial retransmission timeout counted in timer pulses.
- *
- * This should not be changed.
- */
-#if !defined(UIP_RTO)
-#define UIP_RTO         3
-#endif
-
-/**
- * The maximum number of times a segment should be retransmitted
- * before the connection should be aborted.
- *
- * This should not be changed.
- */
-#if !defined(UIP_MAXRTX)
-#define UIP_MAXRTX      8
-#endif
-
-/**
- * The maximum number of times a SYN segment should be retransmitted
- * before a connection request should be deemed to have been
- * unsuccessful.
- *
- * This should not need to be changed.
- */
-#if !defined(UIP_MAXSYNRTX)
-#define UIP_MAXSYNRTX      5
-#endif
-
-/**
- * The TCP maximum segment size.
- *
- * This is should not be to set to more than
- * UIP_BUFSIZE - UIP_LLH_LEN - UIP_TCPIP_HLEN.
- */
-#ifdef UIP_CONF_TCP_MSS
-#define UIP_TCP_MSS UIP_CONF_TCP_MSS
-#else
-#define UIP_TCP_MSS     (UIP_BUFSIZE - UIP_LLH_LEN - UIP_TCPIP_HLEN)
-#endif
-
-/**
- * The size of the advertised receiver's window.
- *
- * Should be set low (i.e., to the size of the uip_buf buffer) if the
- * application is slow to process incoming data, or high (32768 bytes)
- * if the application processes data quickly.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#ifndef UIP_CONF_RECEIVE_WINDOW
-#define UIP_RECEIVE_WINDOW UIP_TCP_MSS
-#else
-#define UIP_RECEIVE_WINDOW UIP_CONF_RECEIVE_WINDOW
-#endif
-
-/**
- * How long a connection should stay in the TIME_WAIT state.
- *
- * This configuration option has no real implication, and it should be
- * left untouched.
- */
-#define UIP_TIME_WAIT_TIMEOUT 120
-
-
-/** @} */
-/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/**
- * \defgroup uipoptarp ARP configuration options
- * @{
- */
-
-/**
- * The size of the ARP table.
- *
- * This option should be set to a larger value if this uIP node will
- * have many connections from the local network.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#ifdef UIP_CONF_ARPTAB_SIZE
-#define UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE UIP_CONF_ARPTAB_SIZE
-#else
-#define UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE 8
-#endif
-
-/**
- * The maximum age of ARP table entries measured in 10ths of seconds.
- *
- * An UIP_ARP_MAXAGE of 120 corresponds to 20 minutes (BSD
- * default).
- */
-#define UIP_ARP_MAXAGE 120
-
-
-/** @} */
-
-/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-/**
- * \defgroup uipoptmac layer 2 options (for ipv6)
- * @{
- */
-
-#define UIP_DEFAULT_PREFIX_LEN 64
-
-/** @} */
-
-/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-/**
- * \defgroup uipoptsics 6lowpan options (for ipv6)
- * @{
- */
-/**
- * Timeout for packet reassembly at the 6lowpan layer
- * (should be < 60s)
- */
-#ifdef SICSLOWPAN_CONF_MAXAGE
-#define SICSLOWPAN_REASS_MAXAGE SICSLOWPAN_CONF_MAXAGE
-#else
-#define SICSLOWPAN_REASS_MAXAGE 20
-#endif
-
-/**
- * Do we compress the IP header or not (default: no)
- */
-#ifndef SICSLOWPAN_CONF_COMPRESSION
-#define SICSLOWPAN_CONF_COMPRESSION 0
-#endif
-
-/**
- * If we use IPHC compression, how many address contexts do we support
- */
-#ifndef SICSLOWPAN_CONF_MAX_ADDR_CONTEXTS
-#define SICSLOWPAN_CONF_MAX_ADDR_CONTEXTS 1
-#endif
-
-/**
- * Do we support 6lowpan fragmentation
- */
-#ifndef SICSLOWPAN_CONF_FRAG
-#define SICSLOWPAN_CONF_FRAG  0
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
-
-/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-/**
- * \defgroup uipoptgeneral General configuration options
- * @{
- */
-
-/**
- * The size of the uIP packet buffer.
- *
- * The uIP packet buffer should not be smaller than 60 bytes, and does
- * not need to be larger than 1514 bytes. Lower size results in lower
- * TCP throughput, larger size results in higher TCP throughput.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#ifndef UIP_CONF_BUFFER_SIZE
-#define UIP_BUFSIZE UIP_LINK_MTU + UIP_LLH_LEN
-#else /* UIP_CONF_BUFFER_SIZE */
-#define UIP_BUFSIZE UIP_CONF_BUFFER_SIZE
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_BUFFER_SIZE */
-
-
-/**
- * Determines if statistics support should be compiled in.
- *
- * The statistics is useful for debugging and to show the user.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#ifndef UIP_CONF_STATISTICS
-#define UIP_STATISTICS  0
-#else /* UIP_CONF_STATISTICS */
-#define UIP_STATISTICS UIP_CONF_STATISTICS
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_STATISTICS */
-
-/**
- * Determines if logging of certain events should be compiled in.
- *
- * This is useful mostly for debugging. The function uip_log()
- * must be implemented to suit the architecture of the project, if
- * logging is turned on.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#ifndef UIP_CONF_LOGGING
-#define UIP_LOGGING     0
-#else /* UIP_CONF_LOGGING */
-#define UIP_LOGGING     UIP_CONF_LOGGING
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_LOGGING */
-
-/**
- * Broadcast support.
- *
- * This flag configures IP broadcast support. This is useful only
- * together with UDP.
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- *
- */
-#ifndef UIP_CONF_BROADCAST
-#define UIP_BROADCAST 0
-#else /* UIP_CONF_BROADCAST */
-#define UIP_BROADCAST UIP_CONF_BROADCAST
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_BROADCAST */
-
-/**
- * Print out a uIP log message.
- *
- * This function must be implemented by the module that uses uIP, and
- * is called by uIP whenever a log message is generated.
- */
-void uip_log(char *msg);
-
-/**
- * The link level header length.
- *
- * This is the offset into the uip_buf where the IP header can be
- * found. For Ethernet, this should be set to 14. For SLIP, this
- * should be set to 0.
- *
- * \note we probably won't use this constant for other link layers than
- * ethernet as they have variable header length (this is due to variable
- * number and type of address fields and to optional security features)
- * E.g.: 802.15.4 -> 2 + (1/2*4/8) + 0/5/6/10/14
- *       802.11 -> 4 + (6*3/4) + 2
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#ifdef UIP_CONF_LLH_LEN
-#define UIP_LLH_LEN UIP_CONF_LLH_LEN
-#else /* UIP_LLH_LEN */
-#define UIP_LLH_LEN     14
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_LLH_LEN */
-
-/** @} */
-/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-/**
- * \defgroup uipoptcpu CPU architecture configuration
- * @{
- *
- * The CPU architecture configuration is where the endianess of the
- * CPU on which uIP is to be run is specified. Most CPUs today are
- * little endian, and the most notable exception are the Motorolas
- * which are big endian. The BYTE_ORDER macro should be changed to
- * reflect the CPU architecture on which uIP is to be run.
- */
-
-/**
- * The byte order of the CPU architecture on which uIP is to be run.
- *
- * This option can be either UIP_BIG_ENDIAN (Motorola byte order) or
- * UIP_LITTLE_ENDIAN (Intel byte order).
- *
- * \hideinitializer
- */
-#ifdef UIP_CONF_BYTE_ORDER
-#define UIP_BYTE_ORDER     UIP_CONF_BYTE_ORDER
-#else /* UIP_CONF_BYTE_ORDER */
-#define UIP_BYTE_ORDER     UIP_LITTLE_ENDIAN
-#endif /* UIP_CONF_BYTE_ORDER */
-
-/** @} */
-/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-#include <ff.h>
-#include <stdbool.h>
-#include <stdint.h>
-
-#include "timer.h"
-
-typedef uint8_t u8_t;
-typedef uint16_t u16_t;
-typedef uint32_t u32_t;
-typedef uint32_t uip_stats_t;
-
-/**
- * \defgroup uipoptapp Application specific configurations
- * @{
- *
- * An uIP application is implemented using a single application
- * function that is called by uIP whenever a TCP/IP event occurs. The
- * name of this function must be registered with uIP at compile time
- * using the UIP_APPCALL definition.
- *
- * uIP applications can store the application state within the
- * uip_conn structure by specifying the type of the application
- * structure by typedef:ing the type uip_tcp_appstate_t and uip_udp_appstate_t.
- *
- * The file containing the definitions must be included in the
- * uipopt.h file.
- *
- * The following example illustrates how this can look.
- \code
-
- void httpd_appcall(void);
- #define UIP_APPCALL     httpd_appcall
-
- struct httpd_state {
- u8_t state;
- u16_t count;
- char *dataptr;
- char *script;
- };
- typedef struct httpd_state uip_tcp_appstate_t
- \endcode
-*/
-#define UIP_UDP_APPCALL uIPManagement_UDPCallback
-void UIP_UDP_APPCALL(void);
-
-/**
- * \var #define UIP_APPCALL
- *
- * The name of the application function that uIP should call in
- * response to TCP/IP events.
- *
- */
-#define UIP_APPCALL     uIPManagement_TCPCallback
-void UIP_APPCALL(void);
-
-/**
- * \var typedef uip_tcp_appstate_t
- *
- * The type of the application state that is to be stored in the
- * uip_conn structure. This usually is typedef:ed to a struct holding
- * application state information.
- */
-typedef union
-{
-	struct
-	{
-		uint8_t  CurrentState;
-		uint8_t  NextState;
-
-		char     FileName[MAX_URI_LENGTH];
-		FIL      FileHandle;
-		bool     FileOpen;
-		uint32_t ACKedFilePos;
-		uint16_t SentChunkSize;
-	} HTTPServer;
-
-	struct
-	{
-		uint8_t  CurrentState;
-		uint8_t  NextState;
-
-		uint8_t  IssuedCommand;
-	} TELNETServer;
-} uip_tcp_appstate_t;
-
-/**
- * \var typedef uip_udp_appstate_t
- *
- * The type of the application state that is to be stored in the
- * uip_conn structure. This usually is typedef:ed to a struct holding
- * application state information.
- */
-typedef union
-{
-	struct
-	{
-		uint8_t      CurrentState;
-		struct timer Timeout;
-
-		struct
-		{
-			uint8_t AllocatedIP[4];
-			uint8_t Netmask[4];
-			uint8_t GatewayIP[4];
-			uint8_t ServerIP[4];
-		} DHCPOffer_Data;
-	} DHCPClient;
-} uip_udp_appstate_t;
-/** @} */
-
-#endif /* __UIPOPT_H__ */
-/** @} */
-/** @} */
-
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/USBDeviceMode.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/USBDeviceMode.c
deleted file mode 100644
index c883f1441..000000000
--- a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/USBDeviceMode.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,162 +0,0 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
-
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-           www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Device Mode management functions and variables. This file contains the LUFA code required to
- *  manage the USB Mass Storage device mode.
- */
-
-#include "USBDeviceMode.h"
-
-/** Message buffer for RNDIS messages processed by the RNDIS device class driver. */
-static uint8_t RNDIS_Message_Buffer[192];
-
-/** LUFA RNDIS Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
- *  passed to all RNDIS Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
- *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
- */
-USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Device =
-	{
-		.Config =
-			{
-				.ControlInterfaceNumber         = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
-				.DataINEndpoint                 =
-					{
-						.Address                = CDC_TX_EPADDR,
-						.Size                   = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-						.Banks                  = 1,
-					},
-				.DataOUTEndpoint                =
-					{
-						.Address                = CDC_RX_EPADDR,
-						.Size                   = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
-						.Banks                  = 1,
-					},
-				.NotificationEndpoint           =
-					{
-						.Address                = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR,
-						.Size                   = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
-						.Banks                  = 1,
-					},
-				.AdapterVendorDescription       = "LUFA RNDIS Adapter",
-				.AdapterMACAddress              = {{0x02, 0x00, 0x02, 0x00, 0x02, 0x00}},
-				.MessageBuffer                  = RNDIS_Message_Buffer,
-				.MessageBufferLength            = sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Buffer),
-			},
-	};
-
-/** LUFA Mass Storage Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
- *  passed to all Mass Storage Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
- *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
- */
-USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t Disk_MS_Interface =
-	{
-		.Config =
-			{
-				.InterfaceNumber                = INTERFACE_ID_MassStorage,
-				.DataINEndpoint                 =
-					{
-						.Address                = MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPADDR,
-						.Size                   = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
-						.Banks                  = 1,
-					},
-				.DataOUTEndpoint                =
-					{
-						.Address                = MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPADDR,
-						.Size                   = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
-						.Banks                  = 1,
-					},
-				.TotalLUNs                 = 1,
-			},
-	};
-
-
-/** USB device mode management task. This function manages the Mass Storage Device class driver when the device is
- *  initialized in USB device mode.
- */
-void USBDeviceMode_USBTask(void)
-{
-	if (USB_CurrentMode != USB_MODE_Device)
-	  return;
-
-	uIPManagement_ManageNetwork();
-
-	RNDIS_Device_USBTask(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Device);
-	MS_Device_USBTask(&Disk_MS_Interface);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-
-	uIPManagement_Init();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
-{
-	bool ConfigSuccess = true;
-
-	ConfigSuccess &= RNDIS_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Device);
-	ConfigSuccess &= MS_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Disk_MS_Interface);
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request reception event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
-{
-	RNDIS_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Device);
-	MS_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Disk_MS_Interface);
-}
-
-/** Mass Storage class driver callback function the reception of SCSI commands from the host, which must be processed.
- *
- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface configuration structure being referenced
- */
-bool CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
-{
-	bool CommandSuccess;
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
-	CommandSuccess = SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(MSInterfaceInfo);
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-
-	return CommandSuccess;
-}
-
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/USBDeviceMode.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/USBDeviceMode.h
deleted file mode 100644
index f71490333..000000000
--- a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/USBDeviceMode.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,62 +0,0 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
-
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-           www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for USBDeviceMode.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _USBDEVICEMODE_H_
-#define _USBDEVICEMODE_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-
-		#include "Webserver.h"
-		#include "Descriptors.h"
-		#include "Lib/uIPManagement.h"
-		#include "Lib/SCSI.h"
-		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
-
-	/* External Variables: */
-		extern USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Device;
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void USBDeviceMode_USBTask(void);
-
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
-
-		bool CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
-
-#endif
-
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/USBHostMode.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/USBHostMode.c
deleted file mode 100644
index 04190bfe2..000000000
--- a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/USBHostMode.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,172 +0,0 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
-
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-           www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  USB Host Mode management functions and variables. This file contains the LUFA code required to
- *  manage the USB RNDIS host mode.
- */
-
-#include "USBHostMode.h"
-
-/** LUFA RNDIS Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
- *  passed to all RNDIS Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
- *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
- */
-USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Host =
-	{
-		.Config =
-			{
-				.DataINPipe             =
-					{
-						.Address        = (PIPE_DIR_IN  | 1),
-						.Banks          = 1,
-					},
-				.DataOUTPipe            =
-					{
-						.Address        = (PIPE_DIR_OUT | 2),
-						.Banks          = 1,
-					},
-				.NotificationPipe       =
-					{
-						.Address        = (PIPE_DIR_IN  | 3),
-						.Banks          = 1,
-					},
-				.HostMaxPacketSize      = UIP_CONF_BUFFER_SIZE,
-			},
-	};
-
-
-/** USB host mode management task. This function manages the RNDIS Host class driver and uIP stack when the device is
- *  initialized in USB host mode.
- */
-void USBHostMode_USBTask(void)
-{
-	if (USB_CurrentMode != USB_MODE_Host)
-	  return;
-
-	uIPManagement_ManageNetwork();
-
-	RNDIS_Host_USBTask(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Host);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
- *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
- *  stops the library USB task management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
- *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-
-	uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
-	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
-
-	if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData,
-	                                       sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful)
-	{
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-		return;
-	}
-
-	if (RNDIS_Host_ConfigurePipes(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Host,
-	                              ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != RNDIS_ENUMERROR_NoError)
-	{
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-		return;
-	}
-
-	if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-	{
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-		return;
-	}
-
-	if (RNDIS_Host_InitializeDevice(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Host) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-	{
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
-		return;
-	}
-
-	uint32_t PacketFilter = (REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_DIRECTED | REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_BROADCAST);
-	if (RNDIS_Host_SetRNDISProperty(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Host, OID_GEN_CURRENT_PACKET_FILTER,
-	                                &PacketFilter, sizeof(PacketFilter)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-	{
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
-		return;
-	}
-
-	if (RNDIS_Host_QueryRNDISProperty(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Host, OID_802_3_CURRENT_ADDRESS,
-	                                  &MACAddress, sizeof(MACAddress)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
-	{
-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
-		return;
-	}
-
-	/* Initialize uIP stack */
-	uIPManagement_Init();
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
-{
-	USB_Disable();
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-	for(;;);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
- *  enumerating an attached USB device.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
-{
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-}
-
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/USBHostMode.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/USBHostMode.h
deleted file mode 100644
index b2c8d66ec..000000000
--- a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/USBHostMode.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,60 +0,0 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
-
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-           www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for USBHostMode.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _USBHOSTMODE_H_
-#define _USBHOSTMODE_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-
-		#include "Webserver.h"
-		#include "Lib/uIPManagement.h"
-		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
-
-	/* External Variables: */
-		extern USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Host;
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void USBHostMode_USBTask(void);
-
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
-		                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
-		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
-
-#endif
-
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Webserver.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Webserver.c
deleted file mode 100644
index bd8fa24ce..000000000
--- a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Webserver.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,77 +0,0 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
-
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-           www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Main source file for the Webserver project. This file contains the main tasks of
- *  the project and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
-
-#include "Webserver.h"
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
- *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
-	SetupHardware();
-
-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-	GlobalInterruptEnable();
-
-	for (;;)
-	{
-		if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_Host)
-		  USBHostMode_USBTask();
-		else
-		  USBDeviceMode_USBTask();
-
-		USB_USBTask();
-	}
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
-#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
-	wdt_disable();
-
-	/* Disable clock division */
-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-#endif
-
-	/* Hardware Initialization */
-	Dataflash_Init();
-	LEDs_Init();
-	USB_Init(USB_MODE_UID);
-}
-
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Webserver.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Webserver.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 0438fe0b9..000000000
--- a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Webserver.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,76 +0,0 @@
-/*
-             LUFA Library
-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
-
-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-           www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
-  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
-  software without specific, written prior permission.
-
-  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
-  this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- *  Header file for Webserver.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _WEBSERVER_H_
-#define _WEBSERVER_H_
-
-	/* Includes: */
-		#include <avr/io.h>
-		#include <avr/wdt.h>
-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-		#include <avr/power.h>
-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
-
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SPI.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
-
-		#include "USBDeviceMode.h"
-		#include "USBHostMode.h"
-		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
-
-	/* Macros: */
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY          LEDS_LED1
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING      (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY             LEDS_LED2
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR            (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-
-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
-		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY             (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)
-
-	/* Function Prototypes: */
-		void SetupHardware(void);
-
-#endif
-
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Webserver.txt b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Webserver.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 10aa71652..000000000
--- a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Webserver.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,126 +0,0 @@
-/** \file
- *
- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
-
-/** \mainpage uIP Powered Webserver Project
- *
- *  \section Sec_Compat Project Compatibility:
- *
- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project.
- *
- *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
- *
- *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
- *
- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this project.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- *    <td>Dual Mode Host/Device</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC) \n
- *        Mass Storage Device</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- *    <td>Remote NDIS (Microsoft Proprietary CDC Class Networking Standard) \n
- *        Bulk-Only Transport</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- *    <td>Microsoft RNDIS Specification \n
- *        USBIF Mass Storage Standard \n
- *        USB Bulk-Only Transport Standard \n
- *        SCSI Primary Commands Specification \n
- *        SCSI Block Commands Specification</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
- *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- *
- *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
- *
- *  Simple HTTP webserver project. This project combines the LUFA library with the uIP TCP/IP full network stack and FatFS
- *  library to create a RNDIS host capable of serving out HTTP web pages to multiple hosts simultaneously. This project
- *  demonstrates how the libraries can be combined into a robust network enabled application, with the addition of a RNDIS
- *  network device.
- *
- *  To use this project, plug the USB AVR into a computer, so that it enumerates as a standard Mass Storage and RNDIS composite
- *  device. Load HTML files onto the disk, so that they can be served out to clients -- the default file to serve should be called
- *  <i>index.htm</i>. Filenames must be in 8.3 format for them to be retrieved correctly by the webserver, and the total
- *  requested file path must be equal to or less than the maximum URI length (\see \ref Sec_Options). Supply the included INF
- *  file when requested on Windows machines to enable the RNDIS interface, and allow the files to be viewed on a standard web-browser
- *  using the IP address 10.0.0.2.
- *
- *  When attached to a RNDIS class device, such as a USB (desktop) modem, the system will enumerate the device, set the
- *  appropriate parameters needed for connectivity and begin listening for new HTTP connections on port 80 and TELNET
- *  connections on port 23. The device IP, netmask and default gateway IP must be set to values appropriate for the RNDIS
- *  device being used for this project to work if the DHCP client is disabled (see \ref Sec_Options) - otherwise, the device
- *  will query the network's DHCP server for these parameters automatically.
- *
- *  When properly configured, the webserver can be accessed from any HTTP web browser by typing in the device's statically or
- *  dynamically allocated IP address. The TELNET client can be accessed via any network socket app by connecting to the device
- *  on port 23 on the device's statically or dynamically allocated IP address.
- *
- *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
- *
- *  The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- *  <table>
- *   <tr>
- *    <th><b>Define Name:</b></th>
- *    <th><b>Location:</b></th>
- *    <th><b>Description:</b></th>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>ENABLE_TELNET_SERVER</td>
- *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
- *    <td>When defined, this enables the TELNET server in addition to the HTTP webserver, which listens for incoming connections
- *        and processes user commands.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT</td>
- *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
- *    <td>When defined, this enables the DHCP client for dynamic IP allocation of the network settings from a DHCP server.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>ENABLE_DHCP_SERVER</td>
- *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
- *    <td>When defined, this enables the DHCP server for dynamic IP allocation of the network settings to a DHCP client.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>DEVICE_IP_ADDRESS</td>
- *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
- *    <td>IP address that the webserver should use when connected to a RNDIS device (when ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT is not defined).</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>DEVICE_NETMASK</td>
- *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
- *    <td>Netmask that the webserver should use when connected to a RNDIS device (when ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT is not defined).</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>DEVICE_GATEWAY</td>
- *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
- *    <td>Default routing gateway that the webserver should use when connected to a RNDIS device (when ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT
- *        is not defined).</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>MAX_URI_LENGTH</td>
- *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
- *    <td>Maximum length of a URI for the Webserver. This is the maximum file path, including subdirectories and separators.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *   <tr>
- *    <td>SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS</td>
- *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
- *    <td>MAC address of the server used when sending Ethernet packets onto the bus.</td>
- *   </tr>
- *  </table>
- */
-
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/asf.xml b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/asf.xml
deleted file mode 100644
index ca1733e85..000000000
--- a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/asf.xml
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,96 +0,0 @@
-<asf xmlversion="1.0">
-	<project caption="RNDIS Webserver" id="lufa.projects.webserver.avr8">
-		<require idref="lufa.projects.webserver"/>
-		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
-		<generator value="as5_8"/>
-
-		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>
-		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="usbkey"/>
-
-		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="8000000UL"/>
-		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="8000000UL"/>
-	</project>
-
-	<module type="application" id="lufa.projects.webserver" caption="RNDIS Webserver">
-		<info type="description" value="summary">
-		RNDIS Webserver project, using the open source uIP network stack.
-		</info>
-
- 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>
-
-		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">
-			<keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>
-			<keyword value="USB Dual Role"/>
-			<keyword value="RNDIS Class"/>
-			<keyword value="Mass Storage Class"/>
-		</info>
-
-		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
-		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
-		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
-
-		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>
-		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="Webserver.txt"/>
-		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="LUFA Webserver RNDIS.inf"/>
-
-		<build type="c-source" value="Webserver.c"/>
-		<build type="c-source" value="USBDeviceMode.c"/>
-		<build type="c-source" value="USBHostMode.c"/>
-		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>
-		<build type="header-file" value="Webserver.h"/>
-		<build type="header-file" value="USBDeviceMode.h"/>
-		<build type="header-file" value="USBHostMode.h"/>
-		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>
-
-		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/DataflashManager.c"/>
-		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/DataflashManager.h"/>
-		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/DHCPClientApp.c"/>
-		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/DHCPClientApp.h"/>
-		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/DHCPCommon.c"/>
-		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/DHCPCommon.h"/>
-		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/DHCPServerApp.c"/>
-		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/DHCPServerApp.h"/>
-		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/HTTPServerApp.c"/>
-		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/HTTPServerApp.h"/>
-		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/SCSI.c"/>
-		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/SCSI.h"/>
-		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/TELNETServerApp.c"/>
-		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/TELNETServerApp.h"/>
-		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/uIPManagement.c"/>
-		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/uIPManagement.h"/>
-
-		<build type="include-path" value="Lib/FATFs/"/>
-		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/FATFs/ff.c"/>
-		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/FATFs/ff.h"/>
-		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/FATFs/diskio.c"/>
-		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/FATFs/diskio.h"/>
-		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/FATFs/ffconf.h"/>
-		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/FATFs/integer.h"/>
-
-		<build type="include-path" value="Lib/uip/"/>
-		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/uip/clock.c"/>
-		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/uip/clock.h"/>
-		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/uip/timer.c"/>
-		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/uip/timer.h"/>
-		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/uip/uip.c"/>
-		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/uip/uip.h"/>
-		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/uip/uip_arp.c"/>
-		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/uip/uip_arp.h"/>
-		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/uip/uip-split.c"/>
-		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/uip/uip-split.h"/>
-		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/uip/uipopt.h"/>
-
-		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>
-		<build type="module-config" subtype="required-header-file" value="AppConfig.h"/>
-		<build type="header-file" value="Config/AppConfig.h"/>
-		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>
-
-		<require idref="lufa.common"/>
-		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>
-		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>
-		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>
-		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>
-		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.dataflash"/>
-		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.spi"/>
-	</module>
-</asf>
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/doxyfile b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/doxyfile
deleted file mode 100644
index 0f01c93b3..000000000
--- a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/doxyfile
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,2396 +0,0 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.8.9
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
-#
-# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
-# front of the TAG it is preceding.
-#
-# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
-# The format is:
-# TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists, items can also be appended using:
-# TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
-# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
-# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
-# for the list of possible encodings.
-# The default value is: UTF-8.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
-# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
-# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
-# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
-# The default value is: My Project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - uIP Powered Webserver Project"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
-# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
-# control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         =
-
-# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
-# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
-# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
-
-PROJECT_BRIEF          =
-
-# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify a logo or an icon that is included
-# in the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55
-# pixels and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy
-# the logo to the output directory.
-
-PROJECT_LOGO           =
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
-# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
-# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
-# left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
-# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
-# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
-# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
-# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
-# performance problems for the file system.
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
-# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
-# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
-# U+3044.
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
-# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
-# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
-# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
-# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
-# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
-# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
-# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
-# The default value is: English.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES, doxygen will include brief member
-# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
-# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
-# The default value is: YES.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES, doxygen will prepend the brief
-# description of a member or function before the detailed description
-#
-# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-# The default value is: YES.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
-# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
-# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
-# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
-# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
-# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
-# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
-# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
-                         "The $name widget" \
-                         "The $name file" \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will prepend the full path
-# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
-# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
-# The default value is: YES.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
-# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
-# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
-# strip.
-#
-# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
-# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
-# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
-# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
-# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
-# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
-# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
-# using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
-# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
-# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
-# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
-# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
-# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
-# description.)
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
-# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
-# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
-# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
-# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
-# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
-# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
-# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
-#
-# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
-# not recognized any more.
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
-# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
-# The default value is: YES.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES then doxygen will produce a new
-# page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be part
-# of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
-# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
-# the documentation. An alias has the form:
-# name=value
-# For example adding
-# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
-# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
-# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
-# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
-# newlines.
-
-ALIASES                =
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
-# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
-# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
-
-TCL_SUBST              =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
-# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
-# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
-# members will be omitted, etc.
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
-# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
-# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
-# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
-# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
-# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
-# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
-# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
-# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
-# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
-# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
-# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
-# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
-# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
-#
-# Note: For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
-#
-# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
-# the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
-
-# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
-# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
-# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
-# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
-# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
-# case of backward compatibilities issues.
-# The default value is: YES.
-
-MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
-
-# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
-# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
-# be prevented in individual cases by putting a % sign in front of the word or
-# globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
-# The default value is: YES.
-
-AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
-# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
-# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
-# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
-# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
-# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
-# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
-# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
-# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
-# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
-# should set this option to NO.
-# The default value is: YES.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
-# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
-# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
-# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
-# \nosubgrouping command.
-# The default value is: YES.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
-# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
-# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
-# and RTF).
-#
-# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
-# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
-
-# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
-# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
-# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
-# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
-# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
-# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
-# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
-# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
-# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
-# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
-# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
-# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
-# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
-# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
-# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
-# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
-# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
-
-LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES, doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
-# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
-# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
-# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
-# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES, all private members of a class will
-# be included in the documentation.
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES, all members with package or internal
-# scope will be included in the documentation.
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES, all static members of a file will be
-# included in the documentation.
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes (and structs) defined
-# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO,
-# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
-# for Java sources.
-# The default value is: YES.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. If set to YES, local methods,
-# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
-# included in the documentation. If set to NO, only methods in the interface are
-# included.
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
-# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
-# are hidden.
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
-# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
-# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
-# to NO, these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option
-# has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
-# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO, these declarations will be
-# included in the documentation.
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO, these
-# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
-# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
-# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
-# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES, upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-# The default value is: system dependent.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
-# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES, the
-# scope will be hidden.
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_COMPOUND_REFERENCE tag is set to NO (default) then doxygen will
-# append additional text to a page's title, such as Class Reference. If set to
-# YES the compound reference will be hidden.
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-HIDE_COMPOUND_REFERENCE= NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
-# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
-# The default value is: YES.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
-# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
-# which file to include in order to use the member.
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
-# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
-# documentation for inline members.
-# The default value is: YES.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
-# name. If set to NO, the members will appear in declaration order.
-# The default value is: YES.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
-# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
-# name. If set to NO, the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
-# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
-# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
-# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
-# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
-# member documentation.
-# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
-# detailed member documentation.
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
-# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
-# appear in their defined order.
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
-# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
-# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
-# list.
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
-# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
-# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
-# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
-# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
-# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the todo
-# list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the documentation.
-# The default value is: YES.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the test
-# list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the documentation.
-# The default value is: YES.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the bug
-# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
-# The default value is: YES.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO)
-# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
-# the documentation.
-# The default value is: YES.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
-# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
-# ... \endcond blocks.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
-# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
-# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
-# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
-# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
-# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
-# documentation regardless of this setting.
-# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
-# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES, the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-# The default value is: YES.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
-# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
-# (if specified).
-# The default value is: YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES             = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
-# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified).
-# The default value is: YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
-# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
-# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
-# version. For an example see the documentation.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
-# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
-# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
-# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
-# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
-# will be used as the name of the layout file.
-#
-# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
-# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
-# tag is left empty.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE            =
-
-# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
-# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
-# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
-# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
-# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
-# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
-# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
-
-CITE_BIB_FILES         =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
-# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
-# messages are off.
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-QUIET                  = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated to standard error (stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
-# this implies that the warnings are on.
-#
-# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
-# The default value is: YES.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate
-# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
-# will automatically be disabled.
-# The default value is: YES.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
-# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
-# markup commands wrongly.
-# The default value is: YES.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
-# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
-# value. If set to NO, doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete
-# parameter documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
-# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
-# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
-# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
-# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
-# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
-# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
-# error (stderr).
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
-# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
-# spaces.
-# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
-
-INPUT                  = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
-# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
-# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
-# possible encodings.
-# The default value is: UTF-8.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
-# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
-# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
-# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
-# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
-# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
-# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
-                         *.c \
-                         *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
-# be searched for input files as well.
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-RECURSIVE              = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-#
-# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
-# run.
-
-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories.
-#
-# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
-# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = */uip/* \
-                         */FATFs/*
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-#
-# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
-# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
-# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
-# command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
-# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
-# files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
-# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
-# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
-# \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command:
-#
-# <filter> <input-file>
-#
-# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
-# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
-# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
-# will be ignored.
-#
-# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
-# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
-# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
-# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
-# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
-# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
-# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
-# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
-# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
-# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
-# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
-
-# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
-# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
-# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
-# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
-
-USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
-# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-#
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
-# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
-# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
-# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
-# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
-# The default value is: YES.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
-# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
-# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
-# to YES then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
-# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
-# link to the documentation.
-# The default value is: YES.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
-# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
-# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
-# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
-# can opt to disable this feature.
-# The default value is: YES.
-# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
-
-SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
-# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
-# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
-# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
-# 4.8.6 or higher.
-#
-# To use it do the following:
-# - Install the latest version of global
-# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
-# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
-# - Run doxygen as normal
-#
-# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
-# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
-#
-# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
-# source code will now point to the output of htags.
-# The default value is: NO.
-# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
-# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
-# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-# See also: Section \class.
-# The default value is: YES.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
-
-# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES then doxygen will use the
-# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
-# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
-# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
-# information.
-# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
-# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
-
-# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
-# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
-# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
-# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
-# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
-
-CLANG_OPTIONS          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
-# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
-# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-# The default value is: YES.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
-
-# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
-# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
-# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
-# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
-# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
-# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
-# while generating the index headers.
-# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate HTML output
-# The default value is: YES.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
-# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
-# it.
-# The default directory is: html.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
-# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
-# The default value is: .html.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
-# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-#
-# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
-# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
-# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
-# default header using
-# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
-# YourConfigFile
-# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
-# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
-# uses.
-# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
-# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
-# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
-
-HTML_HEADER            =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
-# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
-# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
-# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
-# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
-# that doxygen normally uses.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
-# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
-# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
-# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
-# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
-# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
-# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
-# obsolete.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        =
-
-# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
-# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
-# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
-# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
-# standard style sheet and is therefore more robust against future updates.
-# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
-# Note: The order of the extra style sheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
-# style sheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
-# list). For an example see the documentation.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
-
-HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
-
-# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
-# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
-# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
-# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
-# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
-# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
-
-HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
-
-# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
-# will adjust the colors in the style sheet and background images according to
-# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
-# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
-# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
-# purple, and 360 is red again.
-# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
-
-HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
-
-# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
-# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
-# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
-# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
-
-HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
-
-# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
-# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
-# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
-# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
-# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
-# change the gamma.
-# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
-
-HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
-# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-# The default value is: YES.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded.
-# The default value is: NO.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
-
-# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
-# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
-# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
-# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
-# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
-# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
-# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
-# tree by default.
-# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
-
-HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
-# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
-# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
-# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
-# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
-# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
-# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
-# for more information.
-# The default value is: NO.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
-
-# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
-# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
-# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
-# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
-# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
-# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
-# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
-# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
-# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
-# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
-
-DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
-
-# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
-# The default value is: Publisher.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
-
-DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
-# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
-# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
-# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
-# Windows.
-#
-# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
-# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
-# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
-# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
-# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
-# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
-# compressed HTML files.
-# The default value is: NO.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
-# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
-
-CHM_FILE               =
-
-# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
-# including file name) of the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty,
-# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-# The file has to be specified with full path.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           =
-
-# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated
-# (YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-# The default value is: NO.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc)
-# and project file content.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
-
-# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated
-# (YES) or a normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
-# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
-# The default value is: NO.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
-# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-# The default value is: NO.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
-# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
-# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
-# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
-# The default value is: NO.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
-
-GENERATE_QHP           = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
-# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
-# the HTML output folder.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
-
-QCH_FILE               =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
-# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
-# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
-# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
-# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
-# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
-# folders).
-# The default value is: doc.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
-
-# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
-# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
-# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
-# filters).
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
-# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
-# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
-# filters).
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
-# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
-# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
-
-# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
-# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
-# generated .qhp file.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
-
-QHG_LOCATION           =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
-# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
-# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
-# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
-# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
-# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
-# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-# The default value is: NO.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
-# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
-# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
-# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
-# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
-# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
-# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
-# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
-# The default value is: NO.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
-# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
-# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
-# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
-# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
-# HTML help feature. Via custom style sheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
-# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
-# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
-# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
-# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
-# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
-# The default value is: NO.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
-
-# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
-# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-#
-# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
-# in the overview section.
-# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
-# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
-# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-# If the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES, doxygen will open links to
-# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
-# The default value is: NO.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
-
-EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
-# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
-# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
-# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
-# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
-
-# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
-# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
-# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
-#
-# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
-# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
-# The default value is: YES.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
-
-FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
-
-# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
-# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
-# instead of using pre-rendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
-# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
-# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
-# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
-# The default value is: NO.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
-
-USE_MATHJAX            = NO
-
-# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
-# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
-# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
-# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
-# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
-# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
-# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
-
-MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
-
-# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
-# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
-# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
-# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
-# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
-# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
-# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
-# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
-# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
-# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
-
-MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
-
-# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
-# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
-# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
-# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
-
-MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
-
-# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
-# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
-# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
-# example see the documentation.
-# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
-
-MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
-# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
-# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
-# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
-# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
-# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
-# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
-# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
-# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
-# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
-# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
-# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
-# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
-# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
-# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
-# option.
-# The default value is: YES.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
-# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
-# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
-# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
-# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
-# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
-# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
-# The default value is: NO.
-# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
-
-# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
-# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
-# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
-# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
-# search results.
-#
-# Doxygen ships with an example indexer (doxyindexer) and search engine
-# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
-# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
-#
-# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
-# The default value is: NO.
-# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
-
-EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
-
-# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
-# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
-#
-# Doxygen ships with an example indexer (doxyindexer) and search engine
-# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
-# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
-# Searching" for details.
-# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
-
-SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
-
-# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
-# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
-# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
-# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
-# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
-
-SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
-
-# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
-# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
-# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
-# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
-# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
-
-EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
-
-# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
-# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
-# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
-# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
-# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
-# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
-# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
-
-EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
-# The default value is: YES.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
-# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
-# it.
-# The default directory is: latex.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked.
-#
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
-# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
-# written to the output directory.
-# The default file is: latex.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
-# index for LaTeX.
-# The default file is: makeindex.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
-# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
-# trees in general.
-# The default value is: NO.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
-# printer.
-# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
-# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
-# The default value is: a4.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
-# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
-# instance you can specify
-# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
-# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
-# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
-# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
-# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
-# default header to a separate file.
-#
-# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
-# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
-# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
-# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empty
-# string, for the replacement values of the other commands the user is referred
-# to HTML_HEADER.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
-
-LATEX_HEADER           =
-
-# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
-# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
-# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
-# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
-# special commands can be used inside the footer.
-#
-# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
-
-LATEX_FOOTER           =
-
-# The LATEX_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
-# LaTeX style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets created
-# by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects. Doxygen
-# will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
-# Note: The order of the extra style sheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
-# style sheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
-# list).
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
-
-LATEX_EXTRA_STYLESHEET =
-
-# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
-# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
-# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
-# markers available.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
-
-LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
-# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
-# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
-# The default value is: YES.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
-# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES, to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-# The default value is: YES.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
-# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
-# when generating formulas in HTML.
-# The default value is: NO.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
-# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
-# The default value is: NO.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
-# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
-#
-# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
-# SOURCE_BROWSER.
-# The default value is: NO.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
-
-# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
-# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
-# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
-# The default value is: plain.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
-
-LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate RTF output. The
-# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
-# readers/editors.
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
-# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
-# it.
-# The default directory is: rtf.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES, doxygen generates more compact RTF
-# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
-# trees in general.
-# The default value is: NO.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
-# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
-# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
-# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
-# fields.
-#
-# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
-# The default value is: NO.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
-# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
-# missing definitions are set to their default value.
-#
-# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
-# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
-# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
-# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
-
-# If the RTF_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source code
-# with syntax highlighting in the RTF output.
-#
-# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
-# SOURCE_BROWSER.
-# The default value is: NO.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
-
-RTF_SOURCE_CODE        = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate man pages for
-# classes and files.
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
-# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
-# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
-# MAN_OUTPUT.
-# The default directory is: man.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
-# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
-# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
-# optional.
-# The default value is: .3.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
-# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
-# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
-
-MAN_SUBDIR             =
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
-# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
-# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
-# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
-# The default value is: NO.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate an XML file that
-# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
-# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
-# it.
-# The default directory is: xml.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES, doxygen will dump the program
-# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
-# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
-# of the XML output.
-# The default value is: YES.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate Docbook files
-# that can be used to generate PDF.
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
-
-# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
-# front of it.
-# The default directory is: docbook.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
-
-DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
-
-# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES, doxygen will include the
-# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
-# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
-# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
-# The default value is: NO.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
-
-DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate an
-# AutoGen Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the
-# structure of the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is
-# still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate a Perl module
-# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
-#
-# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate the necessary
-# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
-# output from the Perl module output.
-# The default value is: NO.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES, the Perl module output will be nicely
-# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
-# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO, the
-# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
-# just the same.
-# The default value is: YES.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
-# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
-# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
-# overwrite each other's variables.
-# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES, doxygen will evaluate all
-# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
-# The default value is: YES.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES, doxygen will expand all macro names
-# in the source code. If set to NO, only conditional compilation will be
-# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
-# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-# The default value is: NO.
-# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
-# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
-# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-# The default value is: NO.
-# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES, the include files in the
-# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
-# The default value is: YES.
-# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
-# preprocessor.
-# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
-# used.
-# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
-# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
-# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
-# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
-# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
-# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
-
-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
-                         PROGMEM
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
-# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
-# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
-# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
-# definition found in the source code.
-# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
-# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
-# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
-# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
-# removed.
-# The default value is: YES.
-# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
-# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
-# a tag file without this location is as follows:
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
-# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
-# of tag files.
-# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
-# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
-# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
-# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
-# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES, all external class will be listed in
-# the class index. If set to NO, only the inherited external classes will be
-# listed.
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES, all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
-# listed.
-# The default value is: YES.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES, all external pages will be listed in
-# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
-# be listed.
-# The default value is: YES.
-
-EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
-# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate a class diagram
-# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
-# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
-# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-# The default value is: YES.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            =
-
-# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
-# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
-# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
-# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
-
-DIA_PATH               =
-
-# If set to YES the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
-# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
-# The default value is: YES.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
-# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
-# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
-# set to NO
-# The default value is: NO.
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
-# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
-# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
-# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
-# speed.
-# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
-# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
-
-DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
-
-# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
-# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
-# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
-# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
-# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
-# The default value is: Helvetica.
-# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME           =
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
-# dot graphs.
-# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
-# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
-# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
-# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
-# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH           =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
-# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
-# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-# The default value is: YES.
-# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
-# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
-# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
-# class with other documented classes.
-# The default value is: YES.
-# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
-# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
-# The default value is: YES.
-# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-# The default value is: NO.
-# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
-# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
-# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
-# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
-# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
-# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
-# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
-# 10.
-# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
-# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
-
-UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
-
-# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
-# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
-# instances.
-# The default value is: NO.
-# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
-# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
-# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
-# files.
-# The default value is: YES.
-# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
-
-# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
-# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
-# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
-# files.
-# The default value is: YES.
-# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
-# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
-#
-# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
-# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
-# functions only using the \callgraph command.
-# The default value is: NO.
-# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
-# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
-#
-# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
-# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
-# functions only using the \callergraph command.
-# The default value is: NO.
-# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
-# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-# The default value is: YES.
-# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
-# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
-# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
-# files in the directories.
-# The default value is: YES.
-# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot.
-# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
-# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
-# requirement).
-# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
-# The default value is: png.
-# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
-# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
-#
-# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
-# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
-# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
-# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
-# The default value is: NO.
-# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
-
-INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
-
-# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
-
-DOT_PATH               =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
-# command).
-# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
-# command).
-
-MSCFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
-# command).
-
-DIAFILE_DIRS           =
-
-# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
-# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
-# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
-# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
-# will not generate output for the diagram.
-
-PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
-
-# When using plantuml, the specified paths are searched for files specified by
-# the !include statement in a plantuml block.
-
-PLANTUML_INCLUDE_PATH  =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
-# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
-# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
-# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
-# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
-# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
-# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
-# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
-# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
-# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
-# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
-# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
-# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
-# to support this out of the box.
-#
-# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
-# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
-# read).
-# The default value is: NO.
-# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES to allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
-# this, this feature is disabled by default.
-# The default value is: NO.
-# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
-# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
-# graphs.
-# The default value is: YES.
-# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES, doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
-# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
-# The default value is: YES.
-# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/makefile b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/makefile
deleted file mode 100644
index 852d011bc..000000000
--- a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/makefile
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,46 +0,0 @@
-#
-#             LUFA Library
-#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
-#
-#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
-#           www.lufa-lib.org
-#
-# --------------------------------------
-#         LUFA Project Makefile.
-# --------------------------------------
-
-# Run "make help" for target help.
-
-MCU          = at90usb1287
-ARCH         = AVR8
-BOARD        = USBKEY
-F_CPU        = 8000000
-F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
-OPTIMIZATION = s
-TARGET       = Webserver
-SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c USBDeviceMode.c USBHostMode.c Lib/SCSI.c Lib/DataflashManager.c \
-               Lib/uIPManagement.c Lib/DHCPCommon.c Lib/DHCPClientApp.c Lib/DHCPServerApp.c Lib/HTTPServerApp.c \
-               Lib/TELNETServerApp.c Lib/uip/uip.c Lib/uip/uip_arp.c Lib/uip/timer.c Lib/uip/clock.c \
-               Lib/uip/uip-split.c Lib/FATFs/diskio.c Lib/FATFs/ff.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)
-LUFA_PATH    = ../../LUFA
-CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/ -ILib/uip/ -ILib/FATFs/
-LD_FLAGS     =
-
-# Default target
-all:
-
-# Include LUFA-specific DMBS extension modules
-DMBS_LUFA_PATH ?= $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/LUFA
-include $(DMBS_LUFA_PATH)/lufa-sources.mk
-include $(DMBS_LUFA_PATH)/lufa-gcc.mk
-
-# Include common DMBS build system modules
-DMBS_PATH      ?= $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/DMBS/DMBS
-include $(DMBS_PATH)/core.mk
-include $(DMBS_PATH)/cppcheck.mk
-include $(DMBS_PATH)/doxygen.mk
-include $(DMBS_PATH)/dfu.mk
-include $(DMBS_PATH)/gcc.mk
-include $(DMBS_PATH)/hid.mk
-include $(DMBS_PATH)/avrdude.mk
-include $(DMBS_PATH)/atprogram.mk